Home

Reports Form Procedures

1. Cardholders Folder Precision Access Form Form Element Type Comment Precision Access Inclusion Exclusion Groups display Lists all currently defined Exclusion or Inclusion groups your system will have one or the other and the readers and timezones elevator control levels that belong to each A E icon precedes each exclusion group entry An icon precedes each inclusion group entry Exclusion or Inclusion groups are defined on the Precision Access form of the Access Levels folder Assigned Groups display Lists the Inclusion Exclusion Groups assigned to the selected cardholder badge record Assign push button Assigns to the selected cardholder badge record the access levels selected in the Precision Access Inclusion Exclusion Groups field Remove push button Removes from the current cardholder badge record the access levels selected in the Precision Access Inclusion Exclusion Groups field revision 105 171 12 Cardholders Folder Precision Access Form Procedures Assign Precision Access Groups to a Badge 1 Select the Badge Info from the View men The Cardholders folder opens 2 Select the Precision Access tab 3 Locate the cardholder record that you want to assign precision access Precision access can only be assigned to the selected cardholder s visitor s active badge A Click Modify 5 In the Precision Access Inclusion or Exclusion Groups window se
2. 00000 33 Menus and Toolbars E 33 revision 105 3 Table of Contents WOOIDAr Proced re S aroia a a dita vebeet AEE E aeea 46 How to Use the Toolbars AANEREN 46 Alarm Monitoring Status Bart siti sisteces eene anaa naa KEE ele tan an Eana ATE ea Zeie 46 System Administrator Procedures ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 47 Chapter 3 System Administrator Procedures csscccee 49 Administrative Procedures Checklist cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeees 49 Access Control Procedures Checklist cccescecceesserseeseeeeseesesseeeeeessenees 50 Monitoring Procedures Checklist cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaes 51 Video Procedures Checklist sj nce ate ee ehh ee et edie le 52 Operator e E 53 Chapter 4 Set Alarm Monitoring Display Options 55 User defined Display Options EE 55 System Status Options Window ENEE 55 Display Option Procedures EE 57 Select Event Types to Monitor 0 ccccceeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeeccaeeeseaaeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeea 57 Select Column Configuration 58 Set Automatic Display Options cccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeesaeeeseaaeeseeeeeeeaeeeee 59 Display Multiple Wmdows A 60 Select Hardware View Options cccccccesseeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeseceeesaaeeeeneees 60 Chapter 5 Monitor Devices cccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees
3. Alarm Event Event Type Description Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Generated when a fire device is in alarm Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Generated when a fire alarm has been Acknowledge Acknowledge acknowledged Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Generated when a fire alarm has been Acknowledged Clear Acknowledged Clear acknowledged and cleared Fire Alarm Block Fire Alarm Block Fire Generated when all fire alarms have been Acknowledge Acknowledge acknowledged at the fire panel Fire Alarm In Fire Alarm In Fire Generated when a new fire alarm has been detected for the device Fire Alarm Out Fire Alarm Out Fire Generated when a device with a previous fire alarm has returned to its normal state First Card Unlock First Card Unlock Mode System Generated when first card unlock mode is Mode Disabled Disabled disabled for a door First Card Unlock First Card Unlock Mode System Generated when first card unlock mode is Mode Enabled Enabled enabled for a door Doors configured for first card unlock mode will not unlock until a user with first card unlock authority gains entry Foil Break Alarm Foil Break Alarm Trouble Generated when a break in a foil circuit occurs This is most commonly used to trigger an alarm when glass being protected with the foil circuit is broken Foil Break Restore Foil Break Restore Trouble Generated when a foil break alarm condition has been restored Foodstamps Tender Foodstamps Tender POS Indicates that food st
4. Note On the Event Reports form any report in the reports listing window that has Cardholder listed in the Type s column is available on the Reports form in the Cardholders folder This means that a report can be generated on the Reports form in the Cardholders folder based on a cardholder search operation Event Reports Form Overview This form allows you to add filtering criteria to an event report so that you can narrow the results of your report 264 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Event Reports Form Field Table Reports Folder Event Reports Form Form Element Type Comment Listing window display Lists currently defined event reports and each report s type s Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type Today push button Click this button to e Set the Start time date to 12 00 00 AM on the current date e Set the End time date to 11 59 59 PM on the current date Start section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the Start date checkbox and choose a specific start date from the drop down calendar April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 30 31 1 2 3 8 9 10 15 16 17 22 23 24 29 30 1 lt Today 37672003 e Select the first month for which data is to be included in this report Use the DW and _ navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month
5. Rewind Jumps back 10 matching asset records Previous Record Displays the previous matching asset record Next Record Displays the next matching asset record Fast Forward Jumps forward 10 matching asset records Last Record Displays the last matching asset record Asset Groups and Classes Displays the Asset Groups and Classes Management folder window Asset Types and Displays the Asset Types and Subtypes Management folder window Subtypes Show Assignments Displays the Filter Out Assignments After X Days window which allows you to specify the X Days Past number of days you want to view Bulk Add Mode Enables you to quickly enter multiple Scan IDs for the same type of asset e g enter multiple Scan ID s for 10 portable PCs To display the Bulk Add Mode menu option an asset record must be open in the Assets folder window revision 105 45 2 Main Alarm Monitoring Window Toolbar Procedures How to Use the Toolbars Alarm Monitoring utilizes one standard Windows toolbar If you want to Procedure Display the name of a toolbar button Point to the toolbar button with the mouse without clicking Use a toolbar button to perform a command or function Click the toolbar button with the left mouse button Change the toolbar from anchored to floating Change the toolbar from floating to anchored Double c
6. display Displayed in add or modify mode Indicates the most recent date that the selected badge was printed Badge Form Procedures Add a Badge Record Nae pees UD Select the Badge Info from the View menu The Cardholders folder opens Select the Badge tab Locate the cardholder record for which you want to create a badge Click Add Select a Badge type from the drop down list Badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder For more information refer to the Badge Types Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Refer to the Badge form field table and enter the appropriate information into the activated fields in the middle left section of the Badge form revision 105 157 12 Cardholders Folder 158 revision 105 Note 10 11 12 Some information is assigned by the system and you may or may not be able to change it Click OK to save the record If this is the only active badge assigned to this cardholder you re done and do not need to proceed to the next step If another active badge was previously assigned to this cardholder the Change Badge Status window will open Change Badge Status xi A cardholder is only allowed to have 1 active badge s Please select a currently active badge from the list below and choose a new status for it Press Cancel to abort the operation Active Badge my New Status Lost x e The current active badge is dis
7. year spin buttons 20035 e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the day that you want the selected badge to activate on b If your system is configured so that you can specify a specific activation time enter a time in the field to the right of the date field This time will be used in conjunction with the selected activation date 166 revision 105 Notes Alarm Monitoring User Guide To specify the activation time the Store expiration date field on the Options sub tab of the Access Panels form must be set to Date only or Date and time The Date and time option applies to Best panels only while the Date only option applies to Best and Apollo panels but not Offline Lock panels The activation time you enter should match the granularity setting on the Cardholder Options folder General Cardholder Options form Otherwise the time you enter will be rounded down For example if the granularity is set to 30 minutes and you enter any time between 4 00 and 4 29 the time will automatically be rounded to 4 00 Any time entered between 4 31 and 4 59 will be rounded to 4 30 In the Deactivation Date section repeat step 5 choosing the date when you want the selected badge to become invalid Click Set Repeat steps 4 7 for each access level entry Click OK revision 105 167 12 Cardholders Folder Assign Access Levels to a Selected Group of Car 168 revision 105 olders 1 Locate
8. Cardholder Form Procedures Add a Cardholder Record ilk Note Note Select the Badge Info choice from the View menu The Cardholders folder opens By default the Cardholder form is displayed Click Add From the Person type drop down list select Cardholders The Person type drop down list is subject to licensing restrictions If this field is not displayed move on to the next step Enter the cardholder s name and any additional information in the cardholder data fields You can switch to other tabs and modify the other forms at this time If you want to add a photograph or signature to the cardholder record click Capture The Multimedia Capture module opens For more information refer to the Multimedia Capture Module appendix in the System Administration User Guide Click OK to save the record revision 105 145 12 Cardholders Folder Modify a Cardholder Record FY H Locate the cardholder record you want to change Click Modify Make the changes you want to the record Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to revert to the previously saved values Delete a Cardholder Record Note Locate the cardholder record you want to delete Click Delete Click OK If you delete the cardholder record all associated records Badge Access Levels Precision Access Biometrics Assets Directory Accounts Guard Tours and Visits for the cardholder are also removed from the database
9. Adjusts the Video Player to display a single camera view The single view feature displays the first camera view regardless of which camera view is selected Matrix View E Enlarges the Video Player to display up to four camera views two images across and two images down Additional cameras can be seen using the scroll bar Display Displays live or previously recorded video window Status bar For information on the status bar please refer to Video Player Status Bar Table on on page 82 Video Player Status Bar Table Symbol Field Description A Date and time display When live video is playing the status bar displays the camera name When recorded video is playing the status bar contains two arrow heads A You can click the arrow heads to change the information displayed to any of the following e Camera name e Video start date and time e Video start date time and end date time Video display scroll bar Move the scroll bar back and forth to view video at different dates times You do NOT need to pause or stop video to use the video display scroll bar Note Cameras configured with an LNVR recorder display different colors in the scroll bar for different types of recorded video e Red video is not available e g a download was performed LNVR was disconnected or restarted e White video is not being recorded e g time lapse recording e Green video is being re
10. Print a Report 1 Select a report from within the Reports folder Reports are also available in the Cardholders folder Reports form and the Assets folder Reports form You can use this procedure to print those reports as well revision 105 299 17 Print Report Options Window Notes Toolbar Shortcut Print Note 300 revision 105 The report form is available from within the Reports folder Cardholders folder and Assets folder for System Administration and ID CredentialCenter The report form is only available from the Cardholders folder in Alarm Monitoring View menu gt Badge Info gt Reports form tab The availability of the Reports folder is subject to licensing restrictions Select additional criteria if you want the report to include only a specific range of data Click one of the following e The Print button on the Main toolbar e Print button on the form The Print Report Options window opens Print Report Options xi r Print Destination e Print to a Preview Window Export Directly to a File Print Directly to a Printer JV Prompt for Number of Pages r Report Subtitle You can update the text used for the report subtitle below In the Print Destination section select whether to print to a preview window export directly to a file or print directly to a printer If you selected Print Directly to a Printer in the Print Destination section select a pr
11. cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseceeeeseaaeeneneees 174 Visits Form View Mode EE 176 Visits Form Modify Mode ssssssnnnnnsessnnnnssssrsrrrnnsserrrrnnnssernnnnnsserrrnnneesent 176 WISELER 177 Modify a Cardholder s Permission to Have Visitors cccceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeees 177 PRS SOUS ONIN EE 179 Assets F rm deel 179 Assign an Asset to a Cardholder ccccecceceenceceeeeeeeaeeceeeeeeeaaeesecaeeesaaaeseceeeessaaeeneneees 179 Wnassign an ASSOt E 180 10 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Modify the ASSCt Group aesan ana aa aa clean er Ess eh ege e dE 180 Directory ACCOUNTS POM EE 181 Directory Accounts Form e E 181 Link a Cardholder to a Directory Account cecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeseeeeteeeeees 181 Unlink a Directory ACCOUNT icone seuraisi el ed eee ee ee ie 182 CSET EACH To rs ld EE 183 Guard Tours Form Bi lee E 184 Assign Guard Tour Security Clearance Levels to a Cardholder ecccccceeeeeees 184 REPONS OMA resis eie lat dened t ted ania ta tates E et reheat geen 185 Reports Form Procedures nics cicssscaiveisnteiaasiuernedinndscvelescsavanddsnadavancanndautiaciecss 185 Rurnva Gardholder Repor GE 185 Chapter 13 Badge Print Preview Window ssssseeeesee 187 Badge Print Preview Window Procedures A 188 Preview and Print a Badge cceeeecseeceeeeeecneeeceeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaaes 188 Cha
12. overriding badge e For these fields to be enabled the Choose alternate printer type printer checkbox on the Users Folder Cardholder Permission assignment Groups Form Badge sub tab must be selected For more information refer to the Users Folder chapter in the System Administration or ID CredentialCenter users guide Selecting this checkbox overrides the printer assignments in the Printing Encoding form of the Badge Types folder 196 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Visits Folder Sign In Visit s Window Field Table Continued Form Element Type Comment Assign this access checkbox numeric e For these fields to be enabled the Allow access control control badge ID badge assignment checkbox on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter must be selected e The badge must already exist in the system e The existing badge s class must be Visitor e Ifthe visitor already has an active access control badge from a manual assignment or another visit this field will automatically be populated with that ID e Ifyou do not want to assign an access control badge ID for the visitor deselect this checkbox Sign In push button Signs in the visit using the options selected on the form Cancel push button Closes the Sign In Visit s window without signing in the visit revision 105 197 14 Visits Folder Print Badge s Window
13. revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Folder Anti Passback Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Use restored records checkbox If this checkbox is selected data for an event or user transaction report is obtained from restored events transactions in the database rather than from the current live events transactions Restored events transactions are those restored using the Restore Archive button on the Restoring form of the Archives folder For more information refer to the Archives Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Close push button Closes the Reports folder Anti Passback Reports Form Procedures Run an Anti Passback Report Note Select Reports from Administration View menu The Reports folder opens Select the Anti Passback Reports tab In the reports listing window select the icon that corresponds to the report you wish to run Complete the Date Time Filter section to specify a date time interval for gathering data Only data gathered during the specified period will be included in the report To limit each date in the range to the specified time interval select the Apply start and end time to each day checkbox In the Cardholder Filter section enter the person s Last Name First Name and or Badge ID if you want the report to contain data pertaining only to cardholders having the specified name or badge ID In t
14. Access Denied Access Denied Access Generated when the alternate biometric Biometric Reader Biometric Reader Denied reader could not be contacted for Offline Offline verification was offline Access Denied No Access Denied No Access Generated when the cardholder did not have Biometric Template Biometric Template Denied a biometric template loaded in the database so a verification could not be done Access Denied Reader Access Denied Reader Access Generated when access was denied because Locked Locked Denied the reader was locked Access Granted Access Granted Reader Access Generated when access was granted because Reader Unlocked Unlocked Granted the reader was unlocked Acknowledgment Acknowledgment System Generated when an alarm is acknowledged Action Executed Action Executed and actions associated with the alarm are executed Acknowledgment Acknowledgment System Generated when there is a failure to execute Action Failed Action Failed actions associated with an alarm acknowledgment Alarm Active Alarm Active System Generated when an alarm has become active Alarm Monitoring Alarm Monitoring System Generated when the action group is Action Group Executed Action Group Executed executed Alarm Monitoring Alarm Monitoring System Generated when the action group execution Action Group Failed Action Group Failed fails Alarm Restored Alarm Cancelled System Generated when a device has come online or an alarm condition h
15. Delete a Selected Group of Cardholder Records UN Warning 146 revision 105 This is a powerful feature that cannot be undone Use caution when performing a bulk deletion of cardholders to ensure that you only delete the cardholders you want to eliminate from your database 1 Locate the cardholder records you want to delete using the search function The bulk delete operation will act on all cardholders that result from the current search Select Bulk gt Delete Cardholders in Search from the Cardholder menu The following message is displayed You are about to DELETE the 3 cardholder s found in your current search THIS OPERATION CANNOT BE UNDONE Are you sure you wish to continue el nl Click Yes Alarm Monitoring User Guide Destroy all Cardholder Data any transaction logging and cannot be undone This function is mainly intended for wiping out data after a system has been installed and tested For example when you are first setting up the system and have imported cardholder data but you wish to change and redo the import This function provides a quick way to wipe out all existing cardholder data i This feature will wipe out all cardholder and badge information from the database without Warning 1 Select Bulk gt Destroy ALL Cardholder Data from the Cardholder menu The following message is displayed You are about to DESTROY ALL CARDHOLDER DATA for 28 existing cardholders This includes Ba
16. Enter the cardholder s last name First Name text Enter the cardholder s first name Badge ID numeric If you wish to report on the activity associated with a specific badge enter the Badge ID here This field is available only for applicable report types Report All push button If this button is pushed all entries in the Area list are deselected Report All is displayed to the left of this button to indicate that data for all areas will be included in the report Report All __ selected display Indicates Report All if no entries are selected in the Area field Indicates __ selected if one or more entries are selected in the Area field Area listing window display Lists all anti passback areas defined on the system and the access panel associated with each To select deselect an area click on the icon beside it A O on an icon indicates that the area is selected Only data pertaining to selected areas will be included in the report However if no entries are selected data for all areas will be reported Clear push button Clears all current filter criteria Print push button Displays the Print Report Options window Preview push button Displays the selected report with selected criteria in the Report Print Preview window Help push button Displays relevant on screen help for this form 256
17. Form Element Type Comment Reader Device Group listing window display Displays a list of available reader groups which have been configured in the system Reader Mode drop down list When configuring a reader mode group action select a mode from this drop down list Choices include e Card Only e Facility Code Only e Locked e Card AND Pin e Pin OR Card e Unlocked Verify Mode drop down list When configuring a reader mode group action for a group of readers on a Best controller that are primary readers to alternate biometric readers you can select a verify mode When verify mode is enabled for alternate reader support the primary reader will ask for verification from the alternate reader When configuring a reader mode group action for readers that are not primary readers alternate biometric readers this field is disabled First Card Unlock checkbox Select this checkbox if you want the reader mode group action to be that first card unlock mode is enabled Doors configured with first card unlock will not unlock until valid personnel arrives For example rather than setting a lobby door to unlock at 9 00 am you can leave it in a secure mode Oe card only card and pin etc and set the first card unlock to 9 00 am The first person that comes in the door after 9 00 am will have to present their card Once access is granted the reader mode will change to unlocked This feature is
18. Receiver and Receiver Account Events All the events that occurred on a receiver or receiver account Segment Badge Download Summary For each segment lists the count of badges that must be downloaded to the access panels in that segment This report is valid only for systems that use the Segmentation feature Segments Listing of segments defined on the system and their options This report is valid only for systems that use the Segmentation feature SNMP Agents Lists all SNMP agents sorted by segment and name SNMP Management Lists all MIB data grouped by enterprise Information Base Configuration Text Instructions All text instructions Timezones Timezone definitions 420 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Report name Description User Permissions All system users and their permissions User Transaction Log Chronological log of all transactions performed on the system by users User Transaction Log By User ID Chronological log of all transactions performed grouped by User ID Video Camera Device Links Listing of all video camera device links Video Cameras Listing of all video cameras Video Events Listing of all video events Video Servers Listing of all video servers Visit History Listing of each visit Visitors Listing of all visitors Windows Event Log All errors logged by the system to the
19. e Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the year and use the spin buttons 20035 e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the first day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the Start time checkbox and choosing a specific start time bh 2 08 02 AM i Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons revision 105 265 15 Reports Folder Reports Folder Event Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment End section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the End date checkbox and choose a specific end date from the drop down calendar April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 20 21 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 25 29 30 1 2 5 6 H 8 9 lt Today 37672003 e Select the last month for which data is to be included in this report Use the ER and Ej navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the last year for which data is to be included in this report To
20. revision 105 269 15 Reports Folder Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Field Table Reports Folder Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Form Element Type Comment Listing window display Lists currently defined alarm acknowledgment reports and each report s type s Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type Today push button Click this button to e Set the Start time date to 12 00 00 AM on the current date e Set the End time date to 11 59 59 PM on the current date Start section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the Start date checkbox and choose a specific start date from the drop down calendar ES April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 20 21 2 3 4 mm 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 2 27 28 29 30 1 2 4 P 6 7 8 9 lt Today 3 6 2003 e Select the first month for which data is to be included in this report Use the a and navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the Led displayed year to access the spin buttons 2003 4 e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the first day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date 270 revision
21. 10 16 2001 10 03 01 AM Title Marketing Assistant Y Department Marketing E Division Sales S Location 1050 Pittstord Victor Road hd Building Floor 2 B Office phone Extension 852 Senn daku No Last Access Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate ran 996 77872001 Id 44 4 gt ul 2 o2 Deactivate In the System Administration and ID CredentialCenter applications the Cardholder form is used to Define a cardholder Choose a badge type for the cardholder Enter social security number birth date address and other demographic information into the cardholder record Access the Multimedia Capture Module subject to licensing restrictions In the Visitor Management application the Cardholder form is used to search for a cardholder Alarm Monitoring User Guide Cardholders Folder Cardholder Form Form Element Type Comment Cardholder data text drop down Displayed in view mode When adding or modifying a cardholder lists numeric record enter the cardholder s information such as name address and department into these fields Record last numeric changed Displayed in view mode and indicates the date on which the selected cardholder record was last modified and saved This date is updated only when cardholder information is changed not when badge information is changed The last changed date is saved individually for each badge record as well
22. 181 TK diM aps vesepasseveeseessdy ts rasiesey ees Edrie 123 List Options ENEE 50 revision 105 425 Index Load a video Die 89 LOCAte A device rssmi 71 Logging in using automatic single sign on 28 using manual single sign on 0 0 ee 29 without using single sign on 25 Logging out of the application ee 31 Lookup a cardholder assigned to an asset 292 M Maps displayen iune inan 122 Dnked r e ie ENEE 123 Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties WiNdOW EEN ie pE SEa 365 field table spionen eeno 366 procedures sneis ses 366 Mask Unmask Alarm Input Properties window 363 field tablen nitr 364 Proc dures eiser e ie ergerrtede te eE a 364 Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties WN e EE 367 field table vc hee EN 368 PLOCECUIES ss asore eea aa aea dere 368 Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties window cece ceceseeeeeeeees 373 field tables can ahaa eege ies 374 Ile 374 Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Properties KE e Aide ee Ae 371 field table ste e ee gle es 372 PLOCECUIES e oo ienes oreeson eenas 372 Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties WindOW seeseeeeeeeeeseeeereseeesee 377 field table 0 ee eee esee ce ceeeeeecneceeeeees 378 Ile 378 Mask Unmask Door Held Open Properties window 375 field table nanen an r e 376 IIe 376 Mask Unmask Door Properties window 369 Dell table iieis eninin eneen 370 Drocedures 000 eee cece en
23. 6 Click the OK Sign in a Previously Scheduled Visit Note This procedure does not apply to view only workstations revision 105 209 14 Visits Folder 210 revision 105 Note Each visit has a time that it is scheduled to begin When the visitor arrives and the visit actually begins the visit should be signed in When a visit is signed in the actual Time In of the visitor is updated to the current date and time and any access control badge that the visitor is issued is activated A visit can be signed in immediately after it is added or it can be signed in later To sign in a visit l 2 Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens In the Visits listing window locate and select the visit record you wish to sign in Click the Sign In If none of the Allow disposable badge printing Allow access control badge assignment and Allow e mail notification checkboxes are checked on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder the visit will be signed in If any of those options are selected the Sign In Visit s window displays IV Print disposable badge s of this type RA Disposable Visitor tad general hpli5000 TI Send all badges to this printer overriding badge type printer assignment Printer Se J7 Assign this access control badge ID Kees The Print disposable badge s of this type checkbox and listing window are enabled if the Allow disposable badge printing c
24. Click OK when B A S I S prompts you to verify the name of the device to be traced e Right click an alarm and select Trace and then the device you wish to trace Trace Configuration Eg Today J Perform historical trace Start Monday March 17 2003 12 00 AM HH 11 59 PM End Monday March 17 2003 i I Apply start and end time to each day I Use restored transactions IV Perform live trace IT Show only those alarms which have marked video Alarm Filter Trace Configuration Window Field Description Perform historical If the checkbox is selected the trace will include events that occurred between the Start and trace End date times you specify Today When clicked the Start and End fields populate with the following e Start and End date the current day s date e Start time 00 00 on the current date e End time 23 59 on the current date Start The first date time combination that the trace displays events for End The last date time combination that the trace displays events for revision 105 75 6 Trace Alarms and Events Trace Configuration Window Continued Field Description Apply start and end time to each day If the checkbox is selected the time range is applied to each day within the date range For example A trace has a Start date time of 12 1 1999 9 00 and an End date time of 12 9 1999 17 00 s Ifthe Apply start and end time
25. Note Ki clicking Print Skip to step 9 If you wish to exit the window without printing click Cancel Otherwise continue on to the next step Click Print Preview to display the Badge Print Preview window ACME Medical Group Inc famata om n Ke B Cardholder lisataks lt S BadgelD T Issue Code 0 Badge Type Employee 7 Printer Sadigenerarhpis000 a The current badge displays along with cardholder data and printer information Use the Next Page and Previous Page buttons to view the next badge or other side of a two sided badge You can zoom in or out on the badge by changing the percentage value in the Zoom box A larger number displays the badge close up in more detail A smaller number will display more of the badge in less detail To print the badge s do one of the following e Click Print Current Doing so will print the badge that is currently in the preview window e Click Print All to print all of the badges that have been selected e To exit from the window without printing click Close If a user attempts to print a badge that has already been printed the maximum number of times then an error displays and the badge does not print As with other printing errors the user can continue on to the next badge if a batch print is being performed If you decided to print badges a status window displays to indicate the status of the print operation kl Badge Pr
26. Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 393 A Actions Reset Use Limit Form Properties Window Table Form Element Type Comment Description text When one controller is selected in the listing window displays the text Reset Use Limit followed by the controller name For example Reset Use Limit Front Door Bldg 1 When more than one controller is selected in the listing window this field is activated Type in a descriptive name to identify the selected group of controllers Controller listing window display Displays a list of available controllers OK push button Click this button to add the reset use limit action for the selected controller s and exit out of the Reset Use Limit Properties window Note Each time a use limited badge is used at a reader the badge s use limit is decremented for the associated controller A cardholder s use limit is specified on the Badge form of the Cardholders folder Whenever the cardholder swipes their badge at a reader where use limits are enforced the cardholder s use limit is reduced by one 1 When the use count reaches zero 0 the cardholder is unable to access use limit enforced card readers on that controller Cancel push button Click this button to exit the
27. Play Control Options rlulslalelecl elei else ale Le d est Exit door Interior door CEO 43 When viewing multiple cameras simultaneously please note that the system automatically displays each window in such a way that it is active the status bar for each window is blue Therefore any command will be applied to revision 105 89 7 Video Monitoring every window To deselect a window place the cursor in the window and click The status bar is gray when the window is deselected Monitor Video of Multiple Cameras Successively You can use the Video Player or the Video Monitoring window to monitor video of multiple cameras successively To monitor video using the Video Monitoring window please refer to View the Video Tour on on page 91 To monitor video of multiple cameras successively using the Video Player 1 Follow the procedures to aLaunch Video Live Recorded From a Camera in the Video Player on on page 88 2 Click and drag every camera or camera group you will want to view into the Video Player the video 3 From the View menu select Camera A sub menu displays Select the desired camera view Toolbar Shortcuts 4 Repeat step 3 to view different cameras successively or click the Previous i Camera and the Next Camera toolbar buttons We Monitor Video of a Specific Camera To monitor video of a specific camera in Alarm Monitoring complete one of the following e Inthe Video Mon
28. e Create badge records for cardholders and visitors e Assign access levels to active badges for cardholders and visitors e Assign one or more Precision Access groups to a badge if Precision Access is used on your system e Search for and display cardholders and visitors biometrics records e Search for cardholders and visitors visit records e Assign and track assets to cardholders and visitors e Link directory accounts to cardholders and visitors e Assign a cardholder as a tour guard e Assign security clearance levels to tour guards e Create and print reports containing cardholder information The folder contains up to eleven forms the Cardholder Visitor form the Badge form the Segments form if segmentation is enabled the Access Levels form the Precision Access form if in use the Biometrics form the Visits form the Assets form the Directory Accounts form the Guard Tours form and the Reports form The Cardholders folder is displayed by selecting the Badge Info choice from the View menu or by selecting the Cardholders toolbar button Cardholders Folder Overview Notes The forms in the Cardholders folder are visually divided into four sections the right section the upper left section the middle left section and the bottom section Several of the form elements in these sections are common to every form in the cardholders folder Refer to the following table for descriptions of the common form element
29. lt Tab gt e Keyboard key combinations are written in two ways lt Ctrl gt lt Z gt means hold down the first key and press the second lt Alt gt lt C gt means press the first key then press the second e Window buttons on the screen are represented in square brackets For example OK How this Document is Organized The Alarm Monitoring User Guide is divided into three sections the System Administrator Procedures section the Operators section and the Advanced Operator Procedures section The System Administrator section outlines the steps involved in setting up an Alarm Monitoring station Most of the procedures in these chapters reference other manuals because they cannot be performed in the Alarm Monitoring application The Operator Procedures section focuses on procedures to monitor alarms monitor video trace devices and execute commands The Advanced Operator Procedures section covers the administrative procedures operators can perform in Alarm Monitoring For example adding cardholders or visitors printing badges adding assets to the database and assigning assets to cardholders revision 105 21 1 Introduction Note Depending on the workflow of your company some of the procedures covered in this section may be considered System Administrator procedures Getting Started Passwords 22 revision 105 B A S LS ET Third Edition includes strong password enforcement which checks the
30. 23 1 Introduction e To correct the user password select a password that meets the standards specified in Password Standards on page 22 Password to correct Warning message Database password violations Your password is a keyword that isnot Database allowed It is highly recommended that you change your password to meet our minimum password standards Your password cannot be blank Enter a password User User password violations Passwords cannot be the same as the user User name Your password is a keyword that is not allowed User Accounts 24 revision 105 Anyone who wishes to use B A S LS applications must enter a user name and password in order to access the software The System Administrator should create a unique account for each user of the applications The System Administrator can also for each user create a list of permissions which specifies precisely which screens fields and buttons the user can access During initial installation of the application default accounts are created These include User name Password Type sa sa system account admin sample user sample badge sample These are provided as samples You may change the passwords and use the accounts or remove them The exception to this is the system account SA By definition this account has permission to do anything in the system A user with system access has unlimited access
31. Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate Fn Deactivate 77572001 IKESK gt gt gt i 1of1 Cardholders Folder Biometrics Form Form Element Type Comment Biometric listing window display In search mode lists all biometric features and the type associated with each In view mode lists the selected cardholder s biometric information if any exists There are three biometric features Fingerprint Hand Geometry and Iris A biometric fingerprint s type can be Template or Image Fingerprint A template of the cardholder s fingerprint is encoded on the ID card For more information refer to the Multimedia Capture Module appendix in the System Administration User Guide When an ID card is presented to a reader it will compare the stored template with the cardholder s actual fingerprint for verification A fingerprint image is a visual representation of the cardholder s fingerprint that is independent from the template For more information refer to the Multimedia Capture Module appendix in the System Administration User Guide revision 105 173 12 Cardholders Folder Cardholders Folder Biometrics Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Biometric listing window display Hand Geometry e A hand geometry template is a representation of the cardholder s handprint that is stored in the database For more information refer to the
32. CAC If length of input exceeds limit assume CAC barcode Limit I Ignore non numeric data Max length jo Start EW End EW Cancel A wedge scanner also sometimes referred to as a wedge reader is a device that is attached to a keyboard and used to scan badge IDs as direct keyboard input Wedge scanners can be used with B A S LS to e Adda badge In this scenario each card entry station has a wedge scanner The operator clicks Add and swipes the badge with the wedge scanner to read the badge ID This is equivalent to typing in the badge ID at the keyboard When a wedge scanner is used in this manner no configuration of the settings on the Keyboard Wedge Settings window is needed e Search for a badge The normal way to search for a badge in B A S LS is to click Search and then specify what to search for such as badge ID or social security number When a wedge scanner is used the Search button does not need to be clicked instead the system specifically searches on one predefined criteria When a wedge scanner is used in this manner the settings on the Keyboard Wedge Settings window must be properly configured When to Use the Keyboard Wedge Settings Window The Keyboard Wedge Settings window only needs to be configured on systems that will be using a wedge scanner to search for badges This may include e MobileVerify stations MobileVerify stations typically use a wedge scanner because using a ke
33. Cardholders Badge Access Levels Assets or Precision Access form 3 The Badge Printing window displays p Print selection Print active badges for current cardholder only Badge ID Mi Employee ad general hpli5000_ Print active badges for all cardholders matching current search criteria 4 Total Alternate printer Te Gerd elBadges to en eliemete getrei badge bine printer assignment rine J r Eror reporting Report all errors immediately pause printing Log errors to eror Jog only continue printing e The Print selection section determines which badges are printed or previewed out of the cardholders listed in the current search results 188 revision 105 Notes Alarm Monitoring User Guide Badge s will NOT print if at least one badge does not have a printer assigned to it or at least one badge has been assigned to a printer that B A S LS no longer recognizes You must establish a network connection to a remote printer via control panel in order BA SIS to recognize that printer To print preview specific badges for the current cardholder click the Print active badge s for current cardholder only radio button and select which active badges if there are multiple active badges are to be printed or previewed Only the active badges for the current cardholder display in the Print selection section To print all the active badges for the current cardho
34. Devices Lists all of the intrusion detection devices grouped by panel Intrusion Panel User Groups Lists all panel users grouped by panel user groups Last Location of Shows the last reader accessed by each cardholder sorted by cardholder name Cardholders Maps List of available maps in the database MobileVerify User Chronological log of all transactions performed Transaction Log MobileVerify User Transaction Log By Operation Chronological log of all transactions performed grouped by operation MobileVerify User Transaction Log By User ID Chronological log of all transactions performed grouped by User ID Monitor Stations Shows all alarm monitoring stations defined in the system including which monitor zones and access panels they are monitoring Monitor Zones Monitoring Zone definitions Overdue Visits Lists all scheduled visits that have not signed in Overstayed Visits Lists all visitors logged into the facility but whose badge or visit has expired Personal Safety Transmitter Assignments Listing of all personal safety transmitter assignments Personal Safety Transmitters Listing of all personal safety transmitters revision 105 419 C Reports Report name Description Personnel in the List of all personnel in the database with basic information only Database Personnel Without an All personnel in the dat
35. Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Automatic Guard Tour Properties Window Procedures Add an Automatic Guard Tour Action 1 Display the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window 2 Do one of the following Select the Single Tour radio button if you want to configure an automatic guard tour for a single tour When selected only single tours will be listed in the Tour Tour Group listing window Select the Randomly select tour from group radio button if you want to configure an automatic guard tour that will be randomly selected from a tour group When selected only tours groups that are configured revision 105 343 A Actions 344 revision 105 Note Note as random tour lists will be listed in the Tour Tour Group listing window The monitoring stations that have been assigned to the selected tour or tour group will be displayed in the Monitoring Station listing window Do one of the following e Ifno monitoring stations have been assigned or if you want to assign an additional monitoring station then click Add The Select Monitoring Station window opens e Ifyou do not want to assign a monitoring station proceed to step 7 Click on a monitoring station to select it Click OK The monitoring station you selected will be listing in the Monitoring Station listing window All monitoring stations in the Monitoring Station listing window will in the Alarm Monitoring
36. Limit report to checkbox When selected only cardholders in the current search will be included current search in the report Report listing display Lists currently defined cardholder related reports window Description display A brief description of the report contents Reports Form Procedures Run a Cardholder Report Select the Badge Info from the View menu The Cardholders folder opens Select the Reports tab Locate the cardholder record s for which you want to run a report If you want to run a report on all cardholder records skip this step In the Reports listing window click on the name of the report you want to run Select the Limit report to current search checkbox if you want only cardholders in the current search to be included in the report If you do not select this checkbox all cardholder who meet the criteria specified in the Description field will be included in the report Click Print The Print Report Options window opens For more information refer to Chapter 17 Print Report Options Window on page 297 revision 105 185 12 Cardholders Folder Note Any report in the Reports List Window on the Event Reports form in the Reports folder that has Cardholder listed in the Type s column is available on the Reports form in the Cardholders folder This means that a report can be generated on the Reports form in the Cardholders folder based on a cardholder search operation 186 rev
37. Print button Allows you to print a disposable badge Disposable badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder For a badge type to be used to print disposable badges it must have Visitor selected for the Class and the Disposable checkbox must be selected on the Badge Type sub tab If segmentation is enabled the correct segment must be selected on the Segment Membership sub tab Sign In button If selected the Sign In Visit s window is displayed In this window select whether to print disposable badges for the visitor s that are being signed in If the Multiple Selection checkbox is selected multiple visit records can be signed in at once 194 revision 105 Visits Folder Continued Alarm Monitoring User Guide Form Element Type Comment Sign Out button To use this feature you must first configure a badge status to use when doing an automatic sign out This is done on the General Cardholder Options form of the Cardholder Options folder For more information refer to the Cardholder Options Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide When selected the actual Time Out for the visit is updated to the current date time If the visitor has an active badge the deactivate date is updated and the badge status is set to the status setup that was selected on the General Cardholder Options form Multiple Selection button If selected more than one entry i
38. This window displays when the Print button is clicked on any form in the Visits folder Print badge s x Print disposable badge s of this type T Send all badges to this printer overriding badge type printer assignment Printer F a Visits Folder Print Badge s Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Print disposable display For this field to be enabled the Allow disposable badge badge s of this printing checkbox on the Visits form in the Cardholder type Options folder in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter must be selected e Displays a list of disposable badge types that can be selected for the visit You must select a badge type and only one badge type can be selected e Only those badge types that are disposable are listed Send all badges to checkbox and e Select this checkbox to select an alternate printer Chose the this printer drop down list printer from the drop down list overriding badge type printer e For these fields to be enabled the Choose alternate printer assignment checkbox on the Users Folder Cardholder Permission Groups Form Badge sub tab must be selected For more information refer to the Users Folder chapter in the System Administration or ID CredentialCenter users guide e Selecting this checkbox overrides the printer assignments in the Printing Encoding form of the Badge Types folder OK push button Prints the disposable
39. To manually display a map open Alarm Monitoring 2 If alarms are displayed in the Main Alarm Monitor window right click an alarm that has a map associated with it and select View Map Otherwise with the alarm selected choose Map from the View menu 3 Ifno alarms are displayed in the Main Alarm Monitor window select Map Selection from the View menu Select the desired map and click OK If the selected device has multiple maps associated with it you will be prompted to select a map from a list provided Do so and click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Example of a Map Building 126 first floor En West Exit door ER LNL 1300 HID An alarm sprite is a small bitmap image used as an icon GDL LNL 1000 Building 126 second floor Building 126 perimeter Moin Hallway EN Interior door CEO LNL 1320 2005 ES Sout exit door Cafeteria Building 126 first floor Graphical symbols on the map indicate the location of devices Using your mouse scroll over each symbol to view the device status and any text associated with the device For information on associating text with map icons refer to the MapDesigner User Guide Right click a device symbol to perform a variety of operations depending on the type of device you select The word ALARM blinks indicating an alarm s location on the map e The blinking alarm displays only if there is one or more alarm designated as an Active Alarm in th
40. Whether this checkbox is selected by default when a new visit is added is determined by the Include visitor s e mail by default checkbox on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder Additional Recipients listing window display selection Displays the e mail addresses that will receive e mail notification of Visits Note The addresses for the default recipients are not displayed in this listing window Add button Click this button if you wish to add another recipient The Add recipient window is displayed You may add a cardholder visitor directory account or SMTP address e Ifyou select the Cardholder radio button and click OK the Select Host Wizard Search form is displayed e Ifyou select the Visitor radio button and click OK the Select Visitor Wizard Search form is displayed e If you select the Directory account radio button and click OK the Select Account window is displayed e If you select the SMTP address radio button type the SMTP address then click OK An example of an SMTP address is joesmith company com Remove button Removes the selected recipient from the list of recipients that will receive notification of visits revision 105 219 14 Visits Folder Add Recipient Window This window is displayed when the E mail form in the Visits folder is in Add or Modify mode and the Add button to the right of the Additional Recipients lis
41. application receive a notification message when the tour is scheduled to begin Repeat steps 3 5 for each monitoring station you want to add If you want to remove a monitoring station from the Monitoring Station listing window click on an entry to select it and then click Remove Click OK If you have accessed the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window via the Scheduler folder or the Scheduler form in the Guard Tour folder the window will contain both the Automatic Guard Tour form and the Schedule form For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Change Network Video Password Properties Window The Change Network Video Password action allows you to schedule automatic password changes for video recorders You can make the change a one time event or to schedule it daily weekly or monthly with the Edit Recurring Action Schedule For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 To display do one of the following Change Network ideo Password Properties EB Change Network Video Password Description Change Network Video Password Main Lobby Camera 1 Video Recorder Curent User 4 Main Lobby Camera 1 Click Add on the Output Action tab in the Global I O form and choosing Change Network Video Password Click Add on the Scheduler form and choosing Change Network Video Password Reset to this password C
42. e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the Start time checkbox and choosing a specific start time bh 2 08 02 AM i Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons 254 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Folder Anti Passback Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment End section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the End date checkbox and choose a specific end date from the drop down calendar April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 20 21 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 25 29 30 1 2 5 6 H 8 9 lt Today 37672003 e Select the last month for which data is to be included in this report Use the ER and Ej navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the last year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the year e and use the spin buttons ETE e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the last day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date e Select the time for which data is to be included in this repo
43. required cardholder fields badge ID allocation for generating ID numbers guest defaults extended strike held times passage mode deadbolt override e Add directories required for single sign on e Set system cardholder monitor and field page permissions e Add users user name internal account and password directory account segment access area access manager levels e Add Alarm Monitoring workstations workstations are required to configure hardware devices add dot matrix printer via workstations folder revision 105 49 3 System Administrator Procedures Precision access mode determines the readers that cardholders have access to List options are created using list builder connect a printer locally directly to the Alarm Monitoring workstation Set general system options log on authorization warning strong password enforcement number of days to save queued events linkage server host OpenIT service DataExchange server host KnoWho server Set cardholder options and visits maximum number of badges per cardholder ability to create save photo thumbnails badge PIN types 4 6 or 9 digits PIN code generated random or manual precision access mode use or lose badge feature change badge status to lost or returned after a specified amount of time visits options cardholder visitor and visit search result
44. shown in the screen shot that follows and the form elements that are unique to each form For descriptions of the common form elements refer to Visits Folder Field Table on page 194 For descriptions of the unique form elements refer to Status Search Form Field Table on page 215 Visit Form Field Table on page 212 Details Form Field Table on page 217 E mail Form Field Table on page 218 revision 105 191 14 Visits Folder e Reports Form Field Table on page 221 ku Yisits BISIE Host Visitor Jr Scheduled Time In 1 Scheduled Time Out Visit Type Visit Purpose R scheduled Lake Lisa Brown Lisa Anne 8 30 2002 10 37 25 AM 8 30 2002 5 00 00 PM Proposed business QQ Status search ka Details td E mail Reports Host name Status Eak e Lisa A Scheduled Visitor name Brown Lisa Anne Search Add Modify Delete Print Sign In Sign Gut Multiple Selection Notes This documentation refers to visit data fields that are shipped as the default by Best If you have used the FormsDesigner application to customize your visit data the elements on your Visits folder forms will be different Forms and fields that pertain to segmentation are only available if segmentation is enabled on your system Visit Right Click Menu If you right click on a visit in the listing window a menu will be displayed The menu contains the following options Right click Description menu option Select
45. successive occurrences of it Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 19 Guard Tour Guard Tour Overview Guard tour provides a guard a cardholder who has been specifically chosen to conduct a tour with a defined set of tasks that must be performed within a specified period of time Typical tasks include swiping a card at a checkpoint access reader or turning a key connected to an alarm panel input Checkpoints are Guard tour records the location and timestamp for each checkpoint visited by the designated stops along a tour guard The Checkpoint Time represents the time it should take to reach a tour particular checkpoint All checkpoints have minimum and maximum checkpoint times A guard tour event is generated if a checkpoint is missed reached early on time late out of sequence or overdue A late event means the A tour is considered complete when one of the following actions occurs checkpoint was reached after its maximum time e All of the checkpoints on the tour are reached even if they are reached out of expired An overdue sequence or some checkpoints are missed event means the checkpoint has not yet been reached e The tour is terminated at a monitoring station e The tour is acknowledged as complete at a monitoring station Note System Administrator procedures to set up a Guard Tour are located in the Guard Tour Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Launch a Guard Tour 1 Start the Linkage Se
46. the search criteria will be listed in the Report Subtitle section by default The subtitle will be displayed below the report title on the report Click the OK The options selected in the Print Destination section will determine where the report is sent revision 105 223 14 Visits Folder Select Host Wizard Search Form Note If the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your cardholder data the elements on your Select Host Wizard Search form will be different The default fields are pictured below This form is displayed when the Search button in the Visits folder is clicked and then the button to the right of the Host name field is clicked Select Host Wizard Search Il Enter search criteria below E Previous hosts for current visitor only SE Cardholder amp Segments GE Badge Ms Access Levels Precision Access Biometrics Last name First name Middle name Lake Lisa Cardholder ID Badge type X Address x Title E City Department X State Zip code Division E Phone Birth date Location E E mail Building Floor D Record last changed Office phone Extension Select Host Wizard Search Form Overview This form is used to enter search criteria that will allow you to locate a specific cardholder Visits Folder Select Host Wizard Search Form Form Element Type Comment Previous hosts for checkbox This checkbox is only enabled whe
47. the system will search for 123456789 Max length numeric spin A maximum length must be provided if the wedge scanner does not buttons automatically provide a line feed carriage return This allows the wedge scanner to be used as long as the length of the scan is always the same De social security number If 0 or 1 is specified then the whole string will be read in Start numeric spin The Start field works in combination with the End field When an ID is buttons scanned a string of numbers are read As long as the ID is not a CAC that string of numbers typically contains the actual badge ID or social security number For a CAC that string of numbers doesn t contain the actual social security number but B A S LS does decrypt the social security number from the string The Start position is important because the string of numbers may contain other numbers in addition to what is being searched for it is the first position in the string of numbers that contains a digit of what is being searched for The End position is the last digit of what is being searched for The End position should be greater than or equal to the Start position Take for example the string 123456789 If 4 is the Start position and 7 is the End position then the BAS IS system will search on 4567 If you specify an End position that is less than the Start position B A S LS assumes the end is 255 Therefore for the string 123456789 with 4 as the S
48. the values you just entered in the User name and Directory fields to automatically be selected the next time that you log in e Click OK 4 Your system may be configured to prompt you to confirm that you are authorized to use the application To accept the terms of the authorization warning click Yes 5 If you are prompted to select a monitor zone Monitor zone user a Select a monitor zone from the drop down list If segmentation is assignments take enabled only the monitor zones for the segment that you logged into are precedence over available monitoring station user assignments b Select the Save as monitoring station assignment checkbox if you wish to make the monitor zone selection the default assignment for the monitoring station This means when any operator logs into Alarm Monitoring at this workstation this zone will be monitored unless the operator has monitoring zones assigned to them as a user or the operator has permission to view multiple zones This checkbox is only enabled if the user has proper permissions c Select the Save as user assignment checkbox if you if you wish to log into the same monitor zone EVERY time you log in This is a permanent assignment You will not be prompted to select a monitor zone during revision 105 29 1 Introduction Note future log ins This is checkbox is only enabled if the user has permission d Click OK For more information please refer to the Mon
49. 14 2003 LNL 1000 LNL 1320 2005 Nick Tai 65 Invalid Access Level 12 06 13 PM 2 14 2003 LNL 1000 LNL 1320 2005 Frank McLear 163 OGranted Access 12 05 06 PM 2 14 2003 LNL 1000 LNL 1320 2020 Nick Tai 55 OGranted No Entry 12 05 03 PM 2 14 2003 LNL 1000 LNL 1320 2020 Frank McLear 163 RH Selected alarm Sort criteria Time Date Live Trace Tota 4 7 Field Description Upper status bar Displays information about the upper display window and includes the total number of devices tested the number of devices that pass and fail what time the test started and the current status of the device test Upper display Displays the device name test status alarm description number of inputs or requests received window and the current device status The information displayed in this window can be sorted by any column Lower display Displays a variety of user defined columns that can be sorted Users can select whether the window following columns display Alarm Description Time Date Controller Device Input Output Card Priority Asset Scan ID Asset Name Intercom Station Called Controller Time Transmitter Transmitter Input Biometric Score Account Group Badge Type Text Line Number and Intrusion Area For more information refer to Select Column Configuration on page 58 Lower status bar Displays information about the lower display window and includes the name of the currently selected alarm sort crite
50. 61 System Stat s Lee EE 61 Device Groups Window ee ol Ne Ee e 62 4 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Device Group Test Mode Window ene 64 Device Group EE 64 Hardware Device EE EN 65 Device StatUS EE 67 Procedures for Monitoring Devices cccccceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeneeeeeeeeeeeaes 70 Update the Hardware Status c cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaaeeseeeeesaeesseaeeeseeeesenaeessaas 70 Perform a Device Test seiere peci ranieri eeen ie eee eegene Geesen 70 Locate or Search for a Device susssssssseriseississirsrisriesiisrinsinntinstnstunttnntnntinstnatntennnntennt 71 View the Last Connection Time for Dialup Panels 71 Download the B A S 1 S Database or Firmware sssssssssesrisirsriesrrsriesrisrrerinsrnerinsrnnre 72 View the Firmware Type Flash Chip Size and DIP Switch Settings of a Controller 72 Chapter 6 Trace Alarms and Events esseeeeeeeeeeeeees 75 Trace Configuration Window ssssssseeeesssseseeesserrnntresserrnnnnnssernnnnnneseennnn nenene 75 P roced re for Tracing sosote itene a aaka enin Ee e E o eda rona AEE rA E eR Eaa 77 Trace Alarms and Event isoihin daski aaisa iaaeaie dE ENNER EE dee S ENEE 77 Chapter 7 Video Monitoring cccsssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenenee 79 Video Monitoring WINDOW EE 79 Video Play GF ereina d SE 80 Video Search ee e 84 Event Settings WiINdOW ie eg DEE 87 Video Search Performance Requirements c tccccsicccsce
51. Access badge id Alarms e If selected checked Alarm Monitoring displays the cardholder associated with access alarms e D not selected unchecked Alarm Monitoring does NOT display the cardholder associated with access alarms 40 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Options menu Continued Menu option Function Automatic Map Display Automatically displays a map when the alarm arrives if selected checked and if the associated device exists on a map If the device exists on multiple maps the first one found will be displayed This feature must also be configured in System Administration Monitoring gt Alarms menu Alarm Definitions tab form Automatic Cardholder Display Applies to alarms for which the Show Card Holder check box is selected in the System Administration software To locate this checkbox select the Monitoring menu and then select Alarms Click the Alarm Definition tab e If selected checked the corresponding cardholder view automatically displays when the alarm arrives if the alarm is related to a badge id e Ifthe cardholder view is already displayed when a new alarm arrives the new cardholder associated with the alarm is searched for and displayed e If not selected unchecked the corresponding cardholder view does not automatically display when an alarm occurs Automatic Video Verification Applies to alarms for which the Video Verification check box
52. Aen 99 Video Verification Procedures een 100 Add or Remove Headerg corecseeeriiietiri atit rr AAN AAE ENA ATEARI FEAA AAEE ACREA KETNET AKR 100 Display the Cardholder Photo and Live Video ssssssseesseesiessrsssrrsssrnesrrsrrnnsressrn 101 Delete an Alarm in the Video Verification WINGOW ssssssesseiesssssirsssrrerrsssrerrrsssreennnns 101 Chapter 9 Control Devices and Areas eeeEEEEEEEEEEEEEEn 103 Grant Deny Pop up Window eege eege ege 103 Grant Deny Pop up Window Procedures cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 104 Grantor Deny ACCOSS oz sess c saaitgeenzes Eege cobewnadaeak EES a E 104 6 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Right click Options to Control Devices and Areas A 105 General Right click Options 105 Monitor Zone Right click Options c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeseeeeteeeeee 106 Access Panel and Alarm Panel Right click Options c cccseceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeneees 106 Intrusion Panel and Relay Right click Options cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaes 107 Intercom Right click Options AA 107 Reader Right click OptiOnS arnese niur eraann au aoteana aeaaea ae iae ea aariaa ariana 107 Alarm Mask Group Right click Options ccssceeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseteeeeeeneees 108 Function List Right click Options a aeaa aaa E Aa eaaa aaa a s aai aaae 108 Action Group Right click Options sininen eane a
53. B ntrusion Panel 7 Wh Onboard Relay C ntrusion Panel 7 Operation Activate z GK Cancel Help Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 350 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Device Output Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Output listing window display Displays a list of available device outputs which have been configured in the system Activate radio button When configuring a device output as an action select this from the drop down menu if you want the action to be that the device output will activate When a device output is activated that means it is in an on state Deactivate radio button When configuring a device output as an action select this from the drop down menu if you want the action to be that the device output will deactivate When a device output is deactivated that means it is in an off state Pulse radio button When configuring a device output as an action select this from the drop down menu if you want the action to be that the device output will pulse turn on and then turn off again Toggle radio button When configuring a device output as an action select this from the drop down menu if you want to toggle the state of the relay For example if the re
54. Badge Record WEE 159 Modify Badges for a Selected Group of Cardholders ssssesessesesseesseeesneeeeesrrnessrnsees 160 Encode Badge Configurations ccccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeneeeessaeeeeenes 161 Delete a Badge Record ececceceeeeeccceeeeeeeeceeeeseseececeeeeseeeeceesneecaeeeeesenaaeeeeeneneeeeneenenaes 162 revision 105 9 Table of Contents Access Levels Form View Mode ENEE 163 Access Levels Form Modify Mode 163 Access Levels Form Procedures ee 164 Assign Access Levels to a Badge ccceceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeseeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeaaes 164 Assign Activation and Deactivation Dates to Access EE EEE EE 166 Assign Access Levels to a Selected Group of Cardholders AAA 168 Remove Access Levels From a Selected Group of Eels aoe AEE E T EE E E E E AP E E EAEN 170 Modify Access Levels Assignments ccccccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeneeaas 170 Delete Access Levels Assignments asssssessrressssrreesssrnnessnnnnesetnnnennttnnenetnnnnnnnnnnenannnne 170 Precision Access Form EE 171 Precision Access Form Procedures ene 172 Assign Precision Access Groups to a Badge ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeneeessaeeneneees 172 Remove Precision Access Groups From a Badge ccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeessaeeetenes 172 Biometrics POM EE EE 173 Biometrics Form eege 174 Search for a Cardholder s Biometric Record
55. Cardholder s name and Badge ID Time Date Time and date the alarm occurred The way that the time and date are displayed varies according to the time date settings chosen in the Windows Control Panel on your computer Reader Reader at which the alarm occurred Resize the width of a column by positioning the mouse pointer over the boundary of two column headings Then click and drag to resize the column Close Closes the Video Verification window Video Verification Procedures Add or Remove Readers Note 100 revision 105 To add or remove readers using the video verification window the reader must be added to the Selected Readers list The Panels Reader list is located in the upper left portion of the Video Verification window The Selected Readers list is located in the lower left portion of the Video Verification window To add an entry to the Selected Readers list double click the reader in the Panels Readers list To add a entry to the Selected Readers list select one or more alarm s before you open the Video Verification window the corresponding reader s will be added automatically To add all the readers associated with a particular panel double click the panel entry in the Panels Readers list Alarm Monitoring User Guide To remove a reader from the Selected Readers list double click the reader s entry in the Selected Readers list Live video not available Photograph ED B
56. Close push button Click this button to close the Scheduler folder Scheduler Form Procedures Add and Schedule an Action 1 Select Scheduler from the View menu The Scheduler folder opens 2 Click Add The Add Action Wizard opens revision 105 319 20 Scheduler Folder Note 320 revision 105 3 You can also display the Add Action Wizard by right clicking anywhere on the Scheduler form and selecting the Add Action menu option Add Action Wizard Eg Category Objects Action Types Action Group Library off Action Group Si Atchive Purge Database oft Automatic Guard Tour offt Device Output oft Device Output Group oft Execute Function List ot Global APB System Segment Reset oft ISC Database Download oft ISC Firmware Download off Mask Unmask Alarm Input ot Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group ot Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group oft Mask Unmask Door Forced Open ot Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group n TED N bananak Douma LELI Ma man Select either Action Types or Action Group Library from the Category listing window e When Action Types is selected the Objects listing window lists all available action types e When Action Group Library is selected the Objects listing window lists all action groups which have been either created in or saved to the Alarm Monitoring User Guide action group library For more information refer to the Action Group Librar
57. Group Properties Window 377 Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties Window EIERE 378 Add a Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Action ccsceeeeeeerees 378 Pulse Open Door Properties Window 379 Pulse Open Door Properties Window Procedures cceseseesesereeeseens 380 AGG a Piss Open Door EE gees 380 Pulse Open Door Group Properties Window 381 revision 105 19 Table of Contents Pulse Open Door Group Properties Window Procedures sssnssssses1e111 382 Add a Pulse Open Door Group Action cecccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeesecaeeessaaeeeeieeeenaeees 382 Reader Mode Properties Window EE 383 Reader Mode Properties Window Procedures ssssssssseeeseesseeneesseerenreessee 384 Add a Reader Mode Action ecceeecceceeeeseeceeeeeeeneeeeeeenenaaeseeenenaeeeeeenseaeeseesnenaeeeeennenaaes 384 Reader Mode Group Properties Window ccc ceeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeenanees 386 Reader Mode Group Properties Window Procedures cccesceseeeeees 387 Add a Reader Mode Group Action c cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceaeeeseneeeseaeeeseaaeeessaeesseaeees 387 Report Print Properties WiNdoOW secicicictectieitscrsirsecenenrttnabedoieeaetesntrneaestunedeaes 389 Report Print Properties Window Procedures cccccsceesesesseseseeeteneeeens 390 Add a Report Print Action senrsoreiaeatan eat i a AANE 390 Request Print Action Flowchart Aen 392 Reset Use Lim
58. Keyboard Wedge Settings window without applying any changes made 142 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Keyboard Wedge Settings Window Procedures Configure a Wedge Scanner How the B A S I S system interprets the information it receives from a wedge scanner can be configured by doing the following 1 In System Administration ID CredentialCenter Visitor Management or View Edit Only select Cardholders from the Administration menu In Alarm Monitoring and Digital Video click the toolbar button Select Keyboard Wedge Settings from the Cardholder menu The Keyboard Wedge Settings window opens Keyboard Wedge Settings m Field to search on Table Field BADGE x ID m Department of Defense Common Access Card CAC T If length of input exceeds limit assume CAC barcode Limit IW I Ignore non numeric data Max length jo Start p End P 4 Cancel a Specify the Table and Field you wish to search on when non CAC input is detected By default the system searches on the ID field in the BADGE table If for example you wanted to search based on social security number instead of badge ID you would select the SSNO field in the EMP table b If CAC Common Access Card barcodes will be used select the If length of input exceeds limit assume CAC barcode checkbox and specify the limit This allows military code 30f9 barcodes to be scanned and decoded into the cardholder s social
59. Miscellaneous Tender POS Generated when miscellaneous tender is used Module Active Module Active Fire Generated when a monitor or control module connected to the system becomes active The device label assigned to this device and the zone label assigned to the first zone programmed for this device will be included with the event Module Clear Module Clear Fire Generated when a monitor or control module connected to the system is no longer active The device label assigned to this device and the zone label assigned to the first zone programmed for this device will be included with the event Motion Detected Motion Detected Video Generated when motion has been detected on a given input channel camera Motion is considered any change in the environment within the field of view of the camera revision 105 407 B Alarm Event Descriptions Alarm Event Event Type Description Motion Detected Motion Detected Video Generated when motion has been restored Restored Restored is no longer detected on a given input channel camera Motion is considered any change in the environment within the field of view of the camera Muster Mode Reset Muster Mode Reset Muster Generated when muster mode is reset Muster Mode Start Muster Mode Start Muster Generated when muster mode is started Negative Tax Negative Tax POS Generated
60. Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting e Select the Unmask radio button if you want the door forced open alarms for the selected reader group to be unmasked When door forced open alarms are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting 4 Click OK 374 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Mask Unmask Door Held Open Properties Window To display do one of the following Note Select the Action Types Mask Unmask Door Held Open Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Mask Unmask Door Held Open from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Mask Unmask Door Held Open Properties xi Mask Unmask Door Held Open Controller iReader Panel 1 Mask Unmask Cancel Help If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 375 A Actions Mask Unmask Door Held Open Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Reader Controller display Displays a list of available readers which have been configured in the listing window
61. Multimedia Capture Module appendix in the System Administration User Guide e When an ID card is presented to the primary access control reader a hand geometry reader is considered an alternate reader that is used in association with a primary reader such as a Magnetic stripe or proximity reader it will ask for verification from the alternate reader The system will compare the stored hand geometry template with the cardholder s actual handprint for verification e A primary access control reader will only ask for verification from the hand geometry reader when the Verify Mode checkbox located on the Settings form in the Readers folder is selected For more information refer to the Readers folder in the System Administration User Guide Fingerprint image display Displayed in view mode Displays a visual representation of the cardholder s fingerprint For more information refer to the Multimedia Capture Module appendix in the System Administration User Guide Search Type drop down list Displayed in search mode This field is used in conjunction with the listing window Click on a biometric feature in the listing window and select a choice from the Search Type drop down list to search for a record that Has or Does Not Have a fingerprint image a fingerprint template iris data or a hand geometry template associated with the cardholder Biometrics Form Procedures Search for a Cardholder s Biometric R
62. S I S software you can send a page to a recipient with alarm information 1 Verify the Global Output Server is running by clicking Start and selecting Programs gt B A S I S ET gt Global Output Server 2 Right click an alarm and select Send Page The Send Page window opens 3 Click To and select place a checkmark beside the pager number of the recipient 4 The message field is automatically populated with an alarm description the time and date on which it occurred and the location which reader alarm panel 5 Click OK to send the page Send Page x Message Panel Download Completed 150 5 55 20 PM 6 18 2002 None 92 characters wk Cancel Field Button Description To Allows you to select pager number that is already in the database Message Displays the body of the message being sent By default information pertaining to the alarm is displayed To change it type over the text OK Once you are done click the OK button to send the message and exit the window Cancel To exit the window without sending a page click the Cancel button 126 revision 105 Advanced Operator Procedures Chapter 12 Toolbar Shortcut Cardholders Alarm Monitoring User Guide Cardholders Folder The Cardholders folder contains forms with which you can e Add modify and delete cardholder and visitor records e Assign cardholders or groups of cardholders to different segments
63. Search form are displayed Note The fields that are displayed in columns are set on the Visitor Search Results Lists form in the Cardholder Options folder Back push button Returns to the Select Visitor Wizard Search form Finish push button This button is displayed only if Select visitor below is selected Click this button to complete the wizard The selected visitor s name will be displayed in the Visitor name field If Create new visitor is selected the Finish button is replaced by a Next button Cancel push button Closes the window without selecting a visitor and returns you to the Visit form in the Visits folder Help push button Displays online help for this topic 230 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Select Visitor Wizard Add Form This form is displayed when Create new visitor is selected and the Next button is clicked on the Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add form Select Visitor Wizard Add xi Enter new visitor s information below Dh Visitor GH Segments ES Badge He Access Levels Precision Access Biometrics Last name First name Middle name nooo Badge type Organization Title Address Doo City B State yO Zipcode Office phone Extension LOOO y y y Last changed Jee Import Capture cmos ze Select Visitor Wizard Add Form Overview This form allows you to e Add a new visitor record e Capture ph
64. Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add xi Select visitor below C Create new visitor First Name 1 Visitor Organization Visitor Title Lisa New Technologies President O Johnson Peter Prime Company Engineer Coot ee Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add Form Overview This form is displayed when adding a visit From this form you can e Search for visitor records that match the specified search criteria e Add anew visitor record Visits Folder Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add Form Form Element Type Comment Select visitor radio button Select this option if the visitor you need to add a visit for is listed below below in the Visitor listing window If you select this option also select a visitor in the Visitor listing window below Create new visitor radio button Select this option if the visitor you need to add a visit for is not listed in the Visitor listing window If you select this option the Finish button will be replaced with a Next button When the Next button is clicked the Select Visitor Wizard Add form will be displayed on which you can add a new Visitor revision 105 229 14 Visits Folder Visits Folder Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Visitor listing display A list of visitor records that match the search criteria specified on the window Select Visitor Wizard
65. Station Dual Reader 1 Auxiliary Input 1 Dual Reader 1 Auxiliary Input 1 MainFacility Tour Guard tour initiated 1 28 2002 2 53 53 PM SLEUBNE1 DT in2 Checkpoint overdue 1 28 2002 2 53 56 PM Checkpoint reached late 1 28 2002 2 57 38 PM Checkpoint overdue 1 28 2002 2 57 44 PM M 1 28 2002 2 58 18 PM 1 28 2002 2 59 12 PM 1 28 2002 2 59 15 PM 1 28 2002 3 00 25 PM Checkpoint reached late Checkpoint overdue Checkpoint reached late MainFacility Tour Guard tour completed with errors 1 28 2002 3 00 25 PM Terminate Force Complete View Instructions Add Tour Note Show Video gt gt Guard Name Lake Lisa A Badge ID 1 Tour status Guard tour completed with errors A Guard Tour Events Table Event Description Guard Tour Generated when a tour is launched from a monitoring station Initiated Guard Tour Generated when all checkpoints on a tour have a Checkpoint Reached on Time status Completed Otherwise a Guard Tour Completed with Errors event is generated Guard Tour Generated when the last checkpoint has been reached but one or more checkpoints were not Completed with Errors reached on time or were missed altogether Guard Tour Generated when the scheduled automatic guard tour is cancelled before the tour was started Cancelled Guard Tour Generated when the Terminate button is selected in the Guard Tour Live Tracking window Terminated Checkpoint Generated when a checkpo
66. To search for scheduled visits select the Scheduled future checkbox If you wish to search for visits that are scheduled to begin in a specified number of minutes hours or days select the Starting within checkbox and then specify the number of minutes hours or days By default scheduled visits that are late getting started will also be searched for If you do not want to search for scheduled visits that are late deselect the Scheduled late checkbox To search for active visits select the Active checkbox If you wish to search for visits that are scheduled to end within a specified number of minutes hours or days select the Ending within checkbox and then specify the number of minutes hours or days By default active visits that are late being signed out overstayed will also be searched for If you do not want to search for active visits that are overstayed deselect the Active overstayed checkbox To search for finished visits select the Finished checkbox The refresh rate is how often the database is queried to see if it has changed This setting is stored on a per user basis Select the refresh option that meets your needs If the Use system default rate checkbox is selected the rate that is set in the Refresh rate in minutes field on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder will be used If the Use system default rate checkbox is not selected type the number of minutes you wish to elapse between the t
67. User Guide Reports Folder Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment End section e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the last day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the End time checkbox and choosing a specific end time Jh 2 08 02 AM Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons Apply start and end time to each day checkbox If selected the specified time range will be applied to any date that falls within the specified date range For example if you specify a Date Time Filter starting January 1 1998 at 8 00 AM and ending March 31 1998 at 7 00 PM e H this box is checked the report will include only data collected during the hours of 8 00 AM through 7 00 PM on any and all days between January 1 and March 31 e H this box is not checked the report will include all data gathered from 8 00 AM on January 1 straight through until March 31 at 7 00 PM Report All account zones push button If this button is pushed all entries in the Account Zone list are deselected Report All is displayed to the left of this button to ind
68. Video Properties window Cancel push button Exits the Change Network Video Password Properties window without adding the action Help push button Displays online help for this window Change Network Video Password Properties Window Procedures Schedule a One Time Password Change 346 revision 105 1 From the Administration menu select Scheduler Pe E wn Click Add on the Scheduler form The Add Action Wizard window opens Select Change Network Video Password from the Objects listing window Click Next The Change Network Video Password Properties window displays On the Schedule sub tab select the One time radio button 6 Select the date and time you wish the password to change 7 Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Schedule a Recurring Password Change Fe SO BS OD ID n From the Administration menu select Scheduler Click Add on the Scheduler form The Add Action Wizard window opens Select Change Network Video Password from the Objects listing window Click Next The Change Network Video Password Properties window displays On the Schedule sub tab select the Recurring radio button Click Change The Edit Recurring Action Schedule form displays Choose the time and date intervals that best suit your needs Click OK on the Edit Recurring Action Schedule form Click OK on the Change Network Video Password Properties window revis
69. Visual Equipment eA Computers R Shredders 286 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Asset Classes Form Field Table Assets Folder Asset Classes Form Form Element Type Comment Scan ID numeric Indicates the Scan ID of the asset Name text Indicates the name of the asset Type drop down list Indicates the type of asset being configured Subtype drop down list Indicates the subtype of the asset being configured Assigned Classes listing window View and modify mode Displays the classes that are currently assigned to a group in the Asset Groups listing window Asset Groups listing window View mode Displays the asset groups that correspond with the classes in the Assigned Classes listing window Asset Group drop down list Modify mode Select the asset group s to which the asset will belong Asset Classes listing window Select the asset classes that will be assigned to the asset Groups can contain as many as 32 classes but each asset can only belong to as many as 15 classes push button Moves 10 matching records forward Photo display Displays a photo capture of the asset if one was added in the Multimedia Capture module Last Access display Displays the date and time of the asset s last access Assign Asset push button When adding or modifying an asset select the Assign Asset button to Assign To launch the Car
70. Windows event log Errors revision 105 421 C Reports 422 revision 105 Index A Access Levels form Cardholders folder field fleien ees 163 modify mode 163 Bropedhuteg ee 164 VIEW MOE ein etc a 163 ACCOUNTS eaei ecient Sn aoa eek wide aise 24 Acknowledge an alarm ceceeeeeeseeseeeeeees 120 Action Group Properties window 335 field table eege EEN 336 IIe 336 Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Properties WindOW cece ceseeeeeseeeeeeeees 337 field tablei iceri reret Zeen 337 proc dures seinen eers ses 338 e E 333 IR 333 Activate single or double left click mode 110 AEN VASIIS ege dee 201 Add ACHO Nee ee 319 ACTION group 336 action history guard tour event purging action 338 action using scheduler right click menu 327 archive purge database action 340 ASSO Lei ee See 282 asset groups and classes eee eee eee 289 asset type SUbtYPe oe eee eect eee cteceteeeees 285 automatic guard tour action eseeeeseeeeeee 343 badge record 157 cardholder record 145 Columns eet 58 deactivate badge action eee 349 device output aCHon eee eeeeeeeees 351 device output group action 354 execute function list action eee 356 global APB system segment reset action 358 ISC database download acpon 360 ISC firmware download action 362 mask unmask alarm input action 364 mask unmask alarm input for group action 366 mask unmask
71. a trouble condition that has Clear Clear been cleared from the system has been acknowledged by a user Trouble Bell Trouble Bell 1 or 2 Relay Generated when trouble bell 1 or trouble Sounder bell 2 is in alarm 412 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Alarm Event Event Type Description Trouble Bell Restore Trouble Bell 1 or 2 Relay Generated when trouble bell 1 alarm or Restore Sounder trouble bell 2 alarm is restored Trouble Block Trouble Block Fire Generated when all trouble conditions have Acknowledge Acknowledge been acknowledged at the fire panel Trouble In Trouble In Fire Generated when a new trouble condition has been detected for the device Trouble Out Trouble Out Fire Generated when a device with a previous trouble condition has returned to its normal state Trouble Report Trouble Report Intercom Generated when there is trouble with a device This event reports trouble and includes additional details in the associated text Unexpected Access Unexpected Access System Generated when a user successfully exits using an unexpected exit reader after gaining access to a specific entry reader and the must proceed to exit readers option is enabled Unexpected Access Unexpected Access System Generated when a user attempts to exit Attempt Attempt using an unexpected exit reader after gaining access to a specific entry reader and the mu
72. badge Cancel push button Closes the Print Badge s window without printing the visit Visits Folder Procedures 198 revision 105 The following procedures pertain to every form in the Visits folder unless otherwise noted Alarm Monitoring User Guide Visit Search Capabilities Search Note In search mode you can search on any combination of fields in the Visits folder including the Status search Visit and Details forms On the E mail and Reports forms you can only search for the host name or visitor name Comparison Operators For text fields such as Host name and Visitor name the default comparison is begins with The search results will include any records whose values begin with the characters that were entered For example when searching by last name a filter of L will find Lake Lewis etc A filter of Lake will find Lake Lakeland etc Search Text Fields for Contains In addition to the default begins with searching for text fields you can do a search for contains by prefixing the text with a percent sign For example typing mit in the Host name field will find all people whose name contains the text mit Search on Multiple Fields When you search on multiple fields the criteria is combined with and For example typing Lisa in Host name field and Lisa in Visitor name field will find all visits wh
73. becomes active not grayed out when you highlight an access panel controller or any device under a given access panel controller in the System Status window Note Access panel controller traces are recursive meaning all events occurring on that access panel controller are included Device E 0 SEI Monitors or traces alarms for the selected device The Device menu option becomes active not grayed out when you highlight a device in the System Status window Note This menu option can be used to trace all device types including alarm outputs reader aux inputs and reader aux outputs Badge Monitors or traces alarms for a specific badge Asset Monitors or traces alarms for the selected asset The Asset menu option becomes active not grayed out when you highlight a device in the System Status window Area Monitors or traces alarms for the selected intrusion area The Area menu option becomes active not grayed out when you highlight a device in the System Status window Configure menu Menu option Function Alarm Filter Displays a checklist of alarm types to monitor The Alarm Filter menu option becomes active not grayed out when you display an alarm window Columns Displays a list of columns from which to display The Columns menu option becomes active not grayed out whey you display an alarm window Hardware Status Frequency Determines how ofte
74. button Clears all current filter criteria Print push button Displays the Print Report Options window Preview push button Displays the selected report with selected criteria in the Report Print Preview window Help push button Displays relevant on screen help for this form Use restored records checkbox If this checkbox is selected data for an event or user transaction report is obtained from restored events transactions in the database rather than from the current live events transactions Restored events transactions are those restored using the Restore Archive button on the Restoring form of the Archives folder For more information refer to the Archives Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Close push button Closes the Reports folder revision 105 251 15 Reports Folder Alarm Panel Reports Form Procedures Run an Alarm Panel Report 1 Select Reports from Administration View menu The Reports folder opens 2 Select the Alarm Panel Reports tab 3 From the listing window select the report that you want to run 4 If desired specify a date time interval for gathering data in the Date Time Filter section Only data gathered during the specified period will be included in the report To limit each date in the range to the specified time interval select the Apply start and end time to each day checkbox 5 Inthe Alarm Panel Fil
75. ceses n cbiee deen 201 modify a Visit record 208 retrieve the most recent visit search results 203 right click meng 192 run a visit report from the Visits folder 221 search capabilities eee eee eeeeeeeeees 199 search for active visits ccccccsesseeeeeeneeee 201 search for all visits by a selected visitor 200 search for all visits for a specific date or time 202 search for all visits to a selected cardholdet 199 search for finished visits sccceeseees 201 search for scheduled Visits cc cee 201 sign in a previously scheduled visit 209 sign out 3 visite 211 Visits folder field Gebees deg ges 194 OVEIVIEW ice Ai ee ies St eee n a 191 Print Badge s window field table 198 IO 198 Sign In Visit s window field table 196 Visits form Cardholders folder freld table xis is hector nti eet 176 modify mode 176 UE E 177 VIEW MOE 280 52 4h ote A 176 Ww Weak database password warning sessess 0 24 Wedge scanner Adda Dad Se Jessie 137 CONFISUTE siener en aE 143 Alarm Monitoring User Guide scanning barcodeg eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 138 search for a badge AA 137 Wedge Settings window eee eeeeeeseeeeeeee 137 Window men 43 revision 105 429 ag gt e HES S ACCESS SYSTEMS P O Box 5044 Indianapolis IN 46250 Phone 317 849 2250 B A S LS ET Third Edition Alarm Monitoring User Guide pro
76. change the year click on the name of the year e and use the spin buttons ETE e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the last day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the End time checkbox and choosing a specific end time bh 2 08 02 AM Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons 266 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Folder Event Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Apply start and end time to each day checkbox If selected the specified time range will be applied to any date that falls within the specified date range For example if you specify a Date Time Filter starting January 1 1998 at 8 00 AM and ending March 31 1998 at 7 00 PM e H this box is checked the report will include only data collected during the hours of 8 00 AM through 7 00 PM on any and all days between January 1 and March 31 e H this box is not checked the report will include all data gathered from 8 00 AM on January straight through until March 31 at 7 00 PM Report All panels push button If this button is pushed all entries in the Panel l
77. changes Select All push button Click this button to select all checkboxes in the window Clear All push button Click this button to deselect all checkboxes in the window revision 105 239 15 Reports Folder Report Configuration Form Procedures Add a Report 1 Select Reports from the View menu The Reports folder opens Click Add In the Name field type a unique descriptive name for the report Click Browse The Open window opens SIL E Oe e Select the drive then the directory then the file name for an existing report layout 6 Click OK to insert the selection into the File field on the Report Configuration form Note You cannot use the Report Configuration form to design a report layout Only existing layouts can be used to create reports A valid report layout must have been designed using Crystal Reports for Windows and must have the file extension rpt 7 In the Description field type a description of this report s contents 8 If you want to restrict previewing and printing of this report type a password in the Password field 9 Type the password again in the Confirm Password field 10 In the Type s listing window select the checkboxes beside the most appropriate category for this report Note You do not have to select a checkbox Many of the reports currently in the system are uncategorized 11 Click OK to add the report The name of the
78. connects while Alarm Monitoring is not running the Last connect time for it is retrieved from the database when Alarm Monitoring starts up again e When a dialup panel is disconnected the System Status window immediately reflects the new Last connect time regardless of whether the Communications Lost alarm is acknowledged or not e When a dialup panel and Alarm Monitoring station are in different time zones the Last connect time displays both the local time and the panel time Download the B A S I S Database or Firmware Toolbar Shortcut wm ve wa e Fy sone Chez Operators can download the BA SIS database and or firmware to devices via Alarm Monitoring Devices include the controller dual interface Rdr1 readers BAS 1100 or BAS 1200 alarm panels RS 485 command keypads cameras and access panels Note It is not possible to download firmware to single reader interfaces 1 Open Alarm Monitoring and display the System Status window by selecting View gt System Status and then the desired window 2 Right click the access panel in the hardware view and select the Download Database or Download Firmware View the Firmware Type Flash Chip Size and DIP Switch Settings of a Controller 72 revision 105 The type of firmware a controller has is indicated in the firmware revision reported in the Alarm Monitoring hardware view It can also be found in the diagnostic tab of the access panels folder in System Administrat
79. e g reader mode online offline occupancy number e If not selected unchecked the status will only be displayed for a given device as a tool tip when the mouse pointer is over the device icon revision 105 41 2 Main Alarm Monitoring Window Options menu Continued Menu option Function Highlight Entire Highlights the entire row of an alarm when selected checked Row Disable Command Verification Displays successful configuration messages when commands to hardware E mail and pages are successfully sent e If selected checked Alarm Monitoring will NOT display successful configuration messages e If not selected unchecked Alarm Monitoring displays successful configuration messages Errors display in message boxes regardless of this setting Execute Command on Single Click of Icon Specifies commands to be executed on a single click This setting may be configured for each user and saved along with other user settings e If selected checked then a single click executes the default command for the device configured in System Administration e If not selected unchecked then the default command executes on a double click Display Controller Capacity Displays available memory free memory the maximum number of cardholders current cardholders stored in a controller maximum number of biometric templates and the current number of biometric templates set in a
80. f Enter the action s End date The current date is entered by default but you can change this value by typing a numeric date into the field or by selecting a date from the drop down calendar 4 5 6 8 Today 3 6 2003 es To select a month click on the and mi navigation buttons e You can also select a month by clicking on the displayed month to access a drop down list of months Highlight the month you want to select it revision 105 325 20 Scheduler Folder e Navigate to a year by clicking on the displayed year to access the year spin buttons Els e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the day that you want the action to stop occurring Note You do not have to select an end date If you do not want to set an end date select the No end date radio button g Click OK 10 Now you must configure the action that you have just scheduled Select the tab to the left of the Schedule tab this tab will correspond to the specific action properties window which you are viewing For more information refer to Appendix A Actions on page 333 Display the Scheduler Right Click Menu 1 Right click on a scheduled action in the listing window The scheduler right click menu is displayed Add Action Start Action Stop Action View Action History View Current Status Refresh Action Delete Action Modify Action 326 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring U
81. field contains the attribute in B A S LS that is to be filtered Match criteria Set to Contains by default May also be set to Begins With Ends With or Equals drop down list If enabled the Match criteria drop down list may be changed from its default value of contains to Begins With Ends With or Equals This setting specifies how the selection in the Where field relates to the value entered to search for in the Blank field Blank field text In this field type the value you wish to filter or search for For example if you wanted to display all User Transactions associated with System Administration you should 1 Select a User Transaction Log report in the listing window 2 Inthe Where field select Object 3 In the Match criteria field select Equals 4 In the blank field type System Administration without the quotes Click Preview and only those entries associated with System Administration will be displayed in the resulting report Clear push button Clears all current filter criteria Print push button Displays the Print Report Options window revision 105 261 15 Reports Folder Reports Folder Date Time Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Preview push button Displays the selected report with selected criteria in the Report Print Preview window Help push button Displays relevant on s
82. for Group Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Input Group listing window display Displays a list of available alarm input groups which have been configured in the system Mask radio button When configuring a mask unmask alarm input for group action select this radio button if you want the group of alarm inputs to be masked When alarm input groups are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Unmask radio button When configuring a mask unmask alarm input for group action select this radio button if you want the group of alarm inputs to be unmasked When alarm input groups are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties Window Procedures Add a Mask Unmask Alarm Input For Group Action 366 revision 105 1 Display the Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties window 2 From the Input Group listing window cli
83. information and acknowledgment notes Alarm Acknowledgments by Definition All alarm acknowledgments grouped by alarm definition Alarm Acknowledgments by Operator All alarm acknowledgments grouped by system operator Alarm Acknowledgments by Panel All alarm acknowledgments grouped by panel Alarm Configuration Alarm configuration summary Alarm Input Events All Alarm Input events by date Alarm Panel Inputs Definition of all Alarm Panel Inputs grouped by Access Panel and Alarm Panel Alarm Panel Local Linkage Lists alarm input output local links on alarm panels Alarm Panel Outputs Definitions of Alarm Panel Outputs grouped by Access Panel and Alarm Panel Alarm Panels Definition of all Alarm Panels grouped by Access Panel All Events Over Time A listing of all event types over time Anti Passback Events All anti passback events over time Area Anti Passback Configuration Lists all anti passback areas including the reader entrances and exits Area Entrance History History of all cardholders entering anti passback areas sorted by area and date Asset Classes Listing of each asset class Asset Events Listing of each asset event Asset Groups Listing of each asset group Asset Types Listing of each asset type Assets by Scan ID Listing of each asset grouped by Scan ID Assets by Ty
84. is selected in the System Administration software To locate this checkbox select the Monitoring menu and then select Alarms Click the Alarm Definition tab e If selected checked the corresponding video verify view automatically displays when the alarm occurs e If not selected unchecked the corresponding video verify view does not automatically display when the alarm occurs Automatic Visual Notification Causes breakthrough alarms to occur By default this menu choice is selected checked in Alarm Monitoring e If selected checked breakthrough alarms cause the Monitoring application and the Main Alarm View to be brought to the foreground when an alarm occurs e If not selected unchecked breakthrough alarms occur in the background Automatic visual notification must be configured for individual alarms in System Administration From the Monitoring menu select Alarms Click the Alarm Definition tab Highlight the appropriate alarm click the Modify button select the Visual Notification checkbox Click the OK button In the Alarm Monitoring application be sure to refresh the Alarm configuration through the Options menu Automatic Live Video Display Displays live video automatically when an alarm occurs if selected checked Display Status On Maps Displays the status of all device icons on graphical maps e If selected checked the status of every device icon on a graphical map is displayed
85. ishe 295 Reports form Cardholders folder 185 field table Aisian 185 Proredhureg 2 sce cseesesebeneetcusceeceencesen denen ces 185 Request Print Action Flowchart 392 Reset Use Limit Properties window 393 field table reiris srna 394 procedures eu SEENEN 394 Respond to an automatic Guard Tour 314 Retrieve the most recent search results 284 Retrieve the most recent visit search results 203 Right click opttong ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee 105 Run alarm panel report 252 anti passback report 257 EE 295 cardholder report 185 date time report 262 ENEHEEDOTE seess ces stesestsonctes 268 273 PEAMEL reporta csore ieseni isss 246 receiver account zone TepOrt 278 visit report from the Visits folder 221 S Scanning barcodes with a wedge scanner 138 Schedule ACUO aeae er aa eaaa esas 319 action using scheduler right click menu 327 automatic Guard Tour action 313 one time password change 346 recurring password change eee 347 VISIUS Coase See eh eee ek 201 SchedilerTOlder s eege tesceveotsetsaeteaneosseaes 317 Scheduler form Scheduler folder 318 field table ans ape e 319 procedures seniai ienes 319 Search for a cardholder record 00 0 eects 135 for a cardholder s biometric record 174 for a deeg 71 revision 105 427 Index for all visits by a selected visitor 200 for all visits for a spec
86. list Select the subtype of the asset being configured Available choices depend on what asset subtypes were added in the Asset Types and Subtypes Management window The window is displayed by selecting Asset Types and Subtypes from the Asset menu Serial Number numeric Enter the serial number of the asset you are adding Department drop down list Select the department of the asset being configured Available choices depend on what departments were added in the List Builder folder Last Inspection numeric Enter the date when the asset was last inspected Next Inspection numeric Enter the date when the asset will be inspected next Acquired numeric Enter the date when the asset was acquired Replace numeric Enter the date when the asset will be replaced Assessed Value numeric Enter the assessed value of the asset Replacement numeric Enter the replacement value of the asset Value 280 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Assets Folder Assets Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Asset Can Be Disabled checkbox For special HID IBM notebooks only If checked when the asset generates an access denied alarm when a cardholder is not assigned to the asset the asset will be disabled The Can Disable Asset checkbox on the Settings form of the Readers folder in System Administration must also be checked in order for the selected reader to disable the
87. list of cardholders who are currently or have been assigned to the selected asset You can choose the number of entries you want listed by selecting Show Assignments X Days Past from the Asset menu Last Name text When you select the Search button enter the last name of a cardholder to locate the assets that have been assigned to them First Name text When you select the Search button enter the first name of a cardholder to locate the assets that have been assigned to them Assigned numeric When you select the Search button enter the date the asset was assigned if you want to locate the cardholder who was assigned to the asset on that date Unassigned numeric When you select the Search button enter the date the asset was unassigned if you want to locate the cardholder who was unassigned to the asset on that date Photo display Displays a photo of the asset if one was captured in the Multimedia Capture module 290 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Assets Folder Assignments Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Last Access display Displays the date and time of the assets last access Assign Asset push button Displays the name of the asset currently displayed in the Cardholders Assign To folder If no name is displayed when selected the Cardholders folder is launched from where you can search for and select the cardholder
88. listing window click on an entry to select it 3 Do one of the following Select the Mask radio button if you want the alarm input to be masked When alarm inputs are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Select the Unmask radio button if you want the alarm input to be unmasked When alarm inputs are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting 4 Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties Window To display do one of the following Note Select the Action Types Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties xi Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Device Group 4 b i Alarm Input Group Mask C Unmask Cancel Help If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 365 A Actions Mask Unmask Alarm Input
89. lists the global APB areas that the selected cardholder is currently located in Show Last Granted If selected the Last access field will display information about the most recent valid access by Location the selected cardholder including the triggered event date time and reader name Show Last If selected the Last access field will display information about the most recent access attempt Attempted whether access was granted or not by the selected cardholder including the triggered event Location date time and reader name Bulk Provides a sub menu of options that can be applied to a select group of cardholder records First Record Displays the first matching cardholder record Rewind Jumps back 10 matching cardholder records Previous Record Displays the previous matching cardholder record Next Record Displays the next matching cardholder record Fast Forward Jumps forward 10 matching cardholder records Last Record Displays the last matching cardholder record Cardholder menu Bulk sub menu Menu option Function Note Note The Bulk sub menu is only available when the Cardholder menu is available The Bulk sub menu options are available when a cardholder record is displayed in the Cardholders folder window Assign Access Levels Allows you to assign access levels to a select group of cardholder records Remove Access Levels Allows you to rem
90. masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting e Select the Unmask radio button if you want the mask group to be unmasked When alarms are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting 4 Click OK 368 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Mask Unmask Door Properties Window To display do one of the following e Select the Action Types Mask Unmask Door Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard e Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Mask Unmask Door from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Mask Unmask Door Properties xi Mask Unmask Door flReaderB Access Panel B OlReaderD Access Panel D Mask C Unmask Cancel Hep Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 369 A Actions Mask Unmask Door Form Properties Window Table Form Element Type Comment Reader Controller display Displays a list of readers that are available for selection and the listing window controllers that are associated with eac
91. opens In the Visits listing window select the visit record you want to delete Alarm Monitoring User Guide Note To select multiple visit records select the Multiple Selection checkbox 3 Click the Delete 4 Click the OK The visit s will be deleted without confirmation Print a Badge for a Visitor 1 Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens 2 In the Visits listing window select the visit record you want to print Note To select multiple visit records select the Multiple Selection checkbox 3 On any form in the Visits folder click Print 4 The Print badge s window displays In the Print disposable badge s of this type listing window select the type of badge to print Print badge s ch Print disposable badge s of this type T Send all badges to this printer overriding badge type printer assignment Printer Z Ge Note Disposable badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder in System Administration and must have Visitor selected for the Class and the Disposable checkbox selected on the Badge Type sub tab If segmentation is enabled the correct segment must be selected on the Segment Membership sub tab 5 To select an alternate printer select the Send all badges to this printer overriding badge type printer assignment checkbox and choose a printer from the drop down list This checkbox and drop down list are enabled if the user has the correct permissions
92. options Configure global output devices SMTP server settings to use when sending e mail GOS paging device recipients of e mail and page messages Configure e mail and paging notification fields and display order for e mails and paging fields and or directories to check when determining who to send an e mail notification to Add segments to your installation enable segmentation segment options Create list options Set up archiving parameters Access Control Procedures Checklist Note 50 revision 105 This portion of the chapter focuses on the procedures the System Administrator should complete to enable access control and monitoring procedures to be performed by Alarm Monitoring Operators Be sure to complete the administrative procedures listed at the beginning of this chapter before attempting any access control and monitoring procedures Several access control and monitoring procedures require that certain Alarm Monitoring User Guide administrative procedures be completed first For example you must configure a workstation before you can configure most hardware devices All System Administrator access control procedures are completed via the Access Control or Additional Hardware menu in the System Administration application Instructions can be found in the Access Control section of the System Administration User Guide chapters 25 through 36 as well as the Additional Hardware section c
93. organization s electronic mail system e S push button Click to toggle the display of the report navigation tree on or off Zoom drop down list From this drop down list you can select the magnification level of the preview window contents with respect to the actual size Choices include 400 300 200 150 100 75 50 25 Page Width and Whole Page Selecting either Page Width or Whole Page displays the corresponding percentage in this field You can also type a number directly into this field but you must then either press lt Tab gt or click outside of the field for the number to take effect M push button Click to move to the first page of the report D 4 push button Click to move to the previous page of the report Page count display This display indicates the page number of the currently displayed page followed by the total page count for the report For example 2 of 4 push button Click to move to the next page of the report revision 105 305 18 Report Print Preview Window Report Print Preview Window Continued Form Element Type Comment gt l push button Click to move to the last page of the report D push button Click to terminate the report building process This button is especially useful if the report is lengthy and you want to view only part of it push button Click to display the Search window from where you
94. personnel with active badges AND access levels will be included in this report Name Note The Cardholders with Access by Badge Type and Cardholders with Access by Last Name reports replace the following reports from previous B A S LS versions e Cardholders With Access and Precision by Last Name e Cardholders With Access Levels by Badge Type e Cardholders With Access Levels by Last Name e Cardholders With Precision Access by Last Name CCTV Instructions Summary of all CCTV instructions in the database Cisco AIC Inputs Lists all Cisco AIC Inputs by panel Cisco AIC Outputs Lists all Cisco AIC Outputs by panel Continuous Video Lists all of the times that there has been continuous video archived Current Visits Lists all currently signed in visits Destination Assurance Configuration Lists all entrance readers their settings and the associated exit readers Destination Assurance Exempt Cardholders Lists all cardholders who has a badge that is exempt from destination assurance Device Status Events Status events for all devices Dialup Events by Panel Lists all dialup events by panel Dialup Last Connect Time Lists the dialup last connect times Elevator Access Denied and Granted Events All Access Denied and Granted events including time reader badge cardholder name and the floor to which access was attempted All access denials and grants will be shown Emergency Event
95. reader badge and cardholder name Access Denied Events by Reader Access Denied Events grouped by reader Access Granted Events All Access Granted events including time reader badge and cardholder name Access Granted Events by Reader Access Granted events grouped by Reader Access Groups Lists all Access Groups and the Access Levels contained in each group Access Groups With Levels Access Group definitions including access level details Access Level Assignments to Cardholders Listing of each Access Level with each cardholder that has that access level assigned to them Also summarizes the total number of badges that need to be downloaded Access Level Assignments to Cardholders By Segment Listing of each Access Level by Segment with each cardholder that has that access level assigned to them Also summarizes the total number of badges that need to be downloaded to each segment This report is valid only for systems that use the Segmentation feature Access Levels Access Level definitions Access Panels Access Panel definitions Visitor Name Active Visits by Listing of each active visit grouped by cardholder name Cardholder Name Active Visits by Listing of each active visit grouped by visitor name revision 105 415 C Reports Report name Description Alarm Acknowledgments All alarm acknowledgments including the alarm
96. recorded and live video The Video Player is displayed by right clicking an alarm device camera or camera device group and selecting Launch Video W North exit door Jl 11 Play Control Options View lu m 00C e jieji A m Re DEM SE T A a tr D 9 00 55 4M w Note Refer to the Video Player Status Bar Table on on page 82 for the descriptions of the status bar components A F 80 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Video Player Menu and Toolbar Buttons Table Field Toolbar button Description Play menu Contains the following menu options Live Plays live video from one or several cameras depending on the view settings Recorded Plays recorded video for the selected camera s File Plays video clips from a file Note A checkmark displays beside the option that is active Control menu Displays several options to play pause and stop video as well as advance video zoom in out adjust playback speed search video and remove cameras from the Video Player window Options menu Displays options to load video files set start end times to view recorded video export video to a file capture images from video and create video events View menu Displays options to change how cameras views are displayed Play button Plays recorded video Pause button Pauses or temporarily stops playing recorded video The video will continue from where it te
97. report will be inserted alphabetically into the listing window Modify a Report 1 From the listing window select the name of the report that you want to be changed If the report is not listed make sure that the appropriate checkbox is selected in the Report View Filter window displayed by selecting the Filter Report View button 2 Click Modify 3 Make the changes you want to the fields 4 Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to revert to the previously saved values 240 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Delete a Report 1 From the listing window select the name of the report that you want to delete If the report is not listed make sure that the appropriate checkbox is selected in the Report View Filter window displayed by selecting the Filter Report View button Click Delete Click OK Filter The Report View 1 On the Report Configuration form click Filter Report View The Report View Filter window opens Report View Filter xi View reports of the following type s Cancel MA Alarm Panel Events M Anti Passback Select All M Asset MA Cardholder Ceara M Date Time M General M Guest M Reader M Reader Events M Receiver M Receiver Account Zone M Receiver Events MA ser Transactions zl Select the checkboxes that correspond with the types of reports that you want to view Click Select All to select all of the choices in the listing window Click Clea
98. right click options are available if Guard Tour is set up in your system e Launch Tour starts a guard tour e View Tour displays the guard tour live tracking window for a specific tour Cisco Hardware Right click Options If you right click on an output in the hardware view either list or tree you see options for Cisco AIC outputs e Momentary On sets the output in the On state momentarily for the duration specified and then returns to its previous state e Momentary Off sets the output in the Off state momentarily for the duration specified and then returns to its previous state e Latched On sets the output in the On position permanently e Latched Off sets the output in the Off position permanently Single and Double Left click Mode Each Alarm Monitoring operator can set their options so that commands are executed with a single left click or a double left click of an icon in the system status view or map view The default setting is to execute commands with a double left click Furthermore if that command was previously available as a right click menu option then the command will be listed in bold when the device is right clicked For some menus the default command may be in a sub menu of the context menu The example below shows the Reader Auxiliary Output 2 in bold This is the command that will be executed when the operator single or double left clicks the controller icon depending on how they have set the
99. security number If you do not wish to use this feature leave this checkbox deselected c Select whether to ignore non numeric data By default the Ignore non numeric data checkbox is selected This is important for scans that include dashes in the social security number d Specify the maximum length in the Max length field A maximum length must be provided if the wedge scanner does not automatically provide a line feed carriage return This allows the wedge scanner to be used as long as the length of the scan is always the same Oe social security number revision 105 143 12 Cardholders Folder Cardholder Form Cardholder Form Overview 144 revision 105 Note If 0 or 1 is specified then the whole string will be read in Specify the start and end In a string of numbers that contains a search criteria typically social security number or badge ID start and end are the first and last position respectively that contain the search criteria Click OK Cardholders EB Cardholder Je Segments BS Badge lv Access Levels Precision Access Biometrics E Visits e Assets Directory A4 gt Last name Lake Lisa Cardholder ID First name Middle name Badge type 123456789 Employee S Address 1050 Pittsford Victor Road City Pittsford State Zip code fi 4534 Kee Phone Birth date 248 9720 ban 974 E mail flselake acmecom Record last changed
100. signal that Visonic SpiderAlert receivers can receive There are three types of transmitters fixed portable hand held and man down For more information refer to the Personal Safety Devices Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Transmitter Input Lists alarms in order of transmitter input 116 revision 105 For any sort the second level sort criterion is always Priority and the third level criterion is always Time Date For example e Ifyou sort by Controller all alarms associated with the same controller will be sorted by Priority then by Time Date e Ifyou sort by Priority all alarms with the same priority will be sorted by Time Date e Ifyou sort by Time Date alarms with the same time to the second date will be sorted by Priority The sort criterion applies to the current window only You can have one Main Alarm Monitoring window and various Trace windows each with a different sort criterion When you open a new Main Alarm Monitoring window it is initially sorted by Priority Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 11 Acknowledge Alarms Alarm Acknowledgment Window Functions The Alarm Acknowledgment window enables you to e Respond in the software to an alarm e View or listen to stored instructions for a specific alarm e Print information pertaining to an alarm e Enter or select notes pertaining to an alarm Displayed by The Alarm Acknowledgment window can be displ
101. standard BA SIS permissions The use of the explicit username and password for directory authentication to Windows is strongly discouraged It is recommended that you do not store Windows passwords in the B A S LS system since B A S I S uses reversible encryption and Windows does not If explicit authentication is required you should use an account that has view only permission to the directory in question Directory Accounts 26 revision 105 To log into B A S LS using single sign on a user name password and directory is required A directory is a database of network resources such as printers software applications databases and users The following directories are Alarm Monitoring User Guide supported by B A S I S Microsoft Active Directory Microsoft Windows NT 4 Domain Microsoft Windows 2000 XP Workstation and LDAP Automatic and Manual Single Sign On When a user account is configured for single sign on the user can log into B A S LS automatically or manually For example with automatic single sign on users simply start B A S LS and they are automatically logged in under their Windows account and directory With manual single sign on users must manually enter their Windows or LDAP account information user name and password Users also have the option of selecting a different configured directory If single sign on is not used users manually enter a user name and a password that is different from t
102. state Signal Silence Signal Silence Fire Generated when the alarm signal on the hardware has been silenced Smart Card Smart Card System Generated when a smart card authentication Authentication Failed Authentication Failed failed Status In Status In Fire Generated when a status reporting device is active Status Out Status Out Fire Generated when a status reporting device has returned to the inactive state Storage Failure Storage Failure Video Store Coupon Store Coupon POS Indicates a store coupon Supervisory Supervisory Fire Generated when a supervisory condition has Acknowledge Acknowledge been acknowledged Supervisory Block Supervisory Block Fire Generated when all supervisory conditions Acknowledge Acknowledge have been acknowledged at the fire panel Supervisory In Supervisory In Fire Generated when a new supervisory condition has been detected for the device Supervisory Out Supervisory Out Fire Generated when a device with a previous supervisory condition has returned to its normal state System Reset System Reset System Generated when the fire panel has been reset Tax Amount Tax Amount POS Event that indicates the tax amount Taxable Subtotal Taxable Subtotal POS Transaction that reports the taxable subtotal Timeout Exceeded No Timeout Exceeded No Area APB Generated when no second card was Second Card Second Card presented within the time limit for the area reader using two man control Total Amount Due Total
103. system and the controllers that are associated with each Mask radio button When configuring a mask unmask door held open action select this radio button if you want the door held open alarm to be masked When door held open alarms are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Unmask radio button When configuring a mask unmask door held open action select this radio button if you want the door held open alarm to be unmasked When door held open alarms are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask Unmask Door Held Open Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Mask Unmask Door Held Open Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Mask Unmask Door Held Open Properties Window Procedures Add a Mask Unmask Door Held Open Action 1 Display the Mask Unmask Door Held Open Properties window 2 From the Reader Controller listing window click on an entry to select it 3 Do one of the following e Select the Mask radio button if you want door held open alarms for the selected reader to be masked When door held open alarms are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring ap
104. that is linked to an output action e Alarm Time The time the request was initiated e Timeout The total amount of time the operator has to either grant or deny the request The timeout value is user defined with a default value of 3 minutes This field does not refresh To determine the amount of time remaining the operator must also refer to the Alarm Time column and the current time located in the status bar to determine when the request was initiated Grant Grants the request pulses open the door and removes the request from the Grant Deny pop up window Deny Denies the request no command is issued to the hardware and removes the request from the Grant Deny pop up window Grant Deny Pop up Window Procedures Grant or Deny Access 104 revision 105 1 Verify the Communication and Linkage Server are running To do this click the Start button then select Programs gt B A S LS ET gt Communication Server or Linkage Server 2 To grant access complete one of the following when the Grant Deny pop up window displays e Double click a request e Right click a request and select Grant e Select highlight a request and click Grant Note You must have the open door user permission in order to issue a grant Contact your System Administrator to set up this permission or refer to the Note Right click Op Note Alarm Monitoring User Guide Users Folder chapter in the System Administration User Gu
105. the Made door Granted No Entry Access Granted No Access Generated when access was granted but no Entry Made Granted entry was made at the door Granted Under Duress Access Granted Under Duress Generated when the cardholder was granted Duress access under duress Granted Under Duress Access Granted Under Duress Generated when the cardholder was granted No Entry Duress No Entry Made access under duress but no entry was made Grounded Loop Active Grounded Loop Alarm System Generated when a grounded loop fault Active condition has been detected Grounded Loop Cancelled Grounded System Generated when the grounded loop fault Restored Loop condition was restored Guard Tour Action Guard Tour Action System Generated when a guard tour action has Executed Executed executed Guard Tour Action Guard Tour Action System Generated when a guard tour action has Failed Failed failed Hold Hold Intercom Generated when a phone call is placed on hold Host Executed Host Executed Function System Generated when a function list has been Function List List executed from the host Inactive Badge Inactive Badge Access Generated when access was denied because Denied the badge was inactive Incoming Call Incoming Call Intercom Generated when there is an incoming call Information Message Information Message POS Used to report information messages Initiated Initiated Intercom Generated when a phone call is initiated Input Alarmed Input Alarmed Gene
106. the Video Search window For more information please refer to Di Display the Video Search Window on page 95 Click the Create Motion Detection Region toolbar button 3 In the Video Player left click to create a starting point for the area you want to highlight A red dot displays 96 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Note The examples below are enhanced for visibility When you complete this procedure the area highlighted may be hard to discern until a line is drawn T pip 1 55 57 PM 4 Click another point in the area you want to highlight A red line connecting the two points displays 1 55 57 PM 5 5 Continue clicking points to expand the highlighted area es SES 1 55 57 PM revision 105 97 7 Video Monitoring Note If at any time you want to remove the highlighted area go to the Video Search window and click the Remove Motion Detection Region toolbar button All highlights are removed 6 When you are satisfied with the highlighted area go to the Video Search window and click the Search toolbar button Only the highlighted area is searched 7 You can also invert the area you highlighted by clicking the Include the Motion Detection Region in the Search toolbar button In the example above everything but the entrance door would be highlighted View Search Results There are several ways to view the recorded video associated with the video search results All video is display
107. the last matching record Record count numeric Displayed in view mode and indicates the number of the record out of the total number of records found by the most recent search operation For example 6 of 10 You can type in a number and hit the lt Enter gt key to jump to that record number revision 105 281 16 Assets Folder Assets Folder Assets Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Add push button Used to add an asset record Capture push button Launches the Multimedia Capture module where you can add a photo of the asset Modify push button Used to change an asset record Delete push button Used to delete an asset record Print push button This button is not used Assets Form Procedures Add an Asset Note zs P o 10 11 This procedure does not apply to view edit only workstations Select Asset Info from the View menu The Assets folder opens Click Add In the Scan ID field enter an ID number for the asset In the Name field enter a descriptive name for the asset This is a friendly name assigned to each asset to make it easy to identify Each name must be unique and contain no more than 32 characters If you want to identify the asset by type select one from the Type drop down list If you want to identify the asset by subtype select one from the Subtype drop down list If you don t want to identify the asset by type and or subtype cho
108. the right of the Host name drop down list The Select Host Wizard Search form opens For more information refer to Select Host Wizard Search Form on page 224 1 Specify your search criteria by typing full or partial entries in the enabled fields Note Leave all fields blank to display all cardholders 2 3 4 5 If a visitor is specified and you wish to search for only cardholders who have been visited by that visitor select the Previous hosts for current visitor only checkbox Click Next The Select Host Wizard Select form opens In the Cardholder listing window select the cardholder you wish to add a visitor for For more information refer to Select Host Wizard Select Form on page 226 Click the Finish The cardholder s name appears in the Host name field on the Visit form c Click the button to the right of the Visitor name field The Select Visitor Wizard Search form displays 1 Specify your search criteria by typing full or partial entries in the enabled fields Note Leave all fields blank to display all visitors Note Note Note Note Alarm Monitoring User Guide 2 Ifa cardholder is specified and you wish to only search for visitors who have visited that cardholder select the Previous visitors for current host only checkbox 3 Click the Next 4 The Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add form displays If the Visitor is listed below select the visitor and cli
109. to scroll for fast forward and rewind field on the View Options window The View Options window is displayed by selecting View Options from the Cardholder menu gt i push button Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder HI When selected moves to the last record that matches your search criteria OK push button Displayed in search or modify mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected saves the changes made to the current record or begins the requested search Cancel push button Displayed in search or modify mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected cancels the pending requested action Clear push button Displayed in search or modify mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected clears all current record information that can be cleared from the current form Clear All push button Displayed in search or modify mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected clears all current record information that can be cleared from all forms in the folder Capture push button Displayed in add or modify mode on the Cardholder Visitor form the Segments form the Badge form the Access Levels form the Precision Access form and the Biometrics form Displayed in modify mode on the Visits form When selected opens the Multimedia Capture module Note The availability of the Multimedia Capture module is subject to licensing restrictions Last S
110. to the application You cannot delete or change the system account except to modify the password which you are strongly encouraged to do as soon as possible to discourage unauthorized use The first time you log into B A S LS to configure the application you should log in as SA and your password should be SA Log In Important Monitor zone user assignments take precedence over monitoring station user assignments Alarm Monitoring User Guide This procedure describes how to log in without using single sign on For a description of single sign on refer to Single Sign On Overview on page 26 To log in using single sign on refer to Single Sign On Procedures on page 27 1 Click the Start button then select Programs gt B A S 1 S ET gt Alarm Monitoring 2 Your system may be configured to prompt you to select a database to log into If it is not proceed to the next step If it is a b In the Database drop down all ODBC system databases currently defined on your computer are listed Select the database that you wish to use for your application Click OK 3 The Log On window displays a In the User name field type the user name assigned to you When logging in for the first time your user name is SA In the Password field type the password assigned to you When logging in for the first time your password is SA Note that the characters you type do not appear in the field Instead for each characte
111. unmasked doors generate alarms they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting 4 Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Properties Window To display do one of the following Note Select the Action Types Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Mask Unmask Door Forced Open from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Properties xi Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Controller iReader Panel 1 Mask Unmask Cancel Help If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 371 A Actions Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Reader Controller display Displays a list of available readers which have been configured in the listing window system and the controllers that are associated with each Mask radio button When configuring a mask unmask door forced open action select this radio button if you want the door forced open alarm to be masked Whe
112. user s password against password standards This functionality is designed to enhance password security if single sign on is not used If single sign on is used automatic or manual B A S I S does not enforce password standards For more information on single sign on refer to Single Sign On Overview on page 26 The system s strong password enforcement also checks the Best database user s password when logging into applications Database user passwords apply only to Oracle and SQL databases For information on changing your database password refer to the Installation amp Setup User Guide Password Standards When creating a strong password keep the following guidelines in mind e Passwords cannot be blank e Passwords cannot be the same as the user name e g SA SA e Passwords cannot be Best keywords e g MULTIMEDIA PROKUPETS PROKUPET BEST BASIS PASSWORD e Although not required your password should contain numbers letters and symbols Spaces are also acceptable e g August 18 2002 e B A S LS passwords are not case sensitive e Database passwords conform to the rules of the specific database being used passwords in SQL Server and Oracle are case insensitive e The maximum value for a strong password is 127 characters The minimum value is 1 Notes Enable Note Error M Alarm Monitoring User Guide For Oracle databases the following account username and passwords are not allowed t
113. view options include list or tree view as well as the type of devices displayed Users can display every device or select devices that meet a specific criteria such as active offline and or masked devices as well as armed areas disarmed areas and or areas in alarm 1 Verify you are in the System Status window then select Configure gt System Status Options from the menu 2 The System Status Options window displays a Select the type of device you would like to display by clicking either the All devices or Specified devices checkbox If you selected the Specified devices checkbox select the desired device by clicking the appropriate radio button active offline or masked devices b Select the Tree radio button to view the system hardware in a tree or branching format c Select the List radio button to view a list of devices their current status and parent device d Select the Lock display updates checkbox if desired 3 Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 5 Monitor Devices The System Status window and Device Groups window are used to monitor devices System Status Window The System Status window lists every access control device area or action group defined in System Administration for a specific segment Other configuration settings are listed in parenthesis after each device Displayed by The System Status window can be displayed several ways e Click the triangle on the System Status button an
114. you wish to assign to the asset Search push button Used to locate a cardholder or asset assignment record Last Search push button Click on this button the display the findings of the previous search 4 push button Moves to the first matching record push button Moves 10 matching records back push button Moves to the previous matching record push button Moves to the next matching record E RR RR RS push button Moves 10 matching records forward push button Moves to the last matching record Record count numeric Displayed in view mode and indicates the number of the record out of the total number of records found by the most recent search operation For example 6 of 10 You can type in a number and hit the lt Enter gt key to jump to that record number Add push button This button is not used Modify push button This button is not used Delete push button This button is not used Print push button This button is not used revision 105 291 16 Assets Folder Assignments Form Procedures Assign a Cardholder to an Asset Note This procedure does not apply to view only workstations Locate the record of that asset that you want to assign If the Cardholders folder was already open and a cardholder record displayed proceed to 3 If not click Assign Asset to launch the Cardholders folder On the Cardholders folder retrieve the record of the cardholder you want to as
115. you can have all Guard Tour History record types deleted when they are 180 days old To display do one of the following e Select the Action Types Category and the Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Object in the Add Action Wizard For more information refer to Use the Add Action Wizard on page 333 e Click the Add button on the Action Group Library form of the Action Group Library folder from System Administration Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Properties Number of days 180 Note History records older than the number of days above will be permanently deleted Record Types M Action History Action History Guard Tour Event Purging IV Guard Tour History Cancel Help Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Properties Window Form Element Type Comment Number of Days spin button The history records older than the number of days selected will be permanently deleted when the action runs Action History check box Select this check box if you want Action History records deleted that are older than the Number of days setting Guard Tour History check box Select this check box if you want Guard Tour History records deleted that are older than the Number of days setting OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Action Hist
116. 0 Access Panel fm 500 Access Panel E Date Time Filter Stat Friday August 15 2003 SI I 12 00 00 aM End JS Friday August 15 2003 gt 11 59 59 PM E I Apply start and end time to each day Ge _ Bin Preview Help I Use restored records 1 of 2 selected Close Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Overview Notes The Alarm Acknowledgment Reports form is designed to provide reports on acknowledged alarms This report can be filtered by the date time the acknowledgment occurred the device that triggered the alarm and the operator who acknowledged the alarm When you select a filter the report displays alarm acknowledgments for only the filtered device If you want to view everything use the convenient Report All button The result of the report includes the following e Date and time this report was created e Date and time the alarm occurred e Date and time the alarm was acknowledged e Who acknowledged the alarm e Any notes included with the acknowledgment e The device that caused the alarm e The total number of acknowledgments The details column does not report who acknowledged the alarm but rather who was logged into Alarm Monitoring when the alarm was acknowledged Therefore someone other than the person logged into Alarm Monitoring may have acknowledged the alarm The first and last name displayed in the Details column are configured in the System Administration Users folder
117. 02 Show unassigned levels 1 levels assigned OK Cancel Clear Clear All Capture Lian dete No Last Access Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate an Deactivate 77872001 Person type Cardholder he Cardholders Folder Access Levels Form Form Element Type Comment Show levels for badge ID issue code drop down list will be displayed in the Access levels display Displayed in view mode Lists the badge ID and issue code in parentheses for the current active badge If the Show inactive badges checkbox is selected the list includes both the active and the inactive badge s assigned to the selected cardholder Select a badge ID issue code from the list and the corresponding access levels for that badge revision 105 163 12 Cardholders Folder Cardholders Folder Access Levels Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Show inactive checkbox Displayed in view mode When selected the Show levels for badge ID badges issue code drop down list will list both the active and inactive badge s assigned to the selected cardholder Access levels display Displayed in a view and modify mode When the Show unassigned display levels checkbox is selected lists both access levels that have been and that can be assigned to the selected cardholder badge record If the Show unassigned levels checkbox is not selected only access levels that have been assig
118. 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Folder Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Start section e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the Start time checkbox and choosing a specific start time 08 ES M 208 02AM Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons End section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the End date checkbox and choose a specific end date from the drop down calendar a April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 20 3 1 2 3 4 ae 7 8 9 10 1 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 29 30 1 2 4 5 6 H 8 9 lt Today 3 6 2003 e Select the last month for which data is to be included in this report Use the Ej and wi navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the last year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the year to access the spin buttons 2003 revision 105 271 15 Reports Folder Reports Folder Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment End section e Once you have selected a month and a y
119. 105 135 12 Cardholders Folder Change the Cardholders Folder View Options 1 Select View Options from the Cardholder menu The View Options window opens Cardholder photo lookup f Normal image E Cancel Cardholder signature lookup Normal image v Number of records to scroll for fast forward and rewind 10 2 From the Cardholder photo lookup drop down list select the image type you want displayed in Photo display located in the right section of the Cardholders folder forms Choices include e None no image will be displayed e Normal image a photo image will be displayed as it was originally captured e Normal image with chromakey a photo image will be displayed but without its background 3 From the Cardholder signature lookup drop down list select the type of signature you want displayed in Signature display located in the right section of the Cardholders folder forms Choices include e None no signature will be displayed e Normal image a signature will be displayed 4 Inthe Number of records to scroll for fast forward and rewind field type in the number of records you want to move backwards and forwards when you select the and push buttons 5 Click OK 136 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Keyboard Wedge Settings Window Keyboard Wedge Settings m Field to search on Table Field BADGE zl ID hd m Department of Defense Common Access Card
120. 123456789 Employee z Primary segment B lt All Segments gt z Additional Segments dha da No Last Access Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate Fan O selections Deactivate Fazon Ia 44 4 gt gt gt gt i 1 of3 Segments Form Overview The Segments form is used to e Modify a cardholder s segment assignment e Change a group of cardholder s segments Cardholders Folder Segments Form Form Element Type Comment Primary segment drop down list In modify mode select which primary segment you want the selected cardholder to be assigned to A cardholder can be assigned to a primary segment and as well as additional segments Additional display Lists all of the segments that have been configured in the system For Segments listing more information refer to the Segments Folder chapter in the System window Administration User Guide Number of display Displays the number of segments that have been selected in the selections Additional Segments listing window For example 2 selections 150 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Segments Form Procedures Modify a Cardholder s Segment Assignment 1 Dy es 2 Fe Select the Badge Info from the View menu The Cardholders folder opens Select the Segments tab Locate the cardholder record that you want to modify Click Modify From the Primary segment drop down list select which primary segment yo
121. 2003 8 33 15 AM 2 19 2003 8 33 17 AM 1 ER 2 19 2003 8 33 55 AM 2 19 2003 8 33 57 AM 1 38 2 19 2003 8 34 38 AM 2 19 2003 8 34 40 4M 1 99 2 19 2003 8 37 01 AM 2 19 2003 8 37 28 AM 2 ER 2 19 2003 8 38 19 AM 2 19 2003 8 38 24 AM 5 38 2 19 2003 8 38 48 4M 2 19 2003 8 38 49 AM 1 99 2 19 2003 8 39 13 AM 2 19 2003 8 39 30 4M 16 ER 2 19 2003 8 45 06 AM 2 19 2003 8 45 07 AM 1 38 x E UDO DA Field Description Search menu Contains the following menu options EE Start Begins the video search and resumes the video search if it is paused Pause Pauses or temporarily stops searching video The video search continues from where it temporarily stopped when the Start button is clicked e e Restart Restarts the video search at the beginning Options menu Displays the Event Settings menu option which displays the Event Settings window In The Event Setting window you can configure how the search results display For more information refer to Event Settings Window on page 87 Note You may be prompted to restart the search when you change event settings View menu Contains two menu options for displaying search results Images or Details In the screen shot above the list view displays detailed information Start Time End Time Duration and Motion level revision 105 85 7 Video Monitoring Field Description Create Motion Detection Region Enables you to select a regi
122. 354 Execute Function List Properties Window sssssssesseeesesrnnreererrnnnnrnsrrrnnn 355 Execute Function List Properties Window Procedures seeeeeeeeeees 356 Add an Execute Function List ACION ccccecesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseneaees 356 Global APB System Segment Reset Properties Window nnnn0000000s000000 357 Global APB System Segment Reset Properties Window Procedures 358 Add a Global APB System Segment Reset Action 358 ISC Database Download Properties Window ssesessssssseeeseessennnnsserrennneseee 358 ISC Database Download Properties Window Procedures ee 360 Add an ISC Database Download Action 0 cceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeseeeeessaeeeseneees 360 ISC Firmware Download Properties Window ssssssssssseeseseeesrnneesesrrnrneeseee 361 ISC Firmware Download Properties Window Procedures sssssssessseeeee 362 Add an ISC Firmware Download Action ccececceceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeseeneeessaeeneneees 362 Mask Unmask Alarm Input Properties Window c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 363 Mask Unmask Alarm Input Properties Window Procedures sssseseeesseene 364 Add a Mask Unmask Alarm Input Action ecceeeeccee cece eee ee eeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneees 364 Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Properties Window sssssseeseesseenn 365 Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group Prope
123. AS 1300 HID ER pas 1220 2005 80 BAS 1320 2020 Selected ate On new event display E Video E Photograph Alarm Description _ Cardholder Access Granted Lisa Lake 1 3 48 58 PM BAS 1320 BAS 1320 2020 Display the Cardholder Photo and Live Video Clicking an alarm in the video verification alarms window displays both the cardholder photo and live video from a camera at the reader Live video continues to display until one of the following happens Notes You click another alarm Another alarm arrives this is true only if the Video checkbox is selected The Video checkbox must be selected to display live video when a new alarm occurs The Photograph checkbox must be selected to display the cardholder s photograph when a new alarm occurs Delete an Alarm in the Video Verification Window To remove an alarm from the alarms window click the alarm then select Delete from the Edit menu or right click the alarm and select Delete To clear all alarms from the alarms window select Delete All from the Edit menu revision 105 101 8 Video Verification 102 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 9 Control Devices and Areas Permissions for control device groups can be given or restricted through System Administration From the Administration menu select Users On the Monitor Permission Groups sub tab there is a Control Device Groups sub tab with which you can control access to device groups
124. Alarm Monitoring User Guide eh EE ACCESS SYSTEMS S i ele SG Alarm Monitoring User Guide Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction cccccceceeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeneeeeneeeaeeeeeeeeeees 21 Alarm Monitoring Overview EE 21 Conventions Used in this Documentation ssssseesseeneeeeserrreeseerrrrnneseerrrn 21 How this Document is Organized EEN 21 Getting Stared EE 22 PASSWOMGS prenia epen ra EE 22 Enable Disable Strong Password Enforcement sseessseessseesseesrissrirsssrrssrrnssrnnsnnsrnnnet 23 Error Messages erene ceteris a can T E E Ea RAE AA T aE ERRA 23 Le ere I E E PE E A A aden cates duns E EE E TETEE ET 24 LOGI eie a a e a NA 25 Single Sign On Re EE 26 Directory Accounts he oine o ta E e EErEE EAER ENA 26 Automatic and Manual Single Sign On cccceececeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeeeee 27 elle le Te D lee 27 Configure Single Sign On cecccceeesseceeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeseeneeeceaaeeseeneeecaeeseeaaeeseeeeteaaeeee 27 Log In Using Automatic Single Sign On 0 ccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseceeeseaaeeseeeeeesaaeeeeaees 28 Log In Using Manual Single Sign On een 29 Troubleshoot Logging IN E 30 OMO De ele KEE 20 Log Out of the Application 0 0 cccccseceeeeecececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeesaeeeeeaaeeseeaeeeseaeeeseeeeetnaeeseaas 31 Exit thie Applications cess ats ites scion aa cas concdi dade tay A S Lead bon eed deta 31 Chapter 2 Main Alarm Monitoring Window
125. Alarm Event Descriptions Alarm Event Event Type Description Reader Mode Unlocked Reader Mode Unlocked System Generated when the reader mode has changed to Unlocked Reader Motor Stalled Reader Motor Stalled System Generated when the motor stalls on a reader Reader Motor Stalled Reader Motor Stalled System Generated when a motor stalled condition Restored Restored has been restored Reader Reset Reader Reset System Generated when the firmware resets the reader This can happen if the reader is brand new or in the case of a failed incomplete download Internal conditions such as a possible corrupt memory can also cause the firmware to reset In these cases the firmware will rewrite its entire storage with default values overwriting the downloaded values When this happens the user must reprogram the lockset Register X Report Register X Report POS Indicates a X report was generated X reports are financial end of day clerk etc reports Register Z Report Register Z Report POS Indicates a Z report was generated Z reports are the same as X reports but resets totals to zero Rejected Biometric Rejected Biometric Biometric This event returns the rejected biometric Score Score score the actual denied event is sent separately Relay Contact Relay Contact System Generated when a relay contact was Activated Activated activated Relay Contact Relay Contact System Gen
126. Alarm Filter The Alarm Filter window displays Alarm Filter xi Event types to monitor Wi Access Denied L Access Granted O Biometric O Burglary O Com O Doze Y wil Cancel Help 3 By default all event types are selected have a checkmark If you do not want to display a particular category of events click that option to deselect it remove the checkmark Click the option again to select it 4 Click OK to close the Alarm Filter window Select Column Configuration 58 revision 105 You can rearrange the order of the columns in any window as well as add or remove columns that display This is done independently for each type of window For example if the column configuration is changed for an alarm window this becomes the default for all alarm windows of the same type If the Alarm Monitoring User Guide column configuration is changed for a given reader trace this will become the default configuration for all reader traces 1 Open the window from which you want to configure the columns displayed Verify this window is the active topmost window 2 From the Configure menu select Columns The Column Configuration window displays Column Configuration for Main Alarm Monitor E Select columns Columns to view Alarm Description Alarm Description Time Date Time Date Controller Controller Device Device Input Output Input Output Card Card Priority 2 Priori
127. All Enabled only when the Multiple Selection checkbox is selected If selected all visits in the listing window will be selected Clear All If selected all visits selected in the listing window will be deselected Add Selecting this option does the same thing as clicking the Add button it allows you to add another visit based on the currently selected visit Modify Selecting this option does the same thing as clicking the Modify button it allows you to change the visit that is currently selected Delete Selecting this option does the same thing as clicking the Delete button it allows you to delete the visit that is currently selected The visit will be deleted without prompting for confirmation 192 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Right click menu option Description Sign In This option is only available for a visit that is not active not signed in If the Multiple Selection checkbox is selected multiple visits can be selected and signed in at once Selecting this option does the same thing as clicking the Sign In button If selected the Sign In Visit s window is displayed In this window select whether to print disposable badges for the visitor that is being signed in Sign Out This option is only available for a visit that is active signed in If the Multiple Selection checkbox is selected multiple visits can be selected and signed out at once Selecting this optio
128. Amount Due POS Transaction indicating the total amount due Transaction Number Transaction Number POS Event Generated that indicates the transaction number of the sales transaction Transfer Diagnostics Transfer Diagnostics System Generated when a user is connected to the device for diagnostic purposes Transfer History Transfer History System Generated when a history data was transferred from the device to the parent device revision 105 411 B Alarm Event Descriptions Alarm Event Event Type Description Transfer PDA To Lock Transfer PDA To Lock System Generated when the device lockset is programmed reprogrammed through a download from a PDA Transmitter Alarm Transmitter Alarm Transmitter Generated when the button or input on a transmitter has been activated Transmitter Alarm Transmitter Alarm Transmitter Generated when the transmitter alarm has Restored Restored been restored Transmitter Inactivity Transmitter Inactivity Transmitter Transmitter has been inactive longer than the supervision interval Transmitter Low Transmitter Low Transmitter Transmitter low battery alarm Battery Battery Transmitter Low Transmitter Low Transmitter Generated when a transmitter low battery Battery Restored Battery Restored has been restored Transmitter Pre Tilt Transmitter Pre Tilt Transmitter Generated when the transmitter is in the pre tilt stat
129. Anti Passback Reports Form OvervieW cc ccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeesaeeeseneeessaeeeteneees 253 Anti Passback Reports Form Procedures nenonnnnononeeeeeeennnnnnnnnnnnenneen 257 Run an Anti Passback Report eceeccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaaaes 257 Date Time Reports Form EEN 258 Date Time Reports Form Overview cccccccceeceeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeesaaeeeeneeessaeeesenes 258 Date Time Reports Form Procedures cceeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeteeees 262 Runa Date TimesRe port eI ep erena cede eege ere gel ESA 262 Event Reports FORM aisinas taane a a E E E 264 Event Reports Form Overview sssssesssssssissssssriessrrstsiisssitssttnsttnnstnnnnnnntnnntnnntsrnesnts 264 Event Reports Form Procedures Aen 268 Ruman Event Repol ss nt iit nities aakit NARESE EEE KPO EEN 268 Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form 269 Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Overview ccccccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseneees 269 Run an Alarm Acknowledgment Report AA 273 Receiver Account Zone Reports Form EE 274 Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Overview cc cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenaeeteaes 274 Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Procedures c ccceeseeeeeeseeeeeeees 278 Run a Receiver Account Zone Report cc cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeesenaeeeeeeseaaes 278 Chapter 16 Assets Folder ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
130. C T If length of input exceeds limit assume CAC barcode Limi IV Ignore non numeric data Max length jo Start EW End P a Cancel Keyboard Wedge Settings Window Form Element Type Comment Table drop down list Select the table in the B A S LS database that you wish to search on when keyboard input is detected If searching for badge ID numbers select the BADGE table and if searching for social security numbers select the EMP table Note If CAC is being used and an ID is scanned that has more than the specified Limit of digits then the Table and Field will be ignored Field drop down list Select the field in the selected table in the B A S I S database that you wish to search on when keyboard input is detected If searching for badge ID numbers select ID in the BADGE table and if searching for social security number select SSNO in the EMP table Note If CAC is being used and an ID is scanned that has more than the specified Limit of digits then the Table and Field will be ignored If length of input exceeds limit assume CAC barcode checkbox If selected CAC Common Access Card barcodes can be used This allows military code 30f9 barcodes to be scanned and decoded into the cardholder s social security number If you do not wish to use this feature leave this checkbox deselected If this checkbox is selected you must specify an appropriate Limit When t
131. Ce The 2nd DI Tuesday D of every 3 4 month s d In the Daily frequency section do one of the following e If you want the action to occur only once on its scheduled day s select the Occurs once at___ radio button and enter a time The following example shows an action being scheduled to occur at 12 00 PM Occurs once at 1200 PMO e If you want the action to occur more than once on its scheduled day s select the Occurs every___Starting at Ending at radio button and enter the hours that you want the action to occur 324 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide The following example shows an action being scheduled to occur every 2 hours starting at 9 00 AM and ending at 5 00 PM Occurs every 2 H hours DI Starting at 03 00 AM Ending at 05 00PM e Enter the action s Start date The current date is entered by default but you can change this value by typing a numeric date into the field or by selecting a date from the drop down calendar 4 5 6 8 Today 3 6 2003 es To select a month click on the and mi navigation buttons e You can also select a month by clicking on the displayed month to access a drop down list of months Highlight the month you want to select it e Navigate to a year by clicking on the displayed year to access the year spin buttons Els e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the day that you want the action to begin occurring
132. Column Configuration e Set Automatic Display Options e Select Hardware View Options Note The Select Hardware View procedure displays the System Status Options Window System Status Options Window The System Status Options window is displayed from the System Status window Verify you are in the System Status window then select Configure gt System Status Options from the menu You can also display the System Status Options window by clicking the System Status icon that displays to the left of the File menu when you open the System Status window pe RS File Edit revision 105 55 4 Set Alarm Monitoring Display Options System Status Options All devices Displays all the devices active offline masked armed disarmed and areas in alarm in the System Status window Specified devices Displays specific types of devices including Active devices Displays only active devices in the System Status window Offline devices Displays only offline devices in the System Status window Masked devices Displays only masked devices in the System Status window Armed areas Displays only armed areas in the System Status window An area is a separately configured section of an Intrusion Detection Panel sometimes referred to as a partition To arm an area means to turn on the protection for an area Disarmed areas Displays only disarmed areas in the System Status window Areas in alarm Displays only ar
133. E Precision Access EI Biometrics E Visits el Assets 2 Directoy Accounts Z Guard Tours ID gt Last name First name Middle name Lake i A Cardholder ID Can perform guard tours a TN rrr Sne db No Last Access Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate 7 8 1996 1 levels assigned Deactivate bam DEJE gt gt gt i 1of1 Cardholders Folder Guard Tours Form assigned Form Element Type Comment Can perform guard checkbox Select this checkbox to if you want the selected cardholder to perform tours guard tours Security Clearance display Lists all security clearance levels that have been configured in the Levels listing system Security clearance levels are a means of limiting the number of window tour guards to choose from when a tour is launched Particular security clearance levels will be assigned only to guards who will need access to areas where a tour will take them When a tour is launched only guards with the appropriate security clearance level for that tour will be listed Guard tours and security clearance levels are configured in the Guard Tour folder For more information refer to the Guard Tour Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Note This field is enabled only if the Can perform guard tours checkbox is selected Number of levels display Displays the number of security clearance levels that have been assigned to the selected c
134. Form Overview eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeesaeeeaes 229 Select Visitor Wizard Add Form AAA 231 Select Visitor Wizard Add Form Overview 00 eceeceereeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaeeenaeeeneesnaeeeeeneas 231 Select Visitor Wizard Select FOr E 233 Select Visitor Wizard Select Form OVErview 0 0 eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeesaeesneesnaeeseeeses 233 Select Import Source Window EE 234 Chapter 15 Reports Folder eeeugeeghtkeeegegee dek denge 235 Report Configuration ROM EE 236 Report View Filter WiIndOW s i ac0 naka sastainicedhadintcanelivass 236 Report Configuration Form Procedures 240 ee RH TEE 240 Modify a Report meets Que eege She aaa Gad 240 RE SE 241 Filter The Report VIW eraot ie ani tien Mi in EE 241 Preview and Printa Report dicieiscccetivecticenes ee eege Zu ERA RE ache ET 241 Reader R ports e EE 242 Reader Reports Form Overview cccccececceceeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeceeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeesaaeeneneeeessaeeesenes 242 Reader Reports Form Procedures vise cctissiicetaintceetsccecitebieleueiactepeeteianetet 246 Runa Reader Report ocni ate Geile Sie ne dae ein 246 revision 105 13 Table of Contents Alarm PanelRenons FOM WEE 248 Alarm Panel Reports Form Overview cccsccececeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeececaeeesaaeeseeeeseiaeeeeeaes 248 Alarm Panel Reports Form Procedures Aen 252 Run an Alarm Panel Report eeccsceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeenennaees 252 Anti Passback Reports FOrm EE 253
135. Grant Deny Pop up Window Your System Administrator can configure any input event for any device to execute an output action that launches a grant deny pop up window associated with a door reader Alarm Monitoring operators with the correct permissions can either grant or deny access through the door reader When a grant is issued the door is pulsed open When a deny is issued no command is sent Note For configuration procedures refer to the Global I O Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Alarm Monitoring stations and operators monitoring the same zone the input device event and output device event are configured for are notified when the input event occurs DR File Edit View Trace Configure Control Options Window Help 4 G 2 2 tes LN 0 Gra 5 Main Alarm Monitor Main Alarm Monitor B System Status Tree all devices Grant Deny Popup BREAKTHROUGH DISABLED Connection errors 0 Offline controllers 6 Offline readers 0 Offline alarm panels 0 2 50PM 4 Ready revision 105 103 9 Control Devices and Areas Field Description Display area Displays any and all active requests The display window contains the following columns e Destination Device The door reader the output action will affect e Initiating Device The device the request is coming from Note Both the initiating device and destination device must be in the same monitor zone e Alarm The input event
136. Groups Displays the various device groups for a particular monitoring zone Bulk operations can be performed on all parts of the device group Types of device groups include but are not limited to Readers Cameras and Input and Output groups Pending Alarms Displays the Pending Alarms window To return to the Main Alarm Monitoring window click the View Alarms toolbar button Video Verification Launches the Video Verification window where you can compare live video to a cardholder s photograph Video Monitoring Launches the Live Video window which is used to run a video tour of the cameras defined in Camera Groups revision 105 35 2 Main Alarm Monitoring Window View menu Continued Menu option Toolbar button Function Map Displays a map containing the device associated with the selected alarm if the Main Alarm Monitoring window is active or the selected device if the System Status window is active e H the selected device is represented on more than one map you will be prompted to select the map of choice e A message displays if the selected device is not represented on any map e To display the View Map menu option right click a device in the System Status window or select an alarm in the Main Alarm Monitoring window Default Map Displays the map that is assigned to that monitoring zone This menu option is dimmed if no map has been assigned to this zone Map Se
137. Import Source window which allows you to select a device to import cardholder data from such as a business card scanner revision 105 225 14 Visits Folder Select Host Wizard Select Form This form is displayed when the Next button on the Select Host Wizard Search form is clicked Select Host Wizard Select xi Select host below Last Name Middle Name al Lisa A Lake ceos ze Select Host Wizard Select Form Overview This form is used to select a cardholder record from those that matched the specified search criteria The columns displayed are configured on the Cardholder Search Results form in the Cardholder Options folder For more information refer to the Segments Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Visits Folder Select Host Wizard Select Form Form Element Type Comment Cardholder listing display A list of cardholder records that match the search criteria specified on window the Select Host Wizard Search form are displayed Note The fields that are displayed in columns are set on the Cardholder Search Results Lists form in the Cardholder Options folder Back push button Returns to the Select Host Wizard Search form Finish push button Completes the wizard The selected cardholder s name will be displayed in the Host name field Cancel push button Closes the window without selecting a cardholder and returns you to the Visit fo
138. La Segment only if your system is segmented An X through an icon indicates a broken connection meaning that the software cannot communicate to the device For example B Bldg 7 West Door Reader Although surveillance only cameras are not associated with a physical video recorder they are assigned to a virtual surveillance only recorder to maintain consistency in the user interface For example the Alarm Monitoring hardware tree below shows two surveillance only cameras Alarm Monitoring User Guide assigned to a virtually surveillance only recorder which serves only as a placeholder to group cameras a System Status Tree all devices 3 Monitor Zone CB Surveillance Only Camera Sa Surveillance Axis Sa Surveillance Sony Device Status Alarm Monitoring is the only application that displays the status of hardware devices Alarm Monitoring obtains the status of a device from the Communication Server which in turn obtains the device status from hardware controllers Status icons are located to the left of hardware device icon There may be one icon or a combination of icons depending on the hardware status The status is also displayed after the entry in parentheses Note To view a list of current hardware status icons in your database as well as add additional icons open MapDesigner and select Edit gt Icon Library Device Status Icon Best controllers and readers Fir
139. Note Select the Badge Info from the View menu The Cardholders folder opens Select the Assets tab Locate the cardholder record for which you want to assign the asset On the Assets form of the Cardholders folder locate the asset record that you want to assign Click Assign Authorized users can manually assign an asset to a cardholder who does not have proper asset group permissions for that asset revision 105 179 12 Cardholders Folder Unassign an Asset 1 2 In the Asset listing window click on the name of an asset to select it Click Unassign Modify the Asset Group 180 revision 105 Note 1 2 3 4 Locate the cardholder record for which you want to modify Click Modify Select an Asset Group from the drop down list Click OK A record can only be modified if an asset group was assigned when the cardholder or visitor was added Alarm Monitoring User Guide Directory Accounts Form E Cardholders Bisi x de Seaments IS Badge Bh Access Levels 8 Precision Access Biometrics k Visits el Assets Directory Accounts KE Gus D Last name First name Middle name Lake Lisa A Cardholder ID Badge type 123456789 Employee z Name Director Certificate p Directory 1 Sen dadu No Last Access Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate Fan Deactivate Fazon Search Link Modify Unlink Print Encode IHl gt j ul 1 of 1 Cardhold
140. PB System Segment Reset Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Global APB System Segment Reset Properties Window Procedures Add a Global APB System Segment Reset Action 1 Display the Global APB System Segment Reset Properties window 2 Select a segment from the Global APB System Segment listing window to select it 3 Click OK If segmentation is enabled this action will reset APB for the selected segment If segmentation is not enabled this action will reset APB for your entire system Note Global APB must be configured on your system in order to add this action ISC Database Download Properties Window Displayed by clicking Add on the Action Group Properties window and selecting ISC Database Download from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide 358 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide You can also select the Action Types ISC Database Download Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard ISC Database Download Properties xi ISC Database Download Description Download Database AAM 20 80 Panel 1 Max number of panels to be downloaded at atime 5 ZS Controller ASAM 20 80 Panel 1 Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contai
141. Report listing window click on an entry to select it 3 Do one of the following a Select the Use default printer radio button if you want the scheduled report to print from the workstation s default printer b Select the Select printer below radio button and choose a printer from the drop down list if you want the scheduled report to print to a printer other than the workstation s default printer Note Note Alarm Monitoring User Guide If the linkage server is running under a local system account it may not have permission to access a network printer depending on its configuration If this is the case you must select a local or default network printer Contact your System Administrator to determine what account the linkage server is running under and the printers it can access If you selected the Select printer below radio button select the If fails use default printer checkbox if you want to print from the default printer if the selected printer fails Due to a limitation of Crystal Reports this setting is not enforced if the printer exists but is not accessible under the linkage server account If the Crystal Report engine fails to access the printer it automatically prints to the default printer regardless of whether the If fails use default printer checkbox is selected or not Refer to the report print action request flowchart below for different scenarios In the Number of pages field enter the number of page
142. Reports of this type appear on the Reader Reports form for filtering Receiver checkbox If this checkbox is selected the names of Receiver reports will be displayed in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Receiver Account Zone Reports form for filtering Receiver account Zone checkbox If this checkbox is selected the names of Account Zone reports will be displayed in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Receiver Account Zone Reports form for filtering Receiver Events checkbox If this checkbox is selected the names of Receiver Events reports will be displayed in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Receiver Account Zone Reports form for filtering User Transactions checkbox If this checkbox is selected User Transactions reports will be included in the listing window Restored events transactions are those restored using the Restore Archive button on the Restoring form of the Archives folder Video Events checkbox If this checkbox is selected Video events reports will be included in the listing window Visitor checkbox If this checkbox is selected Visitor reports will be included in the listing window OK push button Click this button to save your changes and return to the Report Configuration form Cancel push button Click this button to return to the Report Configuration form without saving your
143. Reset Use Limit Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Reset Use Limit Properties Window Procedures Add a Reset Use Limit Action 1 Display the Reset Use Limit Properties window 394 revision 105 2 Select one or more controller from the listing window 3 If you selected one controller from the listing window skip this step If you selected more than one controller from the listing window type a descriptive name to identify the selected group of controllers in the Description field 4 Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Sign Out Visitor Properties Window The Sign Out Visitor action allows you to deactivate the badges of cardholders who have signed out of the system You can further modify this action by choosing which of the cardholder s badges will be signed out just the badge that triggered the action or all badges belonging to that cardholder To display do one of the following e Clicking Add on the Output Action tab in the Global I O form e An Action of this type can only be utilized from the Global I O In order to execute the action Global I O should have a linkage configured on a device event and badge ID that is passed to the action at runtime Sign Out Visitor Properties revision 105 395 A Actions Sign Out Visitor Properties Properties Window Field Table Form E
144. Select Guard Tour window by completing one of the following e From the Control menu select Guard Tour gt Launch e Click the down arrow on the Guard Tour toolbar button and select Launch Tour 3 The View Guard Tour window opens Select the tour and click OK revision 105 315 19 Guard Tour Checkpoint Status and Events Diagram Guard Tour initiated Checkpoint Guard Tour completed not reached Guard Tour cancelled Guard Tour terminated successor hit first Checkpoint hit before minimum time Checkpoint Checkpoint hit before Reached predecessor Early Checkpoint Missed Checkpoint maximum time expired Checkpoint hit between minimum time and maximum time Guard Tour completed Guard Tour cancelled Guard Tour terminated successor hit first Checkpoint Reached out of Sequence Checkpoint Reached on Time Checkpoint Overdue Checkpoint hit Checkpoint Reached Late 316 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder The Scheduler folder contains the Scheduler form with which you can schedule actions Note Additional documentation on actions is available in the Actions appendix For more information refer to Appendix A Actions on page 333 Toolbar Shortcut This folder is displayed by selecting Scheduler from the View menu Scheduler revision 105 317 20 Scheduler Folder Scheduler Form Sched
145. Single tour radio button Select this radio button if you want to configure an automatic guard tour for a single tour When selected only single tours will be listed in the Tour Tour Group listing window Randomly select tour from group radio button Select this radio button if you want to configure an automatic guard tour that will be randomly selected from a tour group When selected only tours groups that are configured as random tour lists will be listed in the Tour Tour Group listing window Tour groups are configured on the Tour Groups form of the Guard Tour folder A tour group is considered a random tour list when the Random Tour List checkbox is selected on the Tour Groups form Monitoring Station listing window display Displays a list of the monitoring stations which are assigned to the selected tour These monitoring stations will be notified when the automatic guard tour is scheduled to begin Add push button Click this button to display the Select Monitoring Station window and add a monitoring station to the Monitoring Station listing window Remove push button Click this button to remove the selected monitoring station from the Monitoring Station listing window OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window without adding the action
146. Test Uninstall Fire Generated when the reported device was part of a walk test and has been physically disconnected from the system Walk Test Unprogrammed Walk Test Unprogrammed Fire Generated when the reported device was part of a walk test and has been removed from the system it is not longer configured in the system Walk Test Untest Walk Test Untest Fire Generated when the reported device is no longer being tested part of a walk test 414 revision 105 Appendix C Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Reports are installed when Database Setup is run All reports are installed on the database server under the ReportTemplates subdirectory in the B A S LS installation path By default this location is C Program Files B A S LS ReportTemplates For more information refer to The Database Setup Program appendix in the Installation amp Setup User Guide Note Refer to the release notes for the versions of Seagate Crystal Reports that are supported The release notes are located on the root of the B A S LS CD ina file named B A S LS ET release notes rtf Report name Description Access Denials and Grants by Reader Access Denied and Granted Events grouped by Reader Access Denials Grants and Other Badge Events All badge related events including time reader badge and cardholder name Access Denied Events All Access Denied events including time
147. User Guide Modify a Badge Record Note Locate the badge record you want to change Click Modify Make the changes you want to the record If the PIN type is modified on the Access Panel and or the General Cardholder Options form you must log off log on before you modify a cardholder s pin number Click OK to save the changes or the Cancel button to revert to the previously saved values revision 105 159 12 Cardholders Folder Modify Badges for a Selected Group of Cardholders 1 Locate the group of cardholders whose records you want to modify 2 Select Bulk gt Modify Badges from the Cardholder menu The Bulk Modify Badges window opens Bulk Modify Badges r Fields to Update T Update activate date T Update badge status bau z J Update deactivate date T Update use limit rz 2 20 2003 E II 200 AM r Badge Filter Only update badges with a status of Only update badges with a type of Active X z C Update badges of all statuses e Update badges of all types Cancel 3 Ifyou want to update fields chose which fields you want to update You can e Select the Update Activate Date checkbox and enter a new activate date and or time to be assigned to the selected group of badges e Select the Update Deactivate Date checkbox and enter a new deactivate date and or time to be assigned to the selected group of badges e Select the Update Badge Status c
148. a key connected to an alarm panel input To use guard tour the Linkage Server must be properly configured For more information refer to the System Options Folder chapter in the System Administration or ID CredentialCenter User Guide Control menu Current Device sub menu Sub menu Toolbar Function option button Note The Current Device sub menu options that are available depend on the type of device listed as the Current Device in the Control menu The type of device listed as the Current Device in the Control menu depends on the device highlighted in the System Status window Current Status Displays current status of device Acknowledge Acknowledges the selected alarm Trace Traces the selected device Update Polls currently selected access panel controller and updates the hardware status Hardware If a downstream device like a reader is selected the update hardware status is Status done for the controller associated with that device Properties Displays access panel controller properties Open Door s Pulses open any door associated with selected access panel controller or reader To activate the Open Door s toolbar button you must select an access panel controller or reader otherwise the option is grayed out Set Controller Clock Sets selected access panel controller clock to current time If a device other than an access panel controller is sele
149. a single reader interface Download Downloads the database to the access panel controller Database Reset Use Limit Resets the number of times a badge can be used on a particular access panel controller Connect Connects the access panel controller via a dialup modem connection Disconnect Disconnects the access panel controller via a dialup modem connection Execute Executes a custom function associated with the Radionics Intrusion Controller Custom This menu option is only available with Radionics Intrusion Controllers Function Options menu Menu option Function Mute Sound Disables the audio portion of the system when selected checked Font Selects the font used in Alarm Monitoring Save Alarms on Exit Saves all currently displayed alarms at the end of a session when selected checked Save Settings on Exit Saves screen characteristics at the end of a session when selected checked Save Settings Now Saves screen characteristics immediately Ascending Time Date Lists alarms in ascending order of time and date i e oldest first when selected checked Descending Time Date Lists alarms in descending order of time and date i e newest first when selected checked Display Seconds Includes seconds in the displayed alarm times when selected checked Auto Cardholder Displays the cardholder associated with an incoming alarm whenever the alarm deals with a Display for
150. abase Error Event System Generated by the communication server Polling Stopped Polling Stopped when there is a problem writing events to the database This event is not written to the database but is sent to Alarm Monitoring clients Polling of the events from the various hardware devices is stopped until the events can be written to the database Database Error in Panel Database Error in Panel System Generated by the communication server Download Download when the database cannot be opened at the start of a database download to a controller Debit ATM Check Debit ATM Check POS Transaction that indicated that a debit Card Tender Card Tender ATM or check card was used as tender Denied Low Battery Denied Low Battery Access Generated when access is denied because Denied the battery on the device is low Denied No Command Denied No Command Access Generated when a reader command function Authority Authority Denied was denied because the user did not have the command authority to execute the function Denied No Host Denied No Host Access Generated when access was denied because Approval Approval Denied the host did not grant approval This can happen because the host response did not come back in a timely fashion or the controller is offline with the host Denied PIN Only Denied PIN Only Access Generated when access was denied for a pin Request Request Denied only request either an invalid pin code or pin support is not enab
151. abase which do not have an active badge assigned to them Active Badge Personnel List of all personnel in the database with organization details This report is designed for Organization Details the standard cardholder layout It may not work with user customized cardholder layouts Personnel Personal Details List of all personnel in the database with personal details This report is designed for the standard cardholder layout It may not work with user customized cardholder layouts Point of Sale Registers Lists all point of sale registers by point of sale device Precision Access Groups Precision Access Group definitions Reader Assignments to Cardholders Lists all cardholders that have access to a particular reader Reader Status Events All reader status events grouped by reader Reader Timezone Schedules Reader timezone scheduling for reader modes Readers Reader definitions grouped by Access Panel Receiver Account Areas Lists all receiver account areas grouped by receiver account Receiver Account Groups Lists all receiver account groups and the receiver accounts contained in each group Receiver Account Zones Lists all receiver account zones grouped by receiver account Receiver Accounts Lists all receiver accounts Receiver Accounts that Failed to Report Lists all of the receiver accounts that failed to report during their duration
152. age percentage 402 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Alarm Event Event Type Description Door Contact Tamper Door Contact Tamper System Generated when the door contact tamper has Active gone active Door Contact Tamper Door Contact Tamper System Generated when the door contact tamper has Restored Cancelled been restored Door Forced Open Door Forced Open System Generated when a Door Forced Open condition has been detected Door Forced Open Door Forced Open System Generated when the Door Forced Open Masked Masked event has become masked for the device Door Forced Open Door Forced Open System Generated when a Door Forced Open Restored Cancelled condition has been restored Door Forced Open Door Forced Open System Generated when the Door Forced Open Unmasked Unmasked event has become unmasked for the device Door Held Open Door Held Open System Generated when a Door Held Open condition has been detected Door Held Open Door Held Open System Generated when the Door Held Open Masked Masked event has become masked for the device Door Held Open Door Held Open System Generated when a Door Held Open Restored Cancelled condition was restored Door Held Open Door Held Open System Generated when the Door Held Open Unmasked Unmasked event has become unmasked for the device Door Shunt Command Door S
153. alarm mask group action 368 mask unmask door action 0 0 0 0 eee eee 370 mask unmask door forced open action 372 mask unmask door forced open for reader group ACTION 2 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeee 374 mask unmask door held open action 376 mask unmask door held open for reader group ACTION eet ENEE EENS 378 Alarm Monitoring User Guide pulse open door action eee 380 pulse open door group ac on 382 reader mode ac on 384 reader mode group action 0 0 eee 387 Teade TS de elerasievrepiedigeodtestedsecgupttadeteechessepsees 100 TOPOL EE 240 report print action oe eect eeeeeeee 390 reset use limit action eects 394 sign out visitor ACTION 0 ee eee eects 396 Visit record ict ee Ae Be 203 WISILOL EC ergeet sonne a 148 Add Action Wizard ec eeeceeeeeeseeseeereeseeeaes 333 Add Recipient Window cee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 220 held tables s 35 c aah eee 220 Alarm descriptions 000 eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeaees 397 e 113 OVELVIEW EAR 46 Pending aarme 114 Alarm Acknowledgment window ss eeseseeee 118 PUNCHONS esris een topas aa 117 Alarm mask oeroupg ceceseeesse cesses ceseeeeeeees 51 Alarm Monitoring Overview seseseseseeseeseeseee 21 Alarm Panel Reports form 248 field TADS esse ien peespngi peng oa 249 OVEIVIEW E a a N E ASE 248 procedures saser e eieren aS Taa 252 Anti Passback Reports form seseseseeeseeeee 253 field tables innan 254 OVEIVIEW EE ea Ee 253 proced
154. alarm originates at a reader the reader name displays If the alarm originates at an alarm panel the panel name displays Input Output Lists alarms alphabetically by name of the alarm input if the alarm is generated at an alarm input Intercom Station Called Lists alarms in order of intercom station called revision 105 115 10 Monitor Alarms Column name Description Intrusion Area Indicates the name of the area associated with the alarm This is only displayed when the controller reported an area number along with the alarm Line Number Displays alarms in order of line number Priority Lists highest priority alarms at the top of the list followed by medium priority alarms with low priority alarms placed at the bottom of the list Time Date Lists alarms in chronological order Within a given date month day and year the alarms are sorted by time which include hours and minutes and optionally seconds e To view time in seconds go to the Options menu and select place a checkmark beside Display Seconds e To view the most recent alarms at the bottom of the list go to the Options menu and select place a checkmark beside Ascending Time Date To view the most recent alarms at the top of the list select place a checkmark beside Descending Time Date Transmitter Lists alarms in order of transmitter Transmitters are devices that generate either an RF or IR or both
155. ample if the relay is on activated toggling deactivates it If the relay is off deactivated toggling activates it Note Only offboard relays on the Radionics 7412 and 9412 intrusion panels support the toggle option e Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Device Output Group Properties Window To display do one of the following Note Select the Action Types Device Output Group Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Device Output Group from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Device Output Group Properties Eg Device Output Group Output Device Group 7 4Output Group 1 Activate Deactivate Pulse Cancel Help If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 353 A Actions Device Output Group Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Output Device display Displays a list of available output device groups which have been Group listing configured in the system window Activate radio button When configuring an output device group as an action select this radio button if you want th
156. amps were used as tender Gasoline Prepayment Gasoline Prepayment POS Transaction for a gasoline prepayment Gasoline Prepayment Gasoline Prepayment POS Transaction for a gasoline prepayment Refund Refund Global Linkage Action Global Linkage Action System Generated when a global I O linkage has Executed Executed executed Global Linkage Action Global Linkage Action System Generated when a global I O linkage has Failed Failed failed Granted Access Access Granted Access Generated when access was granted Granted Granted APB Violation Access Granted Anti Area APB Generated when an anti passback violation Entry Made Passback Used occurred but access was granted and entry was made This can happen when using soft anti passback Granted APB Violation Access Granted Anti Area APB Generated when an anti passback violation No Entry Made Passback Not Used occurred and access was granted but no entry was made This can happen when using soft anti passback 404 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Alarm Event Event Type Description Granted Facility Code Access Granted On Access Generated when access was granted based Facility Code Granted on a valid facility code Granted Facility Code Access Granted On Access Generated when access was granted on No Entry Facility Code No Entry Granted facility code but no entry was made at
157. anel Options Panel Options System Generated when the options inside of the Mismatch Mismatch panel differ from what the panel is currently configured for in the database This can happen if the panel options change and a download is not issued to the panel To correct this situation a download should be issued to the panel Panel Power Up Panel Power Up System Generated when the panel power up is Complete Complete complete 408 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Alarm Event Event Type Description Panic Abort Panic Abort Trouble Generated when a panic alarm has been manually aborted canceled Panic Alarm Panic Alarm Trouble Generated when emergency assistance has been manually requested Panic Alarm Restore Panic Alarm Restore Trouble Generated when the panic alarm has been restored Pay Out Pay Out POS Generated when a payout takes place Payment of Refund to Payment of Refund to POS Generated when a payment or refund is Customer Customer given to a customer Payment Toward Payment Toward POS Generated when a payment toward an Charge Account Charge Account account balance Balance Balance Pick Up Pick Up POS Transaction indicating a pick up has occurred Power Failure Active Power Failure System Generated when a power failure condition has been detected Power Failure Restored Cancelled Power System Generated when the power
158. ar click on the first day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date revision 105 275 15 Reports Folder Reports Folder Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Start section e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the Start time checkbox and choosing a specific start time oe ES M 208 02AM Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons End section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the End date checkbox and choose a specific end date from the drop down calendar a April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 20 3 1 2 3 4 a7 8 9 10 1 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 29 30 1 2 4 5 6 H 8 9 lt Today 3 6 2003 e Select the last month for which data is to be included in this report Use the Ej and wi navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the displayed year to access the spin buttons 2003 276 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring
159. ar spin buttons ES e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the day that you want the selected badge to activate on 154 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Cardholders Folder Badge Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Deactivate numeric drop down calendar Displayed in add or modify mode Indicates the date when the selected badge becomes invalid A default date is assigned based on the Badge type but you can change this value by typing a numeric date into the field or by selecting a date from the drop down calendar April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 031 2 3 m7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 1 es To select a month click on the and navigation buttons e You can also select a month by clicking on the displayed month to access a drop down list of months Highlight the month you want to select it e Navigate to a year by clicking on the displayed year to Gd access the year spin buttons ES sl e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the day that you want the selected badge to deactivate on Status drop down list Displayed in add or modify mode Indicates the badge status for the selected badge Status drop down list choices are defined on the Simple Lists form of the List Builder folder PIN numeric Displayed in add or modify mode Indicates the personal identification number for the sele
160. ardholder For example 6 levels assigned revision 105 183 12 Cardholders Folder Guard Tours Form Procedures Car 184 revision 105 er Guard Tour Security Clearance Levels to a older Note l 2 3 Select the Badge Info from the View menu The Cardholders folder opens Select the Guard Tours tab Locate the cardholder record for which you want to assign security clearance levels Click Modify Select the Can perform guard tours checkbox In the Security Clearance Levels listing window click on an entry to select it Click OK You can assign multiple security clearance levels to a cardholder Reports Form E Cardholders Alarm Monitoring User Guide olx H Access Levels Precision Access Biometrics Visits el Assets 3 Directory Accounts 4 Guard Tours Reports gt Last name Lake Cardholder ID 123456789 Employee First name Lisa Badge type Middle name A IV Limit report to current search Description Contains cardholder photos sorted by name Cardholders Folder Reports Form Cardholder Cardholder Reader Access Granted Denied Cardholder Cardholder Cardholder Cardholder Anti Passback Cardholder Date Time S gt dan dadu No Last Access Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate 778 1996 7 8 2001 Deactivate I 44 4 gt gt gt i 1of1 Form Element Type Comment
161. as been restored All Systems Normal All Systems Normal Fire Generated when the Notifier AM 2020 panel is booted up This alarm may also be sent when all existing alarm conditions are resolved Anti Passback Anti Passback Violation Area APB Generated when the cardholder was denied Violation access because the entry would have violated the anti passback rules for the area revision 105 397 B Alarm Event Descriptions Alarm Event Event Type Description Archive Server Failure Archive Server Failure Video Generic error indicating a failure on the archive server This error indicates that the archive server could not move any more data from the video recorders to the archive server The user will have to go to the physical archive server computer and review the windows event logs remote storage application and logs B A S LS log files in the B A S I S logs directory and also follow general trouble shooting techniques as outlined in the archive server manual to determine the specific cause of the alarm Area Closed Area Closed Area APB Generated when access was denied because the area being entered is closed Area Limit Exceeded Area Limit Exceeded Area APB Generated when access was denied because the area limit would have been exceeded Asset Denied Asset Asset Denied Asset Asset Generated when the asset was denied and Disable Command Sent Disable Comma
162. ass this hold down SHIFT To automatically be logged in do nothing 4 Your system may be configured to prompt you to confirm that you are authorized to use the application To accept the terms of the authorization warning click Yes 5 If you are prompted to select a monitor zone a Select a monitor zone from the drop down list If segmentation is enabled only the monitor zones for the segment that you logged into are available b Select the Save as monitoring station assignment checkbox if you wish to make the monitor zone selection the default assignment for the monitoring station This means when any operator logs into Alarm Monitoring at this workstation this zone will be monitored unless the operator has monitoring zones assigned to them as a user or the operator has permission to view multiple zones This checkbox is only enabled if the user has proper permissions c Select the Save as user assignment checkbox if you if you wish to log into the same monitor zone EVERY time you log in This is a permanent assignment You will not be prompted to select a monitor zone during future log ins This is checkbox is only enabled if the user has permission d Click OK For more information please refer to the Monitor Zones Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide 6 If you are prompted that the monitoring station you are logging into is set up for event queuing a Select No if you want all the queued ev
163. asset Record Last Changed display Indicates the date of when the selected asset record was last changed Photo display Displays a photo capture of the asset if one was added in the Multimedia Capture module Last Access display Displays the date and time of the asset s last access Assign Asset Assign To push button When adding or modifying an asset select the Assign Asset button to launch the Cardholders folder On the Cardholder form you can search for or add a cardholder to assign to the asset being configured Once you have located the cardholder on the Cardholder form their name will appear on the Assign To push button Click on this button to assign the asset to the cardholder If the Cardholders folder is already open and a cardholder record is displayed then the Assign To button will automatically display the name of that cardholder record Search push button Click on this button to search for an asset based on a value entered in one or more of the fields Last Search push button Click on this button the display the findings of the previous search push button Moves to the first matching record push button Moves 10 matching records back push button Moves to the previous matching record Eze RR RS push button Moves to the next matching record push button Moves 10 matching records forward push button Moves to
164. assets to cardholders e Track assets that are assigned to cardholders e Preview and print asset reports The Assets folder contains four forms the Assets form the Asset Classes form the Assignments form and the Reports form Toolbar Shortcut This folder is displayed by selecting the Asset Info from the View menu Assets revision 105 279 16 Assets Folder Assets Form Scan ID Name olx Asset Classes al Assignments Reports Type Serial number 123456789 Last inspection 1 1 2000 Acquired 12 31 1999 Assessed value 3500 3000 Record last changed 12714 2001 5 28 59 PM Department 123456 N A v Subtype Laptop N A m lt Next inspection 121 2002 E Asset Can Be Disabled Replace 12 31 2004 No Last Access Assign Asset Replacement value Search Add Modify Delete Eint Assets Folder Assets Form Form Element Type Comment Scan ID numeric Enter the Scan ID of the asset Name text Enter a descriptive name for the asset This is a friendly name assigned to each asset to make it easy to identify Each name must be unique and contain no more than 32 characters Type drop down list Select the type of asset being configured Available choices depend on what asset types were added in the Asset Types and Subtypes Management window The window is displayed by selecting Asset Types and Subtypes from the Asset menu Subtype drop down
165. ayed several ways e Double click an alarm e Highlight an alarm entry and from the Edit menu select Acknowledge e Right click an alarm entry and select Acknowledge revision 105 117 11 Acknowledge Alarms Alarm Acknowledgment Contacted manager Invalid card format due to entry error Corrected card format in database TS 06 24 2002 Alarm Acknowledgment Window Description Contains the same name for the alarm as indicated in the Main Alarm Monitoring window Controller Displays the name of the access panel associated with the alarm Input output If the alarm originated at an input output device displays the name of the device Time date Displays the time and date the alarm occurred Device e Ifthe alarm originated at a reader displays the name of the reader e Ifthe alarm originated at an alarm panel displays the name of the alarm panel Card If the alarm is card related displays the cardholder name if known and the badge ID Cardholder name would not be available for an Invalid Badge alarm for example Original notes Displays any notes carried forward from the associated original alarm Notes Enables you to add your own comments response to the selected alarm Select Displays a window where pre configured acknowledgment notes can be selected Instructions Displays pre configured instructions pertaining to the alarm 118 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring U
166. ayer and Video Search window 1 Follow the procedures to aLaunch Video Live Recorded From a Camera on on page 88 Verify the recorded video is playing in the Video Player 2 From the Options menu select Set Start End Date 3 The Date Time window displays Enter the desired date and time ranges you wish to search and click OK For more information please refer to Set Start and End Dates on page 91 4 Notice the Video Player immediately plays the recorded video starting with the start date and time specified To search video within the date range that has a specified level of motion complete the remaining steps 5 From the Control menu select Video Search or click the Video Search toolbar button The Video Search window displays 6 From the View menu select the desired view images or details The active view contains a checkmark beside it 7 From the Options menu select Event Settings Make the desired setting changes and click OK For more information please refer to Event Settings Window on page 87 8 If you receive a warning that you must restart the search for the new settings to take affect click OK 9 From the Search menu select Start or click the Start toolbar button revision 105 95 7 Video Monitoring Search Specific Portions of a Camera View The Video Search window has toolbar buttons that enable you to search for motion within a selected portion of a camera view Toolbar Shortcut 1 Display
167. be in the user name or name If you leave this field empty all accounts for the selected directory will be displayed when the search is executed To help you search the Value field will contain different ways that the selected account may be expressed For example if the user account Lisa Lake is selected the permutations listed might be L Lake LISA Lisa Lisa L Lisa Lake LL Lake and Lake Lisa e Click Search f The accounts associated with the selected Directory will be displayed in the Accounts listing window e Ifthe account you wish to link to is displayed select it Your window should look similar to the following Directory NT 4 Directory 1 Field Condition Value User name z contains zl Guest E Search Accounts S E Gues e Ifthe account you wish to link to is not displayed return to step d and select another Value to search for g Click OK h Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each directory account you wish to link to the selected user account Click the OK button on the Directory Accounts form Unlink a Directory Account 182 revision 105 1 Locate the record of the cardholder you want to unlink a directory account from Click on an entry in the Directory accounts listing window to select it Click Unlink Click OK Guard Tours Form Alarm Monitoring User Guide E Cardholders BEE EI Badge ls Access Levels
168. be sure to verify a valid transport key is listed in the Registry Editor To do this click Start gt Run enter regedit and click OK Navigate to My Computer HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Biocentric Solutions Enrollment Settings Right click SCTransportkey and select modify Update the transport key setting to match the transport key programmed into the smart card Delete a Badge Record 1 Locate the badge record you want to delete 2 Click Delete 3 Click OK 162 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Access Levels Form View Mode E Cardholders First name Middle name lisa A Cardholder ID Badge type 123456789 Employee z Show levels for badge ID issue code E 10 v I Show inactive badges SF Demo Case 10 15 2001 10 16 2002 IT Show unassigned levels 1 levels assigned Search Add Modify Delete Print Encode Access Levels Form Modify Mode E Cardholders Modifying Access Levels Sen datu No Last Access Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate Fan Fame 14 44 4 gt gt gt i J 1 of 1 Deactivate MEE SE Cardholder GB Segments ES Badge Me Access Levels 6 Precision Access Biometrics E Visits wil Assets 7 Directory A 4 gt Last name First name Middle name Lake Lisa E Cardholder ID Badge type 123456789 Employee Activate Dates Access Groups F Access Group 2 WF Demo Case 10 15 2001 10 16 20
169. ber displays as the last two digits Reader Biometric Verify Mode enables disables verify mode for access control readers with an associated biometric reader When verify mode is enabled the normal card and or pin access is and a biometric match is required When verify mode is disabled only the card and or pin access is required Reader First Card Unlock Mode enables disables the Reader First Card Unlock Mode The Reader First Card Unlock Mode is a qualifier for online Reader Mode When enabled the online Reader Mode is in effect until the first qualified access granted with entry occurs When the first access granted with entry occurs the online Reader Mode changes to unlocked revision 105 107 9 Control Devices and Areas Note Reader First Card Unlock Mode is only supported on the BAS 2000 controller However first style unlock behavior can be configured for use with any access controller through Best s Global I O Support Alarm Mask Group Right click Options e Group Mask masks inputs or alarms for the currently selected reader e Group Unmask unmasks inputs or alarms for the currently selected reader Function List Right click Options Function Lists are keypad activated commands that are programmed into an access panel Function lists can be accessed by assigning them to specific keypad sequences e Clear All Terms only applicable to Apollo function lists Used to clear all terms and set all the resulti
170. ble Reports Folder Date Time Reports Form Form Element Type Comment Listing window display Lists currently defined date time reports and each report s type Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type Today push button Click this button to e Set the Start time date to 12 00 00 AM on the current date e Set the End time date to 11 59 59 PM on the current date Start section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the Start date checkbox and choose a specific start date from the drop down calendar April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 30 31 1 2 3 8 9 10 15 16 17 22 23 24 29 30 1 lt Today 37672003 e Select the first month for which data is to be included in this report Use the DW and _ navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the year and use the spin buttons 20035 e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the first day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the Start time checkbox and choosing a specific start time bh 2 08 02 AM i Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by cl
171. can perform a text search of the report When you enter text in the Find what field in the Search window and click Find Next the view jumps to the first occurrence of the requested text or a message is displayed if no match was found Report Print Preview Window Procedures Preview and Print a Report Toolbar Shortcut Print Preview 306 revision 105 1 Note Select a report from within the Reports folder Reports are also available on the Reports form in the Cardholders folder Visits folder and Assets folder However the Print Preview toolbar button and the Preview button on the form are disabled or grayed out Instead the Print toolbar button or the Print button on the form are used to preview and print reports from these forms For more information refer to Print a Report on page 299 Select additional criteria if you want the report to include only a specific range of data Click one of the following e The Print Preview button on the Main toolbar e The Print button select the Print to a Preview Window radio button and then click OK e The Preview button on the form If the chosen report has been password protected type the correct password when prompted to do so then click OK The Report Print Preview window is displayed e On the left the report navigation tree may have branching entries Ifthe tree has branching entries expand that branch of the tree Click a
172. ccount SMTP address Ke e Ifyou select the Cardholder radio button and click OK the Select Host Wizard Search form displays For a detailed description of the Select Host Wizard Search form refer to Select Host Wizard Search Form on page 224 e Ifyou select the Visitor radio button and click OK the Select Visitor Wizard Search form displays For a detailed description of the Select Visitor Wizard Search form refer to Select Visitor Wizard Search Form on page 227 e Ifyou select the Directory account radio button and click OK the Select Account window displays e Ifyou select the SMTP address radio button type the SMTP address then click OK An example of an SMTP address is Joesmith company com Click the OK If the Sign in now checkbox was selected proceed to step 7 If the Sign in now checkbox was not selected the visit will be added The value for the Time In column for the visit will remain blank and the visit can be signed in later when it actually occurs If none of the Allow disposable badge printing Allow access control badge assignment and Allow e mail notification checkboxes are checked Note Alarm Monitoring User Guide on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder the visit will be signed in If any of those options are selected the Sign In Visit s window displays k Print disposable badge s of this type BA Disposable Visitor ad general hpli5000 I Se
173. ced open alarms are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting 4 Click OK 372 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties Window To display do one of the following Note Select the Action Types Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties xi Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Reader Group Device Group 1 FAS Reader Group Mask Unmask Cancel Help If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 373 A Actions Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Field Table Form Element Type Comment Reader Group display Displays a list of available reader groups which have been configured in listing window the system Mask radio button When configuring a mask unmask door forced open for reader
174. ck Finish The visitor s name appears in the Visitor name field on the Visit form If the Visitor is not listed below select the Create new visitor radio button and click Next The Select Visitor Wizard Add form displays Enter the new visitor s information and click Finish For a detailed description of the Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add form refer to Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add Form on page 229 d In the Scheduled time in fields specify the date and time the visit will begin You can either type the values or select them If the Sign In Now checkbox is selected these fields will be grayed out e Inthe Scheduled time out fields specify the date and time the visit will end You can either type the values or select them f Select the Sign In Now checkbox if the visit is starting immediately If you select this option the Scheduled time in fields will become grayed out and the date and time when you click the OK button will be assigned as the visit s Time in Click the Details tab For a detailed description of the Details form refer to Details Form on page 217 On the Details form a Inthe Type drop down list select the type of visit Types of visits must first be configured in the List Builder which is displayed in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter by selecting the Administration menu then selecting List Builder b In the Purpose field type the reason for the visitor s visit Yo
175. ck on an entry to select it 3 Do one of the following Select the Mask radio button if you want the alarm inputs in the group to be masked When alarm inputs are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Select the Unmask radio button if you want the alarm inputs in the group to be unmasked When alarm inputs are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting 4 Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties Window To display do one of the following e Select the Action Types Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard e Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties xi Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Fix larm Mask Group Panel 1 REI Alarm Mask Group 2 Panel 1 Mask C Unmask Cancel Help Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 367 A Actions Mask Unmask Alar
176. click a device but you also expand or collapse the hardware list revision 105 111 9 Control Devices and Areas 112 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 10 Monitor Alarms When an alarm occurs it displays in the Main Alarm Monitoring window Each alarm displays in its own row and is preceded by a colored dot If alarms are configured in the System Administration software so that they do not automatically delete after they are acknowledged an alarm icon will also display beside the colored dot after it is acknowledged Alarm Icons The following table is a list of the different types of alarm icons Icon Description Alarm acknowledged without notes Alarm acknowledged with notes An outstanding acknowledgment action is associated with the alarm An acknowledgment action is an action that will automatically be carried out when the alarm is acknowledged A camera is associated with the device that the alarm occurred on for Therefor you can pull up live video via the Launch Video right click menu option Alarm acknowledged without notes and a camera is associated with the device Alarm acknowledged with notes and a camera is associated with the device An outstanding acknowledgment action is associated with the alarm and a camera is associated with the device The digital video associated with the alarm has been marked Alarm acknowledged without notes and has arc
177. controller This information is displayed in the System Status window and is mainly used for diagnostic purposes By default this option is unchecked e If selected checked the controller capacity information displays e If not selected unchecked the controller capacity information is NOT displayed Display Device Firmware Versions Displays firmware version major and minor for downstream devices The minor firmware version number displays as the last two digits The firmware version of controllers and gateways display regardless of this option 845 1200 Firmware Revision 1 04 Note The firmware version is that of the interface board e If selected checked the current firmware version displays for devices including single interface readers dual interface Rdr1 readers BAS 1100 and BAS 1200 alarm panels cameras and RS 485 command keypads e Ir not selected unchecked the firmware version displays as part of the status when the mouse pointer is over the device icon However the firmware version of controllers and gateways always displays regardless of this option Refresh Alarm Configuration Causes alarm configuration information to be refreshed 42 revision 105 Window menu Alarm Monitoring User Guide Menu option Function Cascade Places all open windows in an overlapping arrangement with the active window displayed on top Tile Horizontally Places all open wi
178. corded e g continuous recording or time lapse recording Start time Video start time Use this feature to adjust your video search Speed bar Determines how fast the video is played as well as searched Using the cursor click near the minus symbol to slow the video down or click the plus symbol to speed the video up You can also adjust the speed by clicking and dragging the speed bar arm End time Video end time Use this feature to adjust your video search 82 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Video Player Status Bar Table Continued Symbol Field Description F Volume Sets the volume level for the camera with audio recording enabled Only one cam era video recorder can be enabled to record audio at one time This applies to LDVR SP LDVR SP4 LDVR SP30 and LDVR SP430 video recorders For more information please refer to the Digital Video Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide revision 105 83 7 Video Monitoring Video Search Window The video search feature looks for video on a recorder and the archive server that meets two criteria a level of motion greater than or equal to a specified level and video that occurred within the time and date range specified The video search process occurs on the client side where the PC is running the Video Player Search results are displayed as a detailed list or thumbnail images Video f
179. creen help for this form Use restored records checkbox If this checkbox is selected data for an event or user transaction report is obtained from restored events transactions in the database rather than from the current live events transactions Restored events transactions are those restored using the Restore Archive button on the Restoring form of the Archives folder For more information refer to the Archives Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Close push button Closes the Reports folder Date Time Reports Form Procedures Run a Date Time Report 262 revision 105 1 Select Reports from Administration View menu The Reports folder opens 2 Select the Date Time Reports tab 3 In the reports listing window select the icon that corresponds to the report you wish to run 4 Complete the Date Time Filter section to specify a date time interval for gathering data Only data gathered during the specified period will be Alarm Monitoring User Guide included in the report To limit each date in the range to the specified time interval select the Apply start and end time to each day checkbox 5 Enter a Badge ID if you want the report to contain data pertaining only to cardholders having the specified name or badge ID 6 Complete the Text Field Filter section This section is optional and is only enabled for User Transactions reports and Alarm Acknowledgment rep
180. cted this option sets the clock on the access panel controller to which the device is attached 38 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Control menu Current Device sub menu Continued Sub menu option Toolbar button Function Reader Access Modes Updates the reader mode of every reader associated with selected access panel controller or reader Reader Enables disables verify mode for access control readers with an associated Biometric biometric reader Verify Mode e When verify mode is enabled the normal card and or pin access is and a biometric match is required e When verify mode is disabled only the card and or pin access is required Reader First Enables disables the Reader First Card Unlock Mode The Reader First Card Card Unlock Unlock Mode is a qualifier for online Reader Mode When enabled the online Mode Reader Mode is in effect until the first qualified access granted with entry occurs When the first access granted with entry occurs the online Reader Mode changes to unlocked Whenever a Reader enters or leaves First Card Unlock Mode an event transaction is logged in the database and displayed in Alarm Monitoring Note The Reader First Card Unlock Mode can also be enabled disabled via the Reader folder window in System Administration via local timezone control in the BAS 2000 and as part of the Reader Mode or Reader Group Mode action used in t
181. cted badge PIN numbers are used in conjunction with card readers that are operating in Card and Pin or Pin or Card mode The maximum PIN length is determined by the PIN type field in the Access Panels folder For increased security PIN codes are not viewable by any user However if the system is configured to randomly generate a new PIN code when adding a badge the user can see the PIN code when they first add the badge but not later A user can see the PIN code for guest type badges Use limit numeric Displayed in add or modify mode Imposes a restriction on the number of times a cardholder can use his her badge at readers marked with the Enforce Use Limit option APB exempt checkbox Displayed in add or modify mode When this checkbox is selected any anti passback violation for the selected badge will granted access into the anti passback area with no violation noted in the Alarm Monitoring application revision 105 155 12 Cardholders Folder Cardholders Folder Badge Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Destination exempt checkbox Displayed in add or modify mode Select this checkbox if you want the selected badge record to be exempt from destination assurance processing When selected the badge will not be included in the destination assurance processing and no alarms will be generated if the cardholder violates any of the destination assu
182. ctions are those restored using the Restore Archive button on the Restoring form of the Archives folder For more information refer to the Archives Folder in the System Administration User Guide Close push button Closes the Reports folder Reader Reports Form Procedures Run a Reader Report 246 revision 105 d Ju E Select Reports from Administration View menu The Reports folder opens Select the Reader Reports tab From the listing window select the report that you want to run In the Reader Filter section select the icon s corresponding to the reader s whose data you wish to include in the report If you don t select any readers data for all readers will be reported If desired specify a date time interval for gathering data in the Date Time Filter section Only data gathered during the specified period will be included in the report To limit each date in the range to the specified time interval select the Apply start and end time to each day checkbox In the Cardholder Filter section enter the person s Last Name First Name and or Badge ID if you want the report to contain data pertaining Note Alarm Monitoring User Guide only to cardholders having the specified name and or badge ID cardholder name and badge ID is applicable only to reader reports based on events Click either the Print or Preview button depending on which function you wish to perform For more information refer to Chapte
183. d If this is the case the operator will be prompted only once for the password for each type of alarm Delete an Alarm Note 1 In the Main Alarm Monitoring window highlight click the alarm you wish to delete Complete one of the following e Press the lt Delete gt key e From the Edit menu select Delete A confirmation message displays Click Yes You can also right click the alarm and select Delete When the confirmation message displays click Yes revision 105 121 11 Acknowledge Alarms Delete All Alarms Note Depending on how your System Administrator configured alarms some alarms cannot be deleted until they have been acknowledged B A S LS will alert you if this is the case 1 To delete all of the alarm entries from the current alarm view select Delete All from the Edit menu 2 A confirmation message displays Click Yes All entries will be removed from the Main Alarm Monitoring window You can also delete multiple alarms in the Main Alarm Monitoring window using the lt Shift gt or lt Ctrl gt keys and right clicking Select the Delete option A confirmation message displays Click Yes Display a Map 122 revision 105 Note A monitoring map is a graphical representation of a facility or area monitored by the B A S LS system You can manually view maps associated with an alarm or you can set your display options to automatically display maps when an alarm occurs 1
184. d for alternate reader support the primary reader will ask for verification from the alternate reader When configuring a reader mode action for a reader that is not a primary reader to an alternate biometric reader this field is disabled First Card Unlock checkbox Select this checkbox if you want the reader mode action to be that first card unlock mode is enabled Doors configured with first card unlock will not unlock until valid personnel arrives For example rather than setting a lobby door to unlock at 9 00 am you can leave it in a secure mode Oe card only card and pin etc and set the first card unlock to 9 00 am The first person that comes in the door after 9 00 am will have to present their card Once access is granted the reader mode will change to unlocked This feature is useful for days like snow days when employees can t make it to work on time OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Reader Mode Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Reader Mode Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Reader Mode Properties Window Procedures Add a Reader Mode Action 1 Display the Reader Mode Properties window 384 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide From the Reader Controller listing window click on an entry to select it From the R
185. d Cardholder on page 199 e Search for All Visits by a Selected Visitor on page 200 e Search for Scheduled Active or Finished Visits on page 201 e Search for All Visits for a Specific Date or Time on page 202 e Retrieve the Most Recent Visit Search Results on page 203 d Click the Reports tab e Select the Limit report to current search checkbox f Proceed to step 3 To generate a visit report that searches through all visits Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens b Inthe Reports listing window select the type of report you wish to print For more information refer to Appendix C Visit Related Reports on page 243 c Proceed to step 3 Click the Print The Print Report Options window opens Print Report Options xi p Print Destination Print to a Preview Window Export Directly to a File Print Directly to a Printer IZ Frompt for Number of Pages r Report Subtitle You can update the text used for the report subtitle below In the Print Destination section select whether to print to a preview window export directly to a file or print directly to a printer If you selected Print Directly to a Printer in the Print Destination section select a printer in the drop down list and choose whether to Prompt for Number of Pages Alarm Monitoring User Guide In the Report Subtitle section type the report subtitle If the Limit report to current search checkbox is selected
186. d exit out of the Action Group Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Action Group Properties window without saving your changes Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Action Group Properties Window Procedures Add an Action Group 336 revision 105 Display the Action Group Properties window In the Description field enter a description of the action group that is being configured Select the Action Group Library checkbox if you want this action group to be available for selection in the Action Group Library For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Click Add The Select Action Type window opens Select an action type and then click Next Depending on which action type you chose a corresponding action properties window will open Configure the action type you selected in step 5 To do this you must refer to the action properties windows sections in this chapter for information on each action properties window Repeat steps 4 6 for each action type you want to assign to this group Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Properties Window The Action History Guard Tour Event Purging action allows you to create an action that will automatically delete certain records after they are a specified number of days old For example
187. d select an existing window TT Wi dive L or open a new one Note Clicking the System Status button not the triangle brings up a new System Status window if there is none present If a System Status window is already open clicking the System Status button causes the default first window to display 3 e From the View menu select System Status and then the window you want to display e Choose one of the numbered options under the Window menu Though rare if more than nine System Status windows are open the More Windows menu option will be available Choose a window from the list and click OK to bring it to the foreground revision 105 61 5 Monitor Devices a System Hardware Tree all devices Monitor Zone GI FirePanelt DS Fire Device Name Ar AM Guard Tour PSD a Intrusion Panel 1 dp Onboard Relay A ah Onboard Relay B Wi Onboard Relay C E Itercom Device Name Ba Intercom Station Name e K B126 Recorder Firmware Revision 3 6 Rm BAS 1000 Firmware Revision 2 774 EN eas 1100 EI HEN 0 pas 1220 2005 access mode card only cipher mode e ED Bas 1320 2020 access mode pin or card Alarm Mask Groups Function Lists WB RECEIVER 1 cf Receiver Accounts o D Receiver Account Name SB Global Anti Passback Areas and Mustering Update area status to see current status e E Default Segment as Guard Tour Dr Weekend Day Tour Action Group Root E lt Action Group gt E lt Action Group gt E lt Acti
188. dd and Schedule an Action Using the Scheduler Right Click Menu nsss 327 Start an ACON sininen a da a ei in a 327 Stop an e LEE 327 View Action HIStory sencia ali aa gine is ANNE A NNa EANES 327 View the Current Status of an ACTION oo eee cee eee eeee estat eras sense saeeseeeeteeeteaeessaeenaas 328 Refreshian Acton eiiieaen a a a ao iaia a aaria 328 R freshAlACUONS nnise aa a a eaa Ee A NENA A E a N 329 Delete a Scheduled Action using the Scheduler Right Click Menu 329 16 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Modify a Scheduled Action using the Scheduler Right Click Menu n 329 INDDENCICES csse s e e a aai 331 Appendix Ar Aetlong eueegegeeegeeeueEeEERSEEEESENEESNEEEEE EENEG 333 Actions PIO E 333 Use the Add Action Wizard siewi ratore ea e e anaa a aaaea aai aa 333 Action Group Properties Window EEN 335 Action Group Properties Window Procedures cceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeee 336 Add an Action Group nien a ele ea ein ink end 336 Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Properties Window essnneaa 337 Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Properties Window Procedures 338 Add an Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Action ccccceeseeeesteeeeeeeeeeeees 338 Archive Purge Database Properties Window ssssssssssssrnnneeesrrrrrrrnsrrrrrenn 339 Archive Purge Database Properties Window Procedures esesseeesseenen 340 Add an Archive Purge Database Action eececce
189. ders with an associated secondary reader When verify mode is enabled access to both the primary and secondary reader is required When verify mode is disabled only access to the primary reader is required e Activate activates the outputs associated with the selected access panel e Deactivate deactivates the outputs associated with the selected access panel e Pulse pulses all outputs associated with the selected access panel e Mask masks inputs or alarms for the currently selected reader e UnMask unmasks inputs or alarms for the currently selected reader e Download Firmware downloads firmware to the selected controller BAS 1100 or BAS 1200 alarm panel or RS 485 command keypads Contollers and gateways display firmware revision numbers using three decimal places while downstream devices display the firmware revision number using two e Download Database downloads the database to the access panel controller e Reset Use Limit resets the number of times a badge can be used on a particular access panel controller e Connect connects the access panel controller via a dialup modem connection e Disconnect connects the access panel controller via a dialup modem connection 106 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Intrusion Panel and Relay Right click Options In addition to the acknowledge trace update hardware status properties and set controller clock right click options intrusion panels a
190. dges Multimedia objects and Cardholder information No individual delete transactions will be logged to history and THIS OPERATION CANNOT BE UNDONE ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO CONTINUE el nl 2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion of all cardholder data Visitor Form k Cardholders Bisi x DX Visitor Je Segments BS Badge IE Access Levels 8 Precision Access Biometrics E Visits el Assets Directory Acco 4 gt Last name First name Middle name Lake Lisa Badge type Wee Organization ABE Compay SSstst i SsSCS Tile Marketing Assistant City Pittsford No Last Access L SEE EC Badge ID E Zip code 14534 3816 luc ooie lt Office phone 248 9720 Prints Extension 123 Activate 10 12 2001 Last changed 10 16 2001 1 27 33 PM Deactivate 10 13 2001 Search Add Modify Delete Print Encode Ij 4 OLD nl 1 of2 Visitor Form Overview To provide integration with Visitor Management visitor records can be searched and viewed in the Cardholders folder When the current record is a visitor the first tab in the window changes from Cardholder to Visitor and will display the appropriate fields If you select the Add button on the Cardholder form or the Search button on any of the forms in the Cardholders folder the Person type drop down list is displayed in the bottom section of the form The drop down list choices are revision 105 147 12 Cardh
191. dholders folder On the Cardholders form you can search for or add a cardholder to assign to the asset being configured Once you have located the cardholder on the Cardholders form their name will appear on the Assign To push button Click on this button to assign the asset to the cardholder If the Cardholders folder is already open and a cardholder record is displayed then the Assign To button will automatically display the name of that cardholder record Search push button Click on this button to search for an asset based on a value entered in one or more of the fields Last Search push button Click on this button the display the findings of the previous search P push button Moves to the first matching record A push button Moves 10 matching records back 4 push button Moves to the previous matching record gt push button Moves to the next matching record revision 105 287 16 Assets Folder Assets Folder Asset Classes Form Continued Form Element Type Comment rl push button Moves to the last matching record Record count numeric Displayed in view mode and indicates the number of the record out of the total number of records found by the most recent search operation For example 6 of 10 You can type in a number and hit the lt Enter gt key to jump to that record number Add push button This button is not used Modify push button Used to change an asset classes reco
192. dify visits display visit records for a selected date range and search for visit records based on the scheduled time in scheduled time out time in time out or date and time last changed Find Visits push button This button quickly looks up visit records associated with the record whose name is specified in the Last name First name and Middle name fields Type drop down list Displayed in modify mode Indicates the type of visit Purpose text Displayed in modify mode Indicates the purpose of the visit Visits Form Procedures Modify a Cardholder s Permission to Have Visitors A cardholder must have permission to be allowed to have visitors visit This permission can only be granted or taken away in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter but not in Visitor Management To change a cardholder s permission to have visitors 1 Select the Badge Info from the View menu 2 Click the Cardholders tab 3 Locate the record of the cardholder that you want to allow visitors Note Cardholders who are visitors cannot be assigned visitors 4 Click the Visits tab 5 Click Modify 6 The Allowed visitors checkbox setting controls a cardholder s permission to have visitors Select the setting you want for the selected cardholder The two possible settings are When the Allow visitors checkbox is selected the cardholder will be allowed to have visitors Only cardholders with the Allow visitors checkbox wil
193. duct version 5 10 421 Item number E805 revision 105 February 2004 Content of this document copyright 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 amp 2004 by Lenel Systems International Inc BadgeDesigner FormsDesigner and MapDesigner are trademarks used by Best Access Systems with permission from Lenel Systems International Inc Windows Windows XP Windows 2000 are trademarks and Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Integral and FlashPoint are trademarks of Integral Technologies Inc Crystal Reports for Windows is a trademark of Crystal Computer Services Inc Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation Other product names mentioned in this User Guide may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged Information in this document is subject to change without notice No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of the authors The software described in this document is licensed to Best Access Systems by Lenel Systems International Inc Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS 1991 2003 LEAD Technologies Inc ALL RIGHTS RESERVED The software includes ImageStream Graphic Filters Copyright 1991 2003 Inso Corporation All rights reserved ImageStream Graphic Filters and ImageStream are re
194. duled time out window time in time out visit type and visit purpose for visit records Host name display text Specifies the host for whom you want to display scheduled visits Visitor name display text Specifies the visitor for whom you want to display scheduled visits Status display Displays the status of the visit Choices include e Scheduled A visit that has a scheduled time in and scheduled time out that are both in the future e Late A visit where the current date and time is after the scheduled time in e Overstayed A visit where the current date and time is after the scheduled time out e Active A visit that has been signed in and the scheduled time out has not yet been reached e Finished A visit occurred in the past and has been signed out Search button Allows you to search based on any field on any form in the Visits folder The search results will be displayed in the Visits listing window Add button Allows you to add a visit record Modify button Allows you to modify a selected visit record Multiple selection cannot be used when modifying visit records If the Multiple Selection checkbox is selected and multiple visit records are selected the Modify button will be grayed out Delete button Allows you to delete a selected visit record If the Multiple Selection checkbox is selected multiple visit records can be deleted at once The visit s will be deleted without prompting for confirmation
195. e Transmitter Pre Tilt Transmitter Pre Tilt Transmitter Generated when the transmitter has returned Restored Restored to normal from the pre tilt state Transmitter Pull Cord Transmitter Pull Cord Transmitter Generated when the pull cord on a Alarm Alarm transmitter has been pulled and is in alarm Transmitter Pull Cord Transmitter Pull Cord Transmitter Generated when the transmitter pull cord Restored Restored alarm has been restored Transmitter Tamper Transmitter Tamper Transmitter Transmitter tamper alarm Transmitter Tamper Transmitter Tamper Transmitter Generated when a transmitter tamper has Restored Restored been restored Transmitter Temporary Transmitter Temporary Transmitter Generated when the transmitter temporary Tilt Disable Tilt Disable tilt has been disabled Transmitter Tilt Transmitter Tilt Transmitter Generated when a tilt condition on the transmitter has been detected Transmitter Tilt Transmitter Tilt Transmitter Generated when the transmitter tilt function Disabled Disabled has been disabled Transmitter Tilt Transmitter Tilt Transmitter Generated when the transmitter tilt function Enabled Enabled has been enabled Transmitter Tilt Transmitter Tilt Transmitter Generated when the tilt condition on the Restored Restored transmitter has been restored Trouble Acknowledge Trouble Acknowledge Fire Generated when the trouble condition has been acknowledged Trouble Acknowledge Trouble Acknowledge Fire Generated when
196. e System Administration software and if these alarms are unacknowledged undeleted e The alarm sprite disappears once the alarm has been acknowledged e The alarm sprite disappears if the alarm has been deleted without acknowledgment as in the case of an initiating alarm that is automatically replaced by a canceling alarm e The alarm sprite is not used for canceling alarms View Linked Maps Several maps can be linked to each other using the MapDesigner software application For more information refer to the Place Icons on a background section in the MapDesigner User Guide To view linked maps do one of the following revision 105 123 11 Acknowledge Alarms e Ifthe map that is currently displayed has a link to another map you can double click the icon or right click and select Switch Map e With a map currently displayed click the map icon beside the File menu option If you have previously brought up more than one map a Back 1 Map menu option displays If you go back one map a Forward 1 Map menu option displays ES File e From the View menu select Map Selection Highlight a new map and click OK Send an E mail Using B A S I S software you can automatically or manually send electronic mail with alarm information Contact your System Administrator to automatically send electronic mail for specific alarms 124 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide To manually send an e mail using Alarm Moni
197. e action to be that the device outputs in the group will activate When device outputs are activated that means they are in an on state Deactivate radio button When configuring an output device group as an action select this radio button if you want the action to be that the device outputs in the group will deactivate When device outputs are deactivated that means they are in an off state Pulse radio button When configuring an output device group as an action select this radio button if you want the action to be that the device outputs in the group will pulse they will turn on and then turn off again OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Device Output Group Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Device Output Group Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Device Output Group Properties Window Procedures Add a Device Output Group Action 354 revision 105 1 Display the Device Output Group Properties window 2 Click on a group in the Output Device Group listing window to select it 3 Do one of the following e Select the Activate radio button if you want this action to be that the device outputs in the group will activate When device outputs are activated that means they are in an on state e Select the Deactivate radio button if you want this action to be
198. e fields are obtained from the next available badge ID from the badge numbers reserved for the selected reader and the next valid issue code for that badge number The values are updated after you select an item for the drop down list and then move on to another field on the form Note This field is subject to licensing restrictions Passage Mode checkbox Select this checkbox if you want the selected cardholder to have passage mode privileges The passage mode privilege lets a cardholder use their card twice within the lock s unlock duration to place the lock in an unlock mode for an indefinite duration The door remains unlocked until a card with the passage mode feature is used to relock the door or until a timezone with the locked mode becomes effective Note This field is subject to licensing restrictions 156 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Cardholders Folder Badge Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Deadbolt Override checkbox If this checkbox is selected the selected cardholder will have deadbolt override privileges The deadbolt override privilege lets the cardholder access a door with a deadbolt function mortise lock even when the deadbolt is thrown Note This field is subject to licensing restrictions Last changed display Displayed in add or modify mode Indicates the date when the selected badge record was last saved Last printed
199. e toward the cursor The camera keeps moving in that direction until the mouse button is released If you right click in the top half of the screen the camera will zoom in until the mouse is released Clicking and holding the mouse in the bottom half of the screen causes the camera to zoom out The farther away from center the mouse is the faster the device will pan tilt or zoom If you have a scroll mouse moving the scroll wheel up will zoom in and moving the scroll wheel back will zoom out e Using the Keyboard You can use your keyboard arrow keys to pan tilt and zoom The left and right arrow keys pan the camera left and right The up and down arrow keys tilt the camera up and down Holding the lt Shift gt key 94 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide down while pressing either the up or down arrow causes the camera to zoom in or zoom out Display the Video Search Window Toolbar Shortcut LC The Video Search window is a modeless dialog box that enables operators to search video and monitor alarms without closing the Video Player or Video Search window 1 Follow the procedures to aLaunch Video Live Recorded From a Camera in the Video Player on on page 88 Verify the recorded video is playing in the Video Player 2 Click the Video Search toolbar button or from the Control menu select Video Search The Video Search window displays Search Video Toolbar Shortcut Ei You can search video using the Video Pl
200. eader Mode drop down list select a reader mode for the selected reader controller When configuring a reader mode action for a reader on a Best controller that is a primary reader to an alternate biometric reader you can select a Verify Mode When verify mode is enabled for alternate reader support the primary reader will ask for verification from the alternate reader Select the First Card Unlock checkbox if you want this reader mode action to enable first card unlock Click OK revision 105 385 A Actions Reader Mode Group Properties Window To display do one of the following Note 386 revision 105 Select the Action Types Reader Mode Group Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Reader Mode Group from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Reader Mode Group Properties xi Reader Mode Group Reader Device Group d Reader Group A Reader Mode Verify Mode Card and Pin z No Change zl I First Card Unlock Cancel Hep If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reader Mode Group Properties Window Field Table
201. ear click on the last day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the End time checkbox and choosing a specific end time 209 E e 2 08 02 AM Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons Apply start and end checkbox If selected the specified time range will be applied to any date that time to each day falls within the specified date range For example if you specify a Date Time Filter starting January 1 1998 at 8 00 AM and ending March 31 1998 at 7 00 PM e H this box is checked the report will include only data collected during the hours of 8 00 AM through 7 00 PM on any and all days between January 1 and March 31 e H this box is not checked the report will include all data gathered from 8 00 AM on January 1 straight through until March 31 at 7 00 PM Report All push button Reports every alarm acknowledgment and does not apply any filter Filter by drop down list Select one device you want the report based on The report displays the alarm acknowledgments only for the device you select Filter listing window display Select one or multiple filters for the report The filters that display in thi
202. earch push button Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected retrieves the same group of records that was found by the most recent search operation 132 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Cardholders Folder Continued Form Element Comment Record count numeric Displayed in view mode on every form in the Cardholders folder and indicates the number of the record out of the total number of records found by the most recent search operation For example 6 of 10 You can type in a number and hit the lt Enter gt key to jump to that record number Person type drop down list In search mode select the type of record you want to search Choices are e All when selected your search will locate both Cardholder and Visitor records e Cardholders when selected your search will only locate cardholder records e Visitors when selected your search will only locate visitor records Cardholders Folder Procedures The following procedures pertain to every form in the Cardholders folder unless otherwise noted Cardholder Search Capabilities In search mode you can search on any combination of fields in the Cardholders folder including the Cardholder Badge and Access Levels forms Comparison Operators For text fields such as Last name and First name the default comparison is begins with The search results will include any rec
203. eas that have an active alarm triggered Note If one or more of the specified device selections are made only devices matching those criteria display in the view 56 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Button field Description View Displays information about devices in one of two formats Tree Displays information in a hierarchical fashion also called a tree or branching arrangement Each entry in the list represents one device Panels have the leftmost entries and any device connected to a panel is listed below the panel and indented to the right List Lists the following information about devices in the system e Device Name e Parent Device Name e Current Device Status Note The hardware list displays separate rows for Reader Auxiliary Input and Reader Auxiliary Output devices Lock display updates Prevents items from being added or deleted from the display window When the Lock display updates checkbox is selected an indicator on the status bar displays LOCKED Devices cannot be added to or deleted from the display window The status of devices currently in the window update as their status changes The if the status of devices not in the window change they are not added to the display window When the Lock display updates checkbox is not selected the status bar indicator is blank Devices are added to and removed from the display window automatically as their device status c
204. ecord 174 revision 105 1 Select the Badge Info from the View menu The Cardholders folder opens Hp s dr Fa Select the Biometrics tab Click Search In the Biometric listing window click on a biometric feature to select it Choose either Has or Does Not Have from the Search Type drop down list to search for a record that has or does not have a fingerprint image a Alarm Monitoring User Guide fingerprint template iris data or a hand geometry template associated with the cardholder Click OK B A S LS retrieves and displays the first matching record Use the EH w A H and Hl buttons to navigate through the database A dimmed button means that the associated operation is not possible eg moving to the next record while the last record is being displayed revision 105 175 12 Cardholders Folder Visits Form View Mode k Cardholders sg Cardholders Folder Visits Form Allowed visitors checkbox When selected in modify mode the selected cardholder is allowed to be assigned visitors When not selected the cardholder will not be available for visit assignment in the Visitor Management application 176 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Cardholders Folder Visits Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Add Visit push button In modify mode click this button to display the Adding Visit window From here you can add or mo
205. ect the Limit report to current search checkbox if you want to limit this report to the search that you just completed 3 Click Print The Print Report Options window will be displayed p Print Destination Print to a Preview Window Export Directly to a File Print Directly to a Printer WM Prompt for Number of Pages r Report Subtitle You can update the text used for the report subtitle below 4 Choose a Print Destination and if you want update the text used for the report subtitle 5 Click OK e Ifyou chose the Print Directly to a Printer radio button select a printer from the drop down list If you select the Prompt for Number of Pages checkbox the Print window will be displayed where you can select print range number of copies and whether or not to collate your report e Ifyou chose the Export Directly to a File radio button the Export window will be displayed Choose the report Format and Destination from the drop down lists Depending on what you chose enter the destination and format information in the corresponding window then click OK e Ifyou chose the Print to a Preview Window radio button an asset report print preview window will be displayed from where you can view the selected report on the screen For more information refer to the Report Print Preview Window chapter in the System Administration User Guide revision 105 295 16 Assets Folder 296 revi
206. ecurity number After those settings are examined the system then examines the Table and Field and searches that information up The Table and Field specified depend on what information is encoded on the card that will be read in addition to the CAC Common options include e Badge ID If searching on Badge IDs select the BADGE table and the ID field e Social security number If searching on social security numbers select the EMP table and the SSNO field Alarm Monitoring User Guide e User defined field If searching on a user defined field select the desired table and field For example a company may wish to search on a table and field that is unique to their system such as an employee number The following flowchart describes what happens when a barcode is scanned with a wedge scanner Scanning Barcodes with a Wedge Scanner Scan badge Is CAC being used Yes Is length of number scanned greater than Limit Yes B A S 1 S decrypts social security number from CAC number B A S 1 S searches up social security number B A S 1 S examines Ignore non numeric data Max length Start and End settings B A S 1 S examines Field and Table B A S 1 S searches up field and table revision 105 139 12 Cardholders Folder Keyboard Wedge Settings Window Keyboard Wedge Settings m Field to search on Table Field BADGE zl ID e m Department of Defense Common Access Card CA
207. ecute the function list with an argument of Pulse 4 Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Global APB System Segment Reset Properties Window Displayed by clicking Add on the Action Group Properties window and then selecting Global APB System Segment Reset from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide You can also select the Action Types Global APB System Segment Reset Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Global APB System Segment Reset Properties xi Global APB System Segment Reset Description Reset APB Default Segment Global APB System Segment d Default Segment Cancel Help Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 357 A Actions Global APB System Segment Reset Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Description text Displays a description of the selected global APB system segment Global APB display Displays a list of the segments available for this action System Segment listing window OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Global APB System Segment Reset Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Global A
208. ed Reports on page 243 On the Reports form you can e Search for a cardholder e Search for a visitor e Generate a report Reports Form Field Table Form Element Type Comment current search Limit report to checkbox If selected the report will only include those records that match the rest of the search criteria specified on any form in the Visits folder If not selected the report will include all records for the selected report window type Description display A brief description of the report contents Report listing display selection Lists currently defined reports of the type s selected in the Report listing window Reports Form Procedures Run a Visit Report from the Visits Folder A visit report can be generated for either a defined search criteria or for all visits revision 105 221 14 Visits Folder 222 revision 105 Note This procedure does not apply to view only workstations If you wish to generate a visit report that searches through all visit records not just those that match a search criteria proceed to step 2 To generate a visit report based on a search criteria Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens b Inthe Visits folder click Search c Run the search that you wish to print a report for For more information on searching refer to the following e Visit Search Capabilities on page 199 e Search for All Visits to a Selecte
209. ed in the Video Player From the Video Search window e Click any part of the histogram e Double click a thumbnail or listed event Filter Search Results After the initial search is performed you can continue to filter the results by changing the motion level in the Video Search window If you increase or decrease the motion level the Video Search window will display the images details from the initial search that are equal to or greater than the new minimum motion value It will not display all the recorded images that are equal to or greater than the new minimum motion value In order to do that you must restart the search 98 revision 105 Chapter 8 Displayed by KR Alarm Monitoring User Guide Video Verification Video verification is the process of comparing live as it is happening video with a photograph stored in the database When a person swipes a badge through a reader you can use video verification to compare the person s appearance with the photograph that was taken to create the badge The Video Verification window can be displayed several ways e Select the Video Verification toolbar button e From the View menu select Video Verification Video Verification Window Video Verification Main Building AAM 80 Live Video Photograph Close Granted Access Michelle Baker 21578 11 52 AM 02 25 97 Magnetic Fra E Video Selected Reader
210. ed to step 9 If you want to schedule the action to occur once a Select the One time radio button b In the On date field the current date is entered by default but you can change this value by typing a numeric date into the field or by selecting a date from the drop down calendar lt gt Today 3 6 2003 e To select a month click on the and wj navigation buttons e You can also select a month by clicking on the displayed month to access a drop down list of months Highlight the month you want to select it e Navigate to a year by clicking on the displayed year to access the Lead year spin buttons Els e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the day that you want the action to occur c Inthe At time field select the time when you want this action to occur Proceed to step 10 9 If you want to schedule the action to occur more than once a Select the Recurring radio button b Click Change The Edit Recurring Action Schedule window opens 322 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide m Occurs Daily Daily Every h a day s C Weekly Monthly r Daily frequency Occurs once at 12 00AM C Occurs every fi 4 Spe z Starting at fi200 4M Ending at ES PM r Duration Start date D I 8 2001 x C End date 112 8 2001 z No end date Cancel c Do one of the following Select the Daily radio button in the Occurs section if you
211. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeees 340 Automatic Guard Tour Properties Window c eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetanees 342 Automatic Guard Tour Properties Window Procedures ccceeeeeees 343 Add an Automatic Guard Tour Action cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaaeseeeeeeseaeeneneees 343 Change Network Video Password Properties Window 345 Change Network Video Password Properties Window Procedures 346 Schedule a One Time Password Change 346 Schedule a Recurring Password Change cccccecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeececaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 347 Deactivate Badge Properties Window sssssssesssnenneeesrtrnrnnnsrrrnnnnrerrrrennnn 348 Deactivate Badge Properties Window Procedures 349 revision 105 17 Table of Contents Add a Deactivate Badge Achon ccccccecceeececeeeeseeeeeeeeneneeeeeeesenaeeeeensenaeeseeneeneeeeeenennaees 349 Device Output Properties WiINdOW un 350 Device Output Properties Window Procedures c cceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 351 Add a Device Output Action ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeeeseaaeeeseneeessaeenseneees 351 Device Output Group Properties Window ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 353 Device Output Group Properties Window Procedures ssssssssssseeesseseee 354 Add a Device Output Group Action cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeaeeeeeaeeeseaaeeeeaaeeeneaeeeeeneees
212. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 279 PASSES OU Ps Na sie ki it Ss i ee te eg 280 14 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Assets Formi een TI 282 Addani EE 282 Modify an EE 283 EE 283 Assign eelere ET EE 284 s arch foran Asset Record resa hii heen eta GEG EE 284 Retrieve the Most Recent Search Results cccceceeseeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaes 284 Add an Asset Type Subtype AANEREN 285 Asset Classes Form View Mode EE 286 Asset Classes Form Modify Mode 286 Asset Classes Form Procedures ccessecceeceseeceesesseeeeeessneesessseeenesseees 288 Assign Classes to an Asset ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeeaaeeceeeeeeeaaeesecaeeesaaaeseeeeeessaeeneneees 288 Modify an Asset Classes Assignment ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeececaeeeeeneeeseaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaas 288 Add Asset Groups and Classes cccccceeseceseeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeseaaeeseeeeeessaeeeeeaeees 289 Assignments FOr cceeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeesseneaaees 290 Assignments Form Procedures ENEE 292 Assign a Cardholder to an Asset 292 Wnassign an ASSCt EE 292 Search for a Cardholder Assigned to an Asset 0 cc cceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeseseeeseaeeneneees 292 Reports PONT eene gedoe eh EEEEEN EEN 293 Fieponts Form Procedures EE 295 Runcan Asset Reportic c 2 004 cana RA a i ie oa 295 Chapter 17 Print Report Options Window cccssseeeeeeees 297 Print Report Optio
213. eeerrreeees 182 Update hardware status 70 User defined display options eee eee 55 V Video monitoring procedures eee 88 Video Monitoring wimndow cee eeeeee etree 79 Video Player eoii a ek 80 Video search performance requirements 88 Video Search windoW essseeeesseeessseesrerereerrereses 84 CIS E 95 Video Verification Window eee eeeeeeeees 99 display i e scetesgsssssessscesssekes ioestesedestescs okaro issis 99 View ACTION history oo eee senenin eeteeeeeeeeees 327 current status of an action eee 328 last connection time for dialup panels 71 linked maps 123 vid o E 89 video on any Computer oo eects 88 video search results 98 vided TOUTS EES er 91 VAS W AMNION EE 34 VaASIt LOT ebe ie eee eons 212 fi ld EE 212 OVERVIEW Seege ee 212 Select Date s window field table 213 Select Time Range window field table 214 KA I eidir a EEE 221 Visit right click menu 192 Visit search capabilities 0 0 199 Visit search results 203 Visitor find a cardholder or visitor associated with a Seege ege 203 print badge for a visttor eee 209 search for all visits by a selected visitor 200 WSOP e EE 147 TE DEE 148 OVELVIEW estate ees 147 PLOCOCUIES iiini iseia 148 Visits OA a hY EE e E 201 add a visit record 203 delete a visit record 208 find a cardholder or visitor associated with a IS geesde ed Ee 203 AMISHE Ms seh ocsek cee
214. eign nationals Retirees family members and inactive reservists are not currently issued a CAC card Configuring B A S I S to Read CAC Barcodes To set the B A S I S system up to read CAC cards the If length of input exceeds limit assume CAC barcode checkbox on the Keyboard Wedge Settings window must be selected A limit also needs to be specified If only CAC cards will be read then the Limit can be set to 0 However most systems will also need to have the ability to read other cards in addition to CACs so the limit will need to be set to an appropriate value For example a military base that assigns badge IDs to the people on its base may want to be able to read those badge IDs as well as CACs because visitors from other bases will only have a CAC In this case the limit would need to be set to an appropriate number If the badge IDs were all nine digits long then an appropriate limit would be ten because CAC barcodes are much longer than ten digits Scanning Barcodes with a Wedge Scanner 138 revision 105 When an ID is scanned BA SIS determines the length of the number that was scanned If the number of digits exceeds the limit then the number is treated as a CAC number and the social security number is decrypted and searched up If the number of digits is less than the limit then the maximum length start and end settings are applied to the string and used to extract the search criteria typically badge ID or social s
215. eld will find all people whose last name contains the text mit Search for Empty Values You can search for cardholder records that have an empty value for a field by typing an equal sign in the field and nothing else For example typing an in the Department field will find all people that do not have a department assigned Search on Multiple Fields When you search on multiple fields the criteria is combined with and For example typing A in Last name field and B in First name field will find all people whose last name begins with A and whose first name beings with B One exception is searching on access levels which uses an or comparison for multiple selections in that field For example selecting both Access Level A and Access Level B will find all cardholders with either Access Level A or Access Level B assigned For fields that have multiple representations on a form you can search on a range of values For example the Badge ID field can be found on both the middle left section of the Badge form and the right section of the Badge form This allows you to search for badge ID ranges For example you can type gt 100 in one field and lt 200 in the other to find all badges with IDs between 100 and 200 inclusive 134 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Search for a Cardholder Record Note From the View menu se
216. em Administration User Guide Action Group Properties E Action Group Description Action Group 3 Z Action Group Library r Contents Z Action Type Description oo Cancel Help Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 335 A Actions Action Group Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Description text When adding or modifying an action group you can enter a description of the action group that is being configured Action Group checkbox When selected the action group that you are adding or modifying will Library be available for selection in the Action Group Library For more information refer to Action Groups Overview in the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Action Type listing display Displays the action types which have been assigned to the selected window action group Add push button Click this button to add an action type Modify push button Click this button to modify the action type that is selected in the Action Type listing window Delete push button Click this button to delete the action type that is selected in the Action Type listing window from the selected action group OK push button Click this button to save your changes an
217. en 188 Barcodes EE 138 scanning with a wedge scanner 138 Biometrics form Cardholders folder 173 field table se secs scscvevecsye iinternet 173 IL 174 C CAC barcodes eoero ea s ieee roia a 138 Cameras eurveillance onlv 90 Capture an image eeeesesseeeseseesersreerrresrrrrerresee 92 Carcodes configuring to read CAC barcodes 138 Cardholder Tom 144 field table ccssar 145 A E 144 IL 145 Cardholder men 43 Cardholder menu bulk sub menu s sse0esnee 44 Cardholder search capabilities 0 ee 133 Cardholders folder field table iieii sorires irer 130 OVErV EW EES 129 PLOCECUILES 2 52 2sscescsecssgeescspescacesssosescvasieees 133 Change cardholders folder view options 136 Change Network Video Password Properties 424 revision 105 WIDOW ENEE spt u a REEE 345 Deldtable xisi 345 PLOCECUICS 2 out SEENEN Sen 346 Checkpoint status and events diagram 316 Checkpoint ome cee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenee 309 Checkpoints iisisti tiersen i 309 Comparison Operators eee cece 133 199 Configure wedge scanner 143 Configure MENU cosses sesiis snie 37 Control Menu oroe sio ieas 38 Control menu current device sub menu 38 Conventions used in this documentation 21 Create a video event 93 D Date Time Reports form ssesesesseeeesreeererees 258 field tablen nisin 259 OVELVICW ENEE a E a 258 IO E 262 Deactivate Badge Propertie
218. ent panels in a receiver setup Asset Name List alarm alphabetically by asset name Asset Scan ID Lists alarms in order of asset scan ID Associated Text Indicates Yes or blank whether there is additional text associated with the alarm Badge Type Displays the badge type associated with the alarm Biometric Score Lists alarms in order of biometric score A biometric score is based on how well a biometric access control reader matches a template in the database By default this sort option is not enabled To enable this sort option the Biometric Score column must first be added via the Configure gt Columns menu option in Alarm Monitoring Card Lists alarms numerically by the card number badge ID if the alarm is associated with a cardholder Controller Lists alarms alphabetically by name of the controller with which the alarms are associated The controller can be an access panel fire panel intercom exchange receiver or receiver account Controller Time Lists alarms in order of controller time The time includes the hour and minute and the date includes the month day and year The display is based on the time zone setting selected in the Control Panel of your computer Typically the display is adapted to the country in which you are located Device Lists alarms alphabetically by name of the device reader alarm panel intercom station etc associated with the alarm If the
219. ent search ssigned Assets by Cardholder ssigned Assets by Scan ID EJ Assigned Assets by Type Scan ID Asset Cardholder Asset Cardholder Asset Cardholder Asset Subtype ka BEE No Last Access i Description Al events having to do with assets Assets Folder Reports Form Personal Safety Transmitter Assignments Cardholder Asset Assign To Lisa Lake Form Element Type Comment Scan ID numeric Displays the scan ID of the selected asset Name text Displays the name of the selected asset Type drop down list Displays the type of the selected asset Subtype drop down list Displays the subtype of the selected asset Listing window display Displays a list of the types of reports that can be previewed and or printed An icon precedes each entry Limit report to checkbox Select this checkbox if you want to limit this report to the search that current search you just completed Description display Displays a description of the report type you selected from the listing window Filename display Displays the file name of the report type Photo display Displays the captured photo of the currently selected asset Last Access display Displays the date and time of the asset s last access Assign Asset Assign To push button Displays the name of the cardholder currently displayed in the Cardholders folder If no name is displayed when selected the Cardholder
220. ents if any exist click on an entry in the Segments listing window to select it You can select multiple entries Click Next If you selected All Segments in step 5 proceed to step 10 If you selected the Make changes to segment assignments radio button in step 3 a From the Segments listing window select any assignments you want to add in addition to the primary segment b Click Next c If there are segment assignments you want to remove from the group click on an entry in the Segments listing window to select it You can select multiple entries d Click Clear to remove the assignment e Click Next If you want to perform preliminary validation and be prompted with the results before proceeding select the Perform preliminary validation and prompt for confirmation radio button Select the Prompt only if a problem is found checkbox if you do not want to a prompt for confirmation if there is no validation problem If you do not want to be prompted select the Skip preliminary validation and perform the operation without prompting radio button Click Next 10 Click Finish e Ifyou selected the Skip preliminary validation and perform the operation without prompting radio button in step 8 or if you selected All Segments in step 5 the Bulk Action Results window opens and displays a summary of your modifications Click OK e Ifyou selected the Perform preliminary validation and prompt for confirma
221. ents deleted b Select Yes if you want all queued event for the monitor zone displayed Alarm Monitoring User Guide Log In Using Manual Single Sign On Both users who want to log into B A S I S using an LDAP user name and password for authentication and users who want to log in using a Windows domain account can do so using manual single sign on 1 Click the Start button then select Programs gt B A S 1 S ET gt Alarm Monitoring 2 Your system may be configured to prompt you to select a database to log into If it is not proceed to step 3 If it is a Inthe Database drop down all ODBC system databases currently defined on your computer are listed Select the database that you wish to use for your application b Click OK 3 If your Windows account is linked to a user a message will be displayed that says Attempting to automatically log you on using your Windows account To bypass this hold down SHIFT To manually login or to login using a different user name and password hold down the lt Shift gt key The Log On window opens a In the Directory field select the directory that you wish to log into The default is lt Internal gt b In the User name field type the Windows user name assigned to you Do not enter the domain user name just enter your user name In the Password field type the Windows password assigned to you d Select the Remember user name and directory checkbox if you want
222. er Access Granted Denied Cardholder Receiver Events Access Granted Denied Cardholder General Access Groups With Levels Reader 2 Access Level Assignments to Cardholders Cardholder Report View Filter Window This window is displayed by clicking the Filter Report View button on the Report Configuration form Report iew Filter ied ents Alarm Panel M Alarm Panel Events M Anti Passback M Asset M Cardholder M Date Time M General M Guest M Reader M Reader Events M Receiver M Receiver Account Zone M Receiver Events MA Liser Transactions Reports Folder Report Configuration Form Listing window display Lists currently defined reports of the type s selected in the Report View Filter window Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type 236 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Folder Report Configuration Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Filter Report View push button Click this button to display the Report View Filter window from where you can choose the types of reports you wish to view Name text The name of the report File text The location and name of the file that contains the report Browse push button Used to search through drives and directories to choose a report filename to insert into the File field Description text A brief description of the report contents Password t
223. er in the System Administration User Guide You can also select the Action Types ISC Database Download Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Report Print Properties E Report Print 4 Access Denials and Grants by Reader Access Denials Grants and Other Badge Events Access Denied Events Access Denied Events by Reader Access Granted Events Access Granted Events by Reader Number of pages Access Groups Access Groups With Levels Access Level Assignments to Cardholders Access Level Assignments to Cardholders By Segment Access Levels Access Panels Active Visits by Cardholder Name Active Visits by Visitor Name Alarm Acknowledgments Alarm Acknowledgments by Definition Alarm Acknowledgments by Operator Use default printer Select printer below J EI FE If fails use default printer Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 389 A Actions Report Print Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Report listing display Displays a list of available reports window Use default printer radio button Select this radio button if you want the scheduled report to print from the workstation s default printer Select printer below radio button drop down li
224. erated when a relay contact was Deactivated Deactivated deactivated Retrieved Retrieved Intercom Generated when a phone call is retrieved answered Ringing Ringing Intercom Generated when an intercom station phone is ringing Sales Subtotal Sales Subtotal POS A transaction that reports the sale subtotal Scheduler Action Scheduler Action System Generated when a scheduler action has Executed Executed executed Scheduler Action Scheduler Action Failed System Generated when a scheduler action has Failed failed Security Alarm Security Alarm Fire Generated when a security alarm has been Acknowledge Acknowledge acknowledged Security Alarm Block Security Alarm Block Fire Generated when all security alarms have Acknowledge Acknowledge been acknowledged at the fire panel Security Alarm In Security Alarm In Fire Generated when a new security alarm has been detected for the device 410 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Alarm Event Event Type Description Security Alarm Out Security Alarm Out Fire Generated when a device with a previous security alarm has returned to its normal state Shorted Line Active Shorted Line Alarm System Generated when a shorted line fault Active condition has been detected Short Line Restored Canceled Shorted Line System Generated when a device with a shorted line fault condition has returned to its normal
225. erated when an event for a lottery sale has occurred Low Voltage Low Voltage System Generated when a low voltage condition has been detected at the device Low Voltage Restored Low Voltage Restored System Generated when a device resumes its proper voltage Manufacturer Coupon Manufacturer Coupon POS Indicates a manufacturer coupons Manufacturer Coupon Redemption Manufacturer Coupon Redemption POS Transaction generated for a manufacturer coupon redemption Max Assets Reached Max Assets Reached System Generated during a download when the number of assets exceeds the maximum value configured for the controller Only the maximum number of assets will be downloaded all others will be ignored Max Biometric Templates Reached Max Biometric Templates Reached System Generated during a download when the number of biometric templates exceeds the maximum value configured for the controller Only the maximum number of templates will be downloaded all others will be ignored Max Cardholders Reached Max Cardholders Reached System Generated during a download when the number of cardholders exceeds the maximum value configured for the controller Only the maximum number of cardholders will be downloaded all others will be ignored Merchandise Returned Merchandise Returned POS Generated when merchandise is returned Miscellaneous Tender
226. ere the host and the visitor s name are both Lisa for All Visits to a Selected Cardholder 1 Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens 2 Click Search 3 On any form in the Visits folder click the button to the right of the Host name drop down list The Select Host Wizard Search form will open For more information refer to Select Host Wizard Search Form on page 224 a Specify your search criteria by typing full or partial entries in the enabled fields Leave all fields blank to display all cardholders b Ifa visitor is specified in the Visitor name field on the forms in the Visits folder and you wish to search for only cardholders who have been revision 105 199 14 Visits Folder visited by that visitor select the Previous hosts for current visitor only checkbox c Click Next d The Select Host Wizard Select form opens In the Cardholder listing window select the cardholder you wish to add a visitor for For more information refer to Select Host Wizard Select Form on page 226 e Click Finish The cardholder s name will appear in the Host name field on the Visit form f If you wish to locate all visits for the selected cardholder click OK and the search results will be displayed in the Visits listing window Alternately you can specify additional search criteria Search for All Visits by a Selected Visitor 200 revision 105 Note Select Visits from t
227. ered during the specified period will be included in the report To limit each date in the range to the specified time interval select the Apply start and end time to each day checkbox In the Filter by drop down list select the device whose data you wish to include in the report If you don t select any device or if you click Report All data for every device will be reported In the Filter listing window select the device s whose data you wish to include in the report Click either the Print or Preview button depending on which function you wish to perform For more information refer to Chapter 18 Report Print Preview Window on page 303 Only data that s currently in the database can be included in the report Events or other transactions deleted because of space limitations or elapsed time are no longer available revision 105 273 15 Reports Folder Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Access Granted Denied D Access Granted Events Access Granted Denied All Events Over Time Alarm Panel Events Cari 2 Device Status Events Alarm Panel Events Reade Si Event Count By Panel Alarm Panel Events Reade Receiver Account Zones Receiver Account Zone H EI Receiver and Receiver Account Events Date Time Receiver Eve Building 1 Radionics Alarm Panel Eas Building 2 Radionics Alarm Panel Eas d Monday August 25 2003 ll 12 00 00 AM Monday August 25 2003 Receiver Account Zone Report
228. ers Folder Directory Accounts Form Form Element Type Comment Directory accounts display Lists the directory accounts that have been linked to the selected listing window cardholder Link push button When selected displays the Select Account window from where you can link a directory account to the selected cardholder Unlink push button When selected unlinks the selected cardholder from the directory account that is selected in the Directory Accounts listing window Directory Accounts Form Procedures Link a Cardholder to a Directory Account 1 Select the Badge Info from the View menu The Cardholders folder opens 2 Select the Directory Accounts tab 3 Locate the cardholder record for which you want to link a directory account 4 Click Link The Select Account window opens In the Select Account window a Inthe Directory drop down list select the directory you wish to link to b In the Field drop down list select whether to search for a name or user name c Inthe Condition drop down list select how the value will be related to the field For example a search where the Field selected is Name the Condition selected is contains and the Value specified is Lake will revision 105 181 12 Cardholders Folder Note 5 display all accounts where the name contains the word Lake such as Lisa Lake d In the Value field type or select a word you think may
229. es the wizard The visitor record will be added to the database and the name of the visitor who was just added will be displayed in the Visitor name field Cancel push button Closes the window without adding a visitor and returns you to the Visit form in the Visits folder Help push button Displays online help for this topic 232 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Select Visitor Wizard Select Form This form is displayed when the button to the right of the Visitor name field on the Visit form in the Visits folder is clicked Select Visitor Wizard Select E Select visitor below PJohnson Peter Prime Company Engineer cmos ze Select Visitor Wizard Select Form Overview This form is displayed when searching it is used to select a visitor record from those that matched the specified search criteria Visits Folder Select Visitor Wizard Select Form Form Element Type Comment Last Name text Indicates visitor s last name First Name text Indicates visitor s first name Middle Initial text Indicates visitor s middle initial User defined fields All fields below the Name fields on this form are user defined fields The default fields are pictured but your form may be different if the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your visitor data Back push button Returns to the previous form Finish push button Completes the wizard The selected visi
230. ew Window Form Element Type Comment Report navigation tree display The display in the left portion of the Report Print Preview window The report navigation tree lists the records contained in the report in a hierarchical arrangement The information is content sensitive The report type determines the entries in the tree For example the default User Transaction Log report is arranged in date order so the tree will contain a list of dates The tree for the default Text Instructions report lists alarms The Access and Denials by Reader report has an entry for each queried reader with subentries by event date If the tree has branching entries you can expand the branches of the tree When you click an entry in the tree you move to that section or record in the report When a section or record is selected via the report navigation tree that section or record will appear in the preview window with a blue box border For more information refer to Preview and Print a Report on page 306 Preview window display The display in the right portion of the Report Print Preview window The preview window displays up to one full page of the report depending upon the zoom level set push button Click to displays a Print window from where you can select the page range and number of copies to print then initiate report printing push button Click to export the report to a file or to your
231. ext This field is optional If you type a password here a user attempting to print this report will be asked to first enter the correct password A password can be from 1 to 32 characters in length As you type the password will appear in the field as a series of s Confirm Password text If you typed something in the Password field you must type exactly the same thing here As with the Password field your entry here will appear as a series of s Type s section Lists the types of reports that you can configure The system reports that are included with the installation are each assigned an appropriate Type You can modify report types on the system reports but selecting invalid types could result in unwanted behavior Note To restore types back to their defaults run Database Setup Note To make the report appear in Area Access Manager the Area Access Manager checkbox must be selected in the Types field Add push button Used to configure a report Modify push button Used to change a report configuration Delete push button Used to remove a report Print push button Opens the Print Report Options window Preview push button Displays the selected report in the Report Print Preview window Help push button Displays relevant on screen help for this form Use restored checkbox If this checkbox is selected data for an event or user transaction report records is obtained from restored events transactions in the database rather than fro
232. failure condition Failure was restored Price Lookup Price Lookup POS Generated when a price lookup has taken place Quantity or Weight Quantity or Weight POS An event indicating a quantity or weight Reader Input Tamper Reader Input Tamper System Generated when the reader input tamper has Active gone active Reader Input Tamper Reader Input Tamper System Generated when the reader input tamper Restored Cancelled was restored Reader Low Battery Reader Low Battery System Generated when a reader has a low battery Reader Low Battery Reader Low Battery System Generated when a reader low battery Restored Restored condition has been restored Reader Mode Card and Reader Mode Card and System Generated when the reader mode has Pin Pin changed to Pin and Card for the device Reader Mode Card Reader Mode Card System Generated when the reader mode has Only Only changed to Card Only Reader Mode Facility Reader Mode Facility System Generated when the reader mode has Code Code changed to Facility Code Only Reader Mode First Reader Mode First Card System Generated when the reader mode has Card Unlock Unlock changed to First Card Unlock Reader Mode Locked Reader Mode Locked System Generated when the reader mode has changed to Locked Reader Mode Pin or Reader Mode Pin or System Generated when the reader mode has Card Card changed to Pin or Card for the device revision 105 409 B
233. freld table eege este Sel Aes 233 OVETVIEW 2iseicck ech iB E 233 Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add form 229 field table scant seis ciao hanes 229 OVOEVIEW ged neil aed e SE 229 Send Oa kc aris Aesth iat tie 124 PARE civ EEN 126 Set start and end date 0 cee cecececeesecesseeeeeeees 91 Sign in a previously scheduled visit 209 Sign In Visit s Window ceeseeseesreeseeceeeees 196 field table cc n0a suai eons 196 SIGN out A Visit lt iscsiscescsvessssess ses cosseicsvscssvesssesseeses 211 Sign Out Visitor Properties window 395 field tables eege eege ae EE 396 428 revision 105 procedures ecni 396 Single and double left click mode 109 Sort alarms deed 115 Start AN ACHON See DEENEN 327 Status bar Alarm Monitoring window 46 Status Search form 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 215 Held table ccscccessess ee csteotves eei 215 OVERVIEW sev seis coined ege Eed A 215 Stop an acHon sissies seee oreert 327 Surveillance only cameras 0 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeee 90 Switch between camera and monitor views 93 Switch camera views displayed in Video Player 93 Switch 1Og op 30 System Hardware Options window 55 System Hardware window eseeeseeeeeseeeereeee 61 T Re 70 Toolbars eech hectic e 33 Trace Configuration Window cesses 75 RU E 36 Tree Viewer E E E 60 U Unassign an aset 292 Unlink directory account sesessseeseseeeersr
234. fy Access Levels Assignments 1 Locate the cardholder badge record whose access level assignments you want to change Click Modify Make the changes you want to the record Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to revert to the previously saved values Delete Access Levels Assignments 1 170 revision 105 Locate the cardholder badge record whose access level assignments you want to delete Click Delete Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Precision Access Form Note The Precision Access tab is only displayed if either Inclusion or Exclusion is selected in the Precision Access Mode field on the General Cardholder Options form of the Cardholder Options folder in the System Administration software application amp Cardholders SE Cardholder G amp Segments ES Badge Me Access Levels E Precision Access Biometrics E Visits wil Assets Directory A 4 gt Last name First name Middle name Lake Esa E Cardholder ID Badge type 123456789 Employee z r Precision Access Inclusion Groups r Assigned Groups ES Inclusion Group 1 EEE Inclusion Group 1 i D Reader 1 Always Inclusion Group 2 DA Inclusion Group 3 ee rn No Last Access E Inclusion Group 2 Inclusion Group 3 If Reader 1 Always I Reader 2 Always D Reader 3 Never Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate an Deactivate 77872001 Brint Encode Ia ER ul J 1of1
235. g why a particular checkpoint was reached late Show Video Displays live video of the tour as it progresses This button is displayed only when the tour is configured to show video 312 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Schedule an Automatic Guard Tour Action Assuming your System Administrator has configured a Guard Tour in System Administration you can schedule an automatic guard tour action in Alarm Monitoring This means that using the Scheduler you can set B A S LS to automatically launch a Guard Tour on at a specific date and time as well as on a regular basis 1 A O oN p 11 Open the Scheduler by clicking the Scheduler toolbar button or selecting Scheduler from View menu Click Add The Add Action Wizard window displays In the Category pane select Action Types In the Objects pane select Automatic Guard Tour Click Next The Automatic Guard Tour Properties window displays Select a tour or tour group Select the Monitoring stations to be notified Click the Schedule tab Select the World time zone If the automatic Guard Tour is a single occurrence select the One time radio button and set the start date and time If the automatic Guard Tour will occur several times click the Recurring radio button and click Change a Set how often you want the Guard Tour to occur and the start and end dates b Click OK c The frequency settings display in the in the Recur
236. ght and left arrow keys allow you to navigate from minutes to seconds The up and down arrow keys allow you to switch between AM and PM The tab key allows you to navigate between fields Start Date Start Time End Date and End Time Export Video To A File To convert video to afs files refer to disc 2 of your B A S LS installation CDs Note Recorded video and audio can be saved exported to a file By default the video clip is saved as info and spfs files for LDVR hardware or Inr files for LNVR hardware Using the conversion utility available on the B A S LS Installation CDs disc 2 video is converted exported as an afs file which can be played on any Microsoft Windows Media Player While viewing recorded in the Video Player select Set Start End Date from the Options menu The Date Time window appears Fill in the appropriate dates and times and click OK For more information please refer to Set Start and End Dates on page 91 From the Options menu select Export Video The Save As window displays Select the file location Enter the filename and click Save Capture an Image 92 revision 105 You can capture images from live and recorded video Images are saved as JPG files nn E YH Follow the procedures to aLaunch Video Live Recorded From a Camera in the Video Player on page 88 Verify one camera view is selected the status bar for a selected camera is bl
237. gistered trademarks of Inso Corporation
238. group action select this radio button if you want the door forced open alarms to be masked When door forced open alarms are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Unmask radio button When configuring a mask unmask door forced open for reader group action select this radio button if you want the door forced open alarms to be unmasked When door forced open alarms are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties Window Procedures Add a Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Action 1 Display the Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties window 2 From the Reader Group listing window click on an entry to select it 3 Do one of the following e Select the Mask radio button if you want door forced open alarms for the selected reader group to be masked When door forced open alarms are masked they are not reported to the Alarm
239. gt Cancel Help Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 339 A Actions Archive Purge Database Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Listing window display Displays the following message lt This action will archive purge the database using current archive purge configuration gt OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Archive Purge Database Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Archive Purge Database Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Archive Purge Database Properties Window Procedures Add an Archive Purge Database Action 340 revision 105 1 Display the Archive Purge Database Properties window 2 Click OK This action is now configured to archive purge the database using your current archive purge configurations For more information refer to the Archives Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Alarm Monitoring User Guide revision 105 341 A Actions Automatic Guard Tour Properties Window To display do one of the following Note 342 revision 105 Select the Action Types Automatic Guard Tour Categ
240. h Mask radio button When configuring a mask unmask door action select this radio button if you want the action to be that the door is masked When masked doors generate alarms they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Unmask radio button When configuring a mask unmask door action select this radio button if you want the action to be that the door is unmasked When unmasked doors generate alarms they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask Unmask Door Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Mask Unmask Door Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Mask Unmask Door Properties Window Procedures Add a Mask Unmask Door Action 1 Display the Mask Unmask Door Properties window 370 revision 105 2 From the Reader Controller listing window click on an entry to select it 3 Do one of the following Select the Mask radio button if you want the action to be that the door is masked When masked doors generate alarms they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Select the Unmask radio button if you want the action to be that the door is unmasked When
241. hange from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons 260 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Folder Date Time Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Apply start and end time to each day checkbox If selected the specified time range will be applied to any date that falls within the specified date range For example if you specify a Date Time Filter starting January 1 1998 at 8 00 AM and ending March 31 1998 at 7 00 PM e H this box is checked the report will include only data collected during the hours of 8 00 AM through 7 00 PM on any and all days between January 1 and March 31 e H this box is not checked the report will include all data gathered from 8 00 AM on January straight through until March 31 at 7 00 PM Badge ID numeric If you wish to report on the activity associated with a specific badge enter the Badge ID here This field is available only for applicable report types Text Field Filter section Includes the Where and Match criteria fields as well as a Blank field This section is enabled only when a report that allows filtering is selected in the listing window Where drop down list You can now add a text filter to the following e Action Type Details or Object for User Transactions reports e Alarm Acknowledgment text for Alarm Acknowledgments reports When this section is enabled the Where
242. hanges For example if an input becomes active and the view is displaying active devices the input will be added to the view If the input is now restored it will be removed from the view OK Accepts the settings and closes the window Cancel Closes the window without saving any changes made to the settings Help Displays help for this topic Display Option Procedures Select Event Types to Monitor If you have permission to edit alarm filters you can apply an alarm filter to each view in Alarm Monitoring including the main alarm view pending alarm view video verification view and any trace view Each of theses views can be revision 105 57 4 Set Alarm Monitoring Display Options The alarm filter determines which alarms display based on the type of event the alarm is associated with configured to filter out alarms independent of each other however only the main alarm view filter is saved from session to session For example you may wish to display every alarm for a specific reader s trace window but you may not wish to display Access Granted alarms in the Main Alarm Monitoring window You can apply both of these filters to the different views but when the session ends only the filters applied the main window are saved 1 Open the window from which you want to select the events displayed Verify this window is the active topmost window 2 From the Configure menu select
243. hapters 42 through 46 A separate Intrusion Detection User Guide also exists if you are going to configure intrusion detection devices e Configure hardware devices dialup modem access panels readers alarm panels e Additional access control configurations timezones specify holidays assign readers and modes of operation access levels anti passback areas normal safe and hazardous areas for mustering alarm mask groups un mask multiple alarm inputs simultaneously device groups input output readers local and or global inputs and outputs e Configure additional hardware fire panels intercom devices personal safety devices receivers intrusion detection devices Monitoring Procedures Checklist Alarm mask groups enable you to un mask multiple alarm inputs and readers simultaneously System Administrator monitoring procedures are completed via the Monitoring menu in the System Administration application Instructions can be found in the Monitoring sections of the System Administration User Guide chapters 37 through 39 e Customize alarms instructions acknowledgment notes and acknowledgment actions alarm mask groups customize and configure alarms text instructions audio acknowledgment notes automatic acknowledgment actions e Configure monitor zones event routing group revision 105 51 3 System Administrator Procedures monitor zo
244. he Allow access control badge assignment checkbox is selected on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder in System Administration e H enabled you can select the Assign this access control badge ID checkbox and then type the number of an existing badge that has the class Visitor in the field or leave the field blank e If the visitor already has an active access control badge from manual assignment or another visit this field will automatically be filled in with that ID e Ifthe checkbox is deselected the system will not attempt to assign an access control badge ID Click the Sign In The visit will be added the Time In field will be updated to the current date and time and any access control badge assigned will become active Modify a Visit Record Note Note This procedure does not apply to view only workstations Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens Locate the visit record you want to change and select it in the Visits listing window Multiple selection cannot be used when modifying visits Click the Modify Make the changes you want to the record Changes can be made on any tab in the Visits folder Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to revert to the previously saved values Delete a Visit Record Note 208 revision 105 1 2 This procedure does not apply to view edit only workstations Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder
245. he Area Filter section select the icon s corresponding to the anti passback area s whose data you wish to include in the report If you don t select any areas or click Report All data for all areas will be reported Click either the Print or Preview button depending on which function you wish to perform For more information refer to Chapter 18 Report Print Preview Window on page 303 Only data that s currently in the database can be included in the report Events or other transactions deleted because of space limitations or elapsed time are no longer available revision 105 257 15 Reports Folder Date Time Reports Form Alarm Acknowledgements Date Time Alarm Acknowledgments by Operator Alarm Acknowledgements Date Time All Events Over Time Alarm Panel Events Cardholder Reader Events Date Time Receiver Events Anti Passback Events Access Granted Denied Anti Passback Cardholder Date Time B Anti Passback Cardholder Date Time Access Granted Denied Cardholder Reader Events Asset Date Time 2 Cardholder Time and Attendance Cardholder Date Time Eee Monday August 25 2003 E Alarm Acknowledgment IT Monday August 25 2003 EZE Leed Date Time Reports Form Overview This form allows you to add filtering criteria to a date time report so that you can narrow the results of your report 258 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Date Time Reports Form Field Ta
246. he Scheduler and Global I O Note Reader First Card Unlock Mode is only supported on the BAS 2000 controller However first style unlock behavior can be configured for use with any access controller through Best s Global I O Support Activate Activates the selected alarm output Deactivate Deactivates the selected alarm output Pulse Pulses an output device Mask Masks an input device The System Status window displays masked beside the selected device UnMask Unmasks an input device Receiver A receiver is a piece of hardware used to receive events from multiple accounts account in multiple formats Downstream devices connect to receivers via phone lines information direct wire connections and LAN connections The receive account information displays information about a specific receiver View Map Displays a map associated with the selected device if one exists If more than one map exists the user is prompted to select a map Launch Video Displays video for the selected device if a camera is associated with the device revision 105 39 2 Main Alarm Monitoring Window Control menu Current Device sub menu Continued Sub menu Toolbar Function option button Download Downloads firmware to the following downstream devices Dual Interface Rdr1 Firmware readers BAS 1100 and BAS 1200 alarm panels and RS 485 command keypads Note Itis not possible to download firmware to
247. he View menu The Visits folder opens Click Search On any form in the Visits folder click the button to the right of the Visitor name field The Select Visitor Wizard Search form will be displayed For more information refer to Select Visitor Wizard Search Form on page 227 a Specify your search criteria by typing full or partial entries in the enabled fields Leave all fields blank to display all visitors b Ifa cardholder is specified in the Host name field on the forms in the Visits folder and you wish to only search for visitors who have visited that cardholder select the Previous visitors for current host only checkbox c Click Next d The Select Visitor Wizard Select form will be displayed For more information refer to Select Visitor Wizard Select Form on page 233 e Select the visitor and click Finish The visitor s name will appear in the Visitor name field on the Visit form f If you wish to locate all visits for the selected visitor click OK and the search results will be displayed in the Visits listing window Alternately you can specify additional search criteria Alarm Monitoring User Guide Search for Scheduled Active or Finished Visits Se O Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens Click the Status search tab Click Search In the Search for visits that are any combination of these section select that status you wish to search for a b c
248. he cardholder being visited and or the visitor E mail Form Field Table Form Element Type Comment Default Recipients checkbox Select this checkbox if you wish to send e mail messages to the default recipients e On segmented systems select Administration gt Segments click the Segments tab then click the Visits sub tab On the Visits sub tab you can add or remove recipients These recipients will be collectively considered the Default Recipients on the E mail form in the Visits folder e On non segmented systems select Administration gt System Options then click the Visits tab On the Visits tab you can view or modify the default recipients Whether this checkbox is selected by default when a new visit is added is determined by the Include default recipients by default checkbox on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder 218 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide E mail Form Field Table Continued Form Element Type Comment Cardholder for this visit checkbox Select this checkbox if you wish to have an e mail sent to the cardholder for this visit Whether this checkbox is selected by default when a new visit is added is determined by the Include host s e mail by default checkbox on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder Visitor for this visit checkbox Select this checkbox if you wish to have an e mail sent to the visitor for this visit
249. heckbox and enter a new status to be assigned to the selected group of badges e Select the Update Use Limit checkbox and enter a new use limit to be assigned to the selected group of badges 4 Ifyou want to filter which badges from the selected group will get modified do so in the Badge Filter section You can filter by badge status and or badge type If you do not want to filter badges check the Update badges of all Statuses and Update badges of all Types radio buttons 5 Click OK A message will be displayed asking if you want to continue with the modification 6 Click Yes The Bulk Action Results window opens and displays a summary of your modifications 160 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Bulk Action Results 7 Click OK Encode Badge Configurations 1 Locate the badge record that you want to encode onto a smart card 2 Click Encode If the selected badge record has a guest badge type the Increment Issue Code window opens If the selected badge record has a badge type other than guest the Encode Badge window opens Increment Issue Code Encode Badge 3 If the Encode Badge window is open select a format to encode and an Encoder then click Encode 4 If the Increment Issue Code window is open click Yes revision 105 161 12 Cardholders Folder Notes If you get a transport key verification error when you attempt to encode a Biocentric smart card
250. heckbox is selected on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder e If enabled you can print a disposable badge for the user by selecting the Print disposable badge s of this type checkbox then selecting a disposable badge type to be assigned and printed Disposable badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder For a badge type to be used to print disposable badges it must have Visitor selected for the Class and the Disposable checkbox must be selected on the Badge Type sub tab If segmentation is enabled the correct segment must be selected on the Segment Membership sub tab e H the checkbox is deselected the system will not print a disposable badge To override the badge type printer assignment select the Send all badges to this printer overriding badge type printer assignment checkbox and select the printer from the drop down list This checkbox and drop down list Alarm Monitoring User Guide are enabled if the Print disposable badge s of this type checkbox is selected and the user has the correct permissions 6 The Assign this access control badge ID checkbox and field are enabled if the Allow access control badge assignment checkbox is selected on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder e H enabled you can select the Assign this access control badge ID checkbox and then type the number of an existing badge that has the class Visitor in the field or leave the field blank e Ifthe vi
251. heir Windows or LDAP password The directory is hard coded to refer to the internal B A S LS user directory Notes Manual single sign on can be used with the following directories Microsoft Active Directory Microsoft Windows NT 4 Domain and LDAP Automatic single sign on can be used with every directory supported by B A S LS except LDAP because it doesn t provide all the account information required Single Sign On Procedures Configure Single Sign On By default user accounts do not use sign on To configure single sign on the System Administrator must add a directory and link a user account to the directory revision 105 27 1 Introduction Log In Using Automatic Single Sign On Monitor zone user assignments take precedence over monitoring station user assignments 28 revision 105 Note Automatic single sign on is supported with Windows domain accounts 1 Click the Start button then select Programs gt BASS ET gt Alarm Monitoring 2 Your system may be configured to prompt you to select a database to log into If it is not proceed to step 3 If it is a Inthe Database drop down all ODBC system databases currently defined on your computer are listed Select the database that you wish to use for your application b Click OK 3 If your Windows account is linked to a user a message will be displayed that says Attempting to automatically log you on using your Windows account To byp
252. hen configuring a function list as an action select this radio button if you want the action to execute the function list with an argument of True Execute False radio button When configuring a function list as an action select this radio button if you want the action to execute the function list with an argument of False Execute Pulse radio button When configuring a function list an action select this radio button if you want the action to execute the function list with an argument of Pulse OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Execute Function List Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Execute Function List Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Execute Function List Properties Window Procedures Add an Execute Function List Action 356 revision 105 1 Display the Execute Function List Properties window 2 Click on a function list in the Function List listing window to select it 3 Do one of the following Select the Execute True radio button if you want this action to execute the function list with an argument of True Select the Execute False radio button if you want this action to execute the function list with an argument of False Select the Execute Pulse radio button if you want this action to ex
253. his checkbox is selected and an ID is scanned the number of digits will be examined e If the number of digits is less than or equal to the Limit then the system will search on the Table and Field e Ifthe number of digits is greater than the Limit then the system will assume the ID was a CAC decrypt the social security number and search the social security number up 140 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Keyboard Wedge Settings Window Continued Form Element Type Comment Limit numeric spin The Limit field is only enabled when the If length of input exceeds buttons limit assume CAC barcode checkbox is selected If the Limit is set to zero then only CAC can be read Setting a limit greater than zero enables the system to recognize two different formats When an ID is scanned the number of digits will be examined e If the number of digits is less than or equal to the Limit then the system will search on the Table and Field using the Max length Start and End settings e If the number of digits is greater than the Limit then the system will assume the ID was a CAC decrypt the social security number and search the social security number up Ignore non checkbox If selected non numeric data is removed and not counted as a numeric data placeholder This is important for scans that include dashes in the social security number For example if an ID is scanned that has 123 45 6789 encoded
254. hived video Alarm acknowledged with notes and has archived video FER FREER k eS The alarm has outstanding acknowledgment actions and archived video revision 105 113 10 Monitor Alarms Pending Alarms Window An initiating alarm is automatically deleted upon arrival of its corresponding canceling alarm e g Door Forced Open Door Forced Open Cancelled Toolbar Shortcut ch Be og 1 BS 114 revision 105 The Pending Alarms window is similar to the Main Alarm Monitoring window in that it has the same menu options and toolbars However the Pending Alarms window only displays pending alarms alarms that require an operator to take action If the Pending Alarms Window is left open the window automatically updates itself For example when a pending alarm is acknowledged in the Main Alarm Monitoring window it immediately ceases to display in the Pending Alarms window If a pending alarm is an initiating alarm that becomes physically restored and must be acknowledged it continues to display as a pending alarm until it is acknowledged If a pending alarm is an initiating alarm that becomes physically restored but does not required acknowledgment the alarm ceases to be a pending alarm Like the Main Alarm Monitoring window you can determine the type of information displayed about alarms through the Configure gt Columns menu option However you cannot filter the type of alarms displayed thro
255. hunt Command System Generated when the door shunt command Executed From Reader Executed From Reader was executed from the reader Door Shunt Command Door Shunt Command System Generated when the door is closed while the Results Cancelled Results Cancelled door shunt command is executing Driver Error in Panel Driver Error in Panel System Generated by the communication server Download Download when an error occurs during a database download to a controller Employee Sign Off Employee Sign Off POS Generated when an employee signs on Employee Sign On Employee Sign On POS Generated when an employee signs off Extended Held Extended Held System Generated when an extended held command Command Denied Command Denied is denied Extended Held Extended Held System Generated when an extended held command Command Set From Command Set From is entered at a reader Reader Reader Extended Held Open Extended Held Open System Generated when extended held open mode Mode Disabled Mode Disabled is disabled Extended Held Open Extended Held Open System Generated when extended held open mode Mode Enabled Mode Enabled is enabled Failed to Report Failed to Report System Generated when a device that is supposed to Expected Event Expected Event report an event within a certain period of time fails to report an event during this time period revision 105 403 B Alarm Event Descriptions
256. ia the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 379 A Actions Pulse Open Door Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Reader controller display Displays a list of available readers which have been configured in the listing window system and the controllers that are associated with each OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Pulse Open Door Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Pulse Open Door Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Pulse Open Door Properties Window Procedures Add a Pulse Open Door Action 380 revision 105 1 2 3 Display the Pulse Open Door Properties window From the listing window click on an entry to select it Click OK The pulse open door action the door opens and then closes is now configured for the selected reader Alarm Monitoring User Guide Pulse Open Door Group Properties Window To display do one of the following e Select the Action Types Pulse Open Door Group Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard e Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Pulse Open Door Group from the Select Action Type window For more infor
257. icate that data for all account zones will be included in the report Report All ___ selected display Indicates Report All if no entries are selected in the Account Zone field Indicates selected if at least one entry is selected in the Account Zone field Account Zone listing window display Lists all account zones in the system An icon that indicates the account zone s type precedes each entry If your installation uses segmentation the segment assignment is listed for each entry Clear push button Clears all current filter criteria Print push button Displays the Print Report Options window Preview push button Displays the selected report with selected criteria in the Report Print Preview window Help push button Displays relevant on screen help for this form revision 105 277 15 Reports Folder Reports Folder Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Use restored records checkbox If this checkbox is selected data for an event or user transaction report is obtained from restored events transactions in the database rather than from the current live events transactions Restored events transactions are those restored using the Restore Archive button on the Restoring form of the Archives folder For more information refer to the Archives Folder chapter in the System Administratio
258. ice Scott N M 2 18 2003 1 30 01 w E Search for visits that are any combination of these T Scheduled future I Starting within 4 S I Scheduled late l I Active TC Ending within Iesel IT Use system default rate JT Active overstayed I Finished Refresh rate in minutes Search Add Modify Delete Print Sign In Sign Out I Mutiple Selection Status Search Form Overview Status Search Form Field Table The Status Search form is only enabled when the Search button is clicked It is used to e Search for Visits that meet a specified criteria scheduled in the future scheduled but late active finished etc e Set the refresh rate Form Element Type Comment Scheduled future checkbox If selected the search will find visits that are scheduled in the future i e have a scheduled time in that is in the future and have not been signed in yet Starting within checkbox spin Enabled for selection only when the Scheduled future checkbox is buttons drop down list selected If selected specify the number of hours days or minutes that the visit is scheduled to begin in For example you can search for all visits that are scheduled to begin within the next two days Scheduled late checkbox If selected the search will find visits that are late i e have a scheduled time in that is in the past and have not been signed in yet Active checkbox If selected the
259. icking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons revision 105 259 15 Reports Folder Reports Folder Date Time Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment End section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the End date checkbox and choose a specific end date from the drop down calendar April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 20 21 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 15 16 17 18 22 23 24 25 29 30 1 2 5 6 H 8 9 lt Today 37672003 e Select the last month for which data is to be included in this report Use the ER and Ej navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the last year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the year e and use the spin buttons ETE e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the last day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the End time checkbox and choosing a specific end time bh 2 08 02 AM Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To c
260. ide for procedures 3 To deny access complete one of the following when the Grant Deny pop up window displays e Let the timeout value expire by doing nothing e Right click a request and select Deny e Select highlight a request and click Deny A user transaction is logged when a grant or deny occurs tions to Control Devices and Areas You can control devices and areas through a wide variety of right click and left click menu options available in Alarm Monitoring You can right click and left click icons in map view right click alarms right click device groups as well as right click and left click hardware in the System Status window The menu options available when you right click or left click depend on the window you are in and the device or area you are clicking on Some right click and left click menus contain sub menus To execute commands you must first select the device from the right click or left click menu A sub menu of options displays to control that device Many of the right click and left click options are also available as options from the main menu General Right click Options These right click options can be available for alarms as well as multiple devices hardware e Acknowledge acknowledges the currently selected alarm e Trace traces the selected device e Update Hardware Status polls currently selected access panel controller and updates the hardware status If a downstream device li
261. ific date or time 202 for all visits to a selected cardholder 199 for an asset record 284 FOL EVICES eege Lh es 71 for empty values eee eeeeeeeteeeeees 134 for scheduled active or finished visits 201 on multiple fields 0 eee 134 199 report for specific information 308 specific portions of a camera view 96 text fields for contains 000000 134 199 VIKEO cA ee tits ie ie ee 95 Security clearance levels eee seee 184 Segments form Cardholders folder 150 field tabl s cinder canteen sik 150 OVELVIEW Seege hentia does HAs Sette 150 It 151 Select column configuration eee eee tees 58 events TO monitor 0 0 ee eeeseeeeeseceeesteeeseeeeees 57 Select a device in single or double left click mode 110 Select Date s window ccccceessseeesseceeeteeeeee 213 Select Host Wizard Search form e sss00000 224 field tablen eee 224 OVERVIEW enee Ee ele 224 Select Host Wizard Select form 04 226 feld fable liad scnsditaines 226 OVETVIEW visconti eed tie 226 Select Import Source window eee 234 field table 2 scien Aseenung 234 Select Time Range window seers 214 Select Visitor Wizard Add Tom 231 field table 23 2 aneesnheankns 231 OVEIVIEW ose ake th ees 231 Select Visitor Wizard Search form 227 feld tables gege aaia 227 E E 227 Select Visitor Wizard Select Tom 233
262. imary to Switched Primary to has been switched from the primary path to Secondary Secondary the secondary path Communications Path Communications Path System Generated when the communication path Switched Secondary to Switched Secondary to has switched from the secondary path to the Primary Primary primary path Communications Communications System Generated when communications to the Restored Restored device have been restored Communications Primary System Generated when the primary path restored Restored Primary Path Communication Path Restored communication with the host 400 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Alarm Event Event Type Description Communications Secondary System Generated when the secondary path restored Restored Secondary Communication Path communication with the host Path Restored Complimentary Tender Complimentary Tender POS Generated when the tender was complimentary Controller Connection Controller Connection System Associated text in the event indicates the Mismatch Mismatch details of the error Controller Encryption Controller Encryption System Associated text in the event indicates the Error Error details of the error Credit Card Tendered Credit Card Tendered POS Generated when a credit card was used as tender Current Time Current Time POS An event that reports the current time Database Error Event Dat
263. ime spin buttons in scheduled time out or time out Allows you to search for visits that start on or after or after a specified time If None is selected no time restraints are put on the visit records that are returned Visits that started at any time on the specified date will be returned End time drop down listbox Used when searching for the time portion of a scheduled time in time spin buttons in scheduled time out or time out Allows you to search for visits that end on or before or before a specified time If None is selected no time restraints are put on the visit records that are returned Visits that ended at any time on the specified date will be returned OK push button Enters the code for the selected search criteria in the respective field on the Visit form in the Visits folder Cancel push button Closes the Select Time Range window without selecting a time search criteria 214 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Status Search Form Eg Yisits oix Visitor T Scheduled Time In_ Scheduled Time Out Timen Timeout R Scheduled Jablonski JunekF Smith Mary J 2 19 2003 8 00 00 AM 2 19 2003 5 30 00 PM Late Lake Lisa A Downes Lisa A Active Merzer Kristen I Rice Scott N R Finished Allen Leslie R Johnson Peter L Mm E Status search e visit K Details E mail E Reports Host name Status Merzer Kristen Etive Visitor name R
264. imes that the database is queried for changes in the Refresh rate minutes field Click OK The visit records that meet the search criteria will be displayed in the Visits listing window revision 105 201 14 Visits Folder Search for All Visits for a Specific Date or Time 202 revision 105 ee ot Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens Click the Visit tab Click Search To search for the date of a specific scheduled time in click the button to the right of the Scheduled time in field a The Select Date s window opens Select Date s xi Number of days oi Today x Ei C Gn zj Start date Number of days End date Cancel b Select a search option Choices include e Today previous number of days or next number of days e Ona specified date e Starting on a specified date and including a specified number of days from that date e Starting on a specified date and ending on a specified date c Click OK d The code for the search criteria that you just specified will be displayed in the Scheduled time in field To search for the time of a specific scheduled time in click the button to the right of the time field as shown Scheduled time in 872272002 1 Ka a The Select Time Range window opens Start time fOnorater 4 31 PM End time JOnorbefore zl Tam E Cancel b In the Start time drop down list select whether the vi
265. ind the visitor or cardholder for 3 Right click on the visit record e If you wish to view the cardholder record select Find Cardholder e If you wish to view the visitor record select Find Visitor 4 The record of the corresponding cardholder or visitor will be displayed in the Cardholder or Visitor window Add a Visit Record To add a visit information about the visit needs to be entered on the Visit Details and E mail forms in the Visits folder it does not matter which form you start with When the Visits folder opens the Visit form displays by default so this procedure begins on that form revision 105 203 14 Visits Folder 204 revision 105 Note This procedure does not apply to view edit only workstations 1 Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens 2 On the Visit form a A new visit record can either be based on an existing visit record or it can be an entirely new record To create a record based on an existing visit record select a visit record in the Visits listing window then click Add The fields prepopulate with the information from the selected visit You can select new values for any field To create a record that is not based on an existing visit record make sure that no visit record is selected in the Visits listing window then click Add The fields will be blank to begin with Note Steps b and c can be done in either order b Click the button to
266. ined reader reports and each report s type Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type Today push button Click this button to e Set the Start time date to 12 00 00 AM on the current date e Set the End time date to 11 59 59 PM on the current date Start section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the Start date checkbox and choose a specific start date from the drop down calendar April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 30 3 1 2 3 8 9 10 15 16 17 22 23 24 29 30 1 F C Today 3 6 2003 e Select the first month for which data is to be included in this report Use the mi and RS navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the year and use the spin buttons 2003 e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the first day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date revision 105 243 15 Reports Folder Readers Folder Reader Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Start con t section e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the Start time checkbox and choosing a specific start time 08 ES M 208 02AM Highlight the hou
267. ing assignments if you modified the activation and or deactivation dates and you want your changes to overwrite existing assignments Select the Delete existing assignments checkbox if you want to delete all existing access level assignments for the selected cardholder badge records and replace them with your bulk selections Click OK All active badges will be affected by this change even in multiple active badge environments revision 105 169 12 Cardholders Folder Remove Access Levels From a Selected Group of Cardholders 1 2 Note Locate the group of cardholders that you want to remove access levels from Select Bulk gt Remove Access Levels from the Cardholder menu The Bulk Access Levels Selections window opens Click on the access level you want to remove to select it You can select multiple entries Optional If you want to remove all the access levels that belong to an access group a Click Access Groups The Select Access Levels in a Group window opens b The Select Access Levels in a Group window lists all currently defined access groups You can expand an entry to display the list of access levels that make up a group Select an access level or an access group If you select an access group you select all of the access levels it contains c Click Select d Click Yes Click OK All active badges will be affected by this change even in multiple active badge environments Modi
268. int Status 1 0118P 01 18 P 2 2 Eltron plastic card printer Complete Job sent to print queue RN apos A single print job entry represents all the badges selected in the Print selection section 190 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 14 Visits Folder The Visits folder contains the Status search form the Visit form the Details form the E mail form and the Reports form with which you can Display visit records for a selected date range Search for visit records based on the scheduled time in scheduled time out time in time out or date and time it was last changed Display visit records that are scheduled in the future scheduled and are late active active and overstayed and finished Filter and display visit records for a selected cardholder visitor or both Display the cardholder or visitor record associated with a visit Refresh the Visits listing window Send e mail notifications regarding visits Add or modify visits Delete a visit or multiple visits Print a disposable badge or multiple disposable badges Sign out and sign in a visit or multiple visits Generate a report for either a defined search criteria or for all visits Toolbar Shortcut This folder is displayed by selecting Visits from the View menu hy Visits Visits Folder Overview The forms in the Visits folder are divided into two sections the form elements that are common to every form in the Visits folder
269. int is hit ahead of schedule on a tour i e it is supposed to be hit reached out of later in a tour Sequence Checkpoint When a checkpoint is assigned a status of Checkpoint reached out of sequence the Missed Checkpoint Missed event is generated for all previous checkpoints that have a status of Checkpoint Not Reached revision 105 311 19 Guard Tour Guard Tour Events Table Continued Event Description Checkpoint Reached on Time Generated when a checkpoint is hit between its minimum and maximum checkpoint times Note Checkpoint reached events are e Generated for readers in all modes except locked and unlocked on Apollo panels e Generated when any inputs that are used as checkpoints are activated Checkpoint Generated when a checkpoint is the next checkpoint on a tour and is hit before its minimum Reached Early checkpoint time has elapsed Note Checkpoint reached events are e Generated for readers in all modes except locked and unlocked on Apollo panels e Generated when any inputs that are used as checkpoints are activated Checkpoint Generated when a checkpoint s maximum checkpoint time has elapsed and the guard has not Overdue yet arrived Checkpoint Generated for a checkpoint when its maximum checkpoint time has elapsed and it is then hit Reached Late Note Checkpoint reached events are e Generated for readers in all m
270. inter in the drop down list and choose whether to Prompt for Number of Pages If the linkage server is running under a local system account it may not have permission to access a network printer depending on its configuration If this is the case you must select a local or default network printer Contact Alarm Monitoring User Guide your System Administrator to determine what account the linkage server is running under and the printers it can access In the Report Subtitle section type the report subtitle The subtitle will be displayed below the report title on the report Click OK The options selected in the Print Destination section will determine where the report is sent revision 105 301 17 Print Report Options Window 302 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 18 Report Print Preview Window Toolbar Shortcut Print Preview Toolbar Shortcut PR Print If you click Preview or Print Preview while a report form is displayed the report is automatically printed to the Report Print Preview window Previewing a report is done in a window This allows you to preview multiple reports at the same time It also means that while the report is processing you can do other work From the Report Print Preview window you can View an on screen report created in the Reports folder View an on screen report created in the Cardholders folder Reports form The Visits folder Reports form or the As
271. ion 105 347 A Actions Deactivate Badge Properties Window Note The Deactivate Badge action allows you to deactivate a cardholder s badge when it is either lost or returned To display the Deactivate Badge Properties window click Add on the Output Action tab in the Global I O form and choose Change Network Video Password An action of this type can only be utilized from the Global I O In order to execute the action Global I O should have a linkage configured on a device event and badge ID that is passed to the action at runtime Deactivate Badge Properties Eg Deactivate Badge This action will deactivate a badge associated with the given badge ID Badge ua IER Deactivate Badge Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Badge Status drop down Use to select the status of a badge that will be deactivated Choices are Lost and Returned OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Deactivate Badge Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Deactivate Badge Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window 348 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Deactivate Badge Properties Window Procedures Add a Deactivate Badge Action 1 From the Access Control menu select Global I O The Global Linkage form displays Click Add C
272. ion and in the main window of the Controller Encryption Configuration Utility which can be found in the B A S LS directory The flash chip size is indicated in the Alarm Monitoring controller properties dialog box which you get to by right clicking on the controller and selecting properties It can also be found in the diagnostic tab of the access panels folder in System Administration and in the main window of the Controller Encryption Configuration Utility which can be found in the BA SIS directory Alarm Monitoring User Guide Note If the current firmware revision in the controller is older then 3 041 the controller will not report its flash size and it will not be indicated in any utility The current DIP switch settings for a given controller are indicated in the Alarm Monitoring controller properties dialog box which you get to by right clicking on the controller and selecting properties It can also be found in the Diagnostic tab of the access panels folder in System Administration and in the main window of the Controller Encryption Configuration Utility which can be found in the B A S LS directory revision 105 73 5 Monitor Devices 74 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 6 Trace Alarms and Events Trace Configuration Window The Trace Configuration window performs live and historical traces of events and is displayed by e Selecting the Trace menu and then the type of device you wish to trace
273. ipient window without adding a recipient 220 revision 105 Reports Form Alarm Monitoring User Guide Eg Yisits BEE visitor Scheduled Time In Scheduled Time Out TimeIn Lmeat a Smith Mary J 2 19 2003 8 00 00 AM 2 19 2003 5 30 DI e gt be amp iScheduled Jablonski Junek F Downes Lisa A 2 18 y 2 18 2 18 A 2 1 M 2 18 2003 1 16 41 PM 2003 5 00 00 PM 2 18 2003 1 20 47 PM 2 18 2003 1 30 E Status search E Visit E Details C3 E mail HI Reports Host name Status Merzer Kristen ative Visitor name I Limit report to current search A Access Denials and Grants by Reader Access Granted Denied Cardholder E Access Denials Grants and Other Badge Events Access Granted Denied Cardholder Rece E Access Denied Events Access Granted Denied Cardholder Rece Access Denied Events by Reader Access Granted Denied Cardholder E Access Granted Events Access Granted Denied Cardholder Rece Access Granted Events by Reader Access Granted Denied Cardholder Access Level Assignments to Cardholders Cardholder Description Badge telated Events grouped by Reader e Search Add Modify Delete Print Sian In Sign Du I Multiple Selection Reports Form Overview The Reports form shows only visit related reports For a specific list of visit related reports refer to Appendix C Visit Relat
274. ir options revision 105 109 9 Control Devices and Areas Note KR File Edit View Trace Configure Control Options Window Help ik All Segments SEBAS 1000 Firmware Bavicion 3 0122 BAS 1100 Firmw Acknowledge B45 1200 Firmw _ Tace G0 BAS 1300 HID Fi Update Hardware Status s mode pin or card EN BAS 1320 2005 e Properties Open Doors Set Controller Clock H gt H Relay Gutput s gt Reader Auxiliary 1 Output s a Mask en ve RE Viewing all Active count Both Reader Auxiliary Outputs k ke Main Alarm Monitor RS Syster View Map j Ee Launch Video Deactivate auxiliary 2 outputs for the DUGH DISABLED Connection errors C aeae_eee lt wner Download Firmware Download Database Reset Use Limit Lopert Disconnect Using the System Administration application your System Administrator can associate commands with a device or area icon so that when the icon is single or double left clicked in Alarm Monitoring the command is executed For information on how to associate a command with a device or area icon refer to the Monitoring Options Folder Chapter in the System Administration User Guide Activate Single or Double Left click Mode Single or double left click mode is configurable per user To activate single left click mode select place a checkmark beside the Execute Command on Single Click of Icon in the Optio
275. is checked the trace will show events which have video marked for them regardless of the current alarm video configuration in the System Administration application This means that a video only trace may exclude some alarms seen in the main alarm view with a icon in front of them Alarm Filter Enables you to configure the type of events that will be displayed for a trace When clicked the Alarm Filter window opens OK Performs the trace using the settings selected and closes the Trace Configuration window A Trace Monitor window will open which looks identical to the Main Alarm Monitoring window but displays only those alarms that are associated with the trace criteria specified Cancel Cancels the pending requested action Help Displays help for this topic 76 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Procedure for Tracing Trace Alarms and Events B A S LS allows you to trace the alarms and events associated with a monitor zone controller device badge asset or area This includes events from third party OpenIT sources 1 Select highlight an alarm event or device you want to trace 2 Do one of the following e Right click and select Trace Then select Controller Device Badge Asset or Area e From the Trace menu select Controller Device Badge Asset or Area e Click the toolbar button that corresponds to what you want to trace Choices include oF lt _ Traces a Control
276. is clicked Choose the report Format and Destination from the drop down lists Depending on what you choose enter the destination and format information in the corresponding window then click OK Print Directly to a Printer radio button If selected also select a printer from the Printer drop down list If you select the Prompt for Number of Pages checkbox the Print window will be displayed where you can select the print range number of copies and whether or not to collate your report Printer drop down list drop down list Select a printer in this field for the report to be printed on This field is enabled for selection only when the Print Directly to a Printer radio button is selected All printers currently configured for use are listed Prompt for Number checkbox This field is enabled for selection only when the Print Directly to a of Pages Printer radio button is selected If selected the Print window will be displayed where you can select the print range number of copies and whether or not to collate your report Report Subtitle section Includes the Report Subtitle textbox Report Subtitle textbox Type the text here that will be displayed as the subtitle on the report textbox OK push button Prints the report using the options you selected Cancel push button Closes the Print Report Options window without printing the report Help push button Displays online help for this form
277. ision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 13 Badge Print Preview Window Badge Print Preview Window The Badge Print Preview window is used to e View on screen a badge to be printed from the Cardholders folder e Printa badge This window is displayed by clicking Print in the Cardholders folder and then clicking Print Preview or by selecting Print from the Application menu The Application menu is only available in System Administration and ID CredentialCenter s Badge Print Preview Cardholder lise Lake Badge ID 1 Issue Code 0 Badge Type Employee Printer Wad generalhpiS000 Element Type Comment Preview window display Displays the currently selected badge layout with cardholder information Print All push button Prints all the badges selected according to the Badge Printing window Print Current push button Prints the badge that is currently displayed in the preview window Close push button Click on this button to exit from the Badge Print Preview window Next Page push button Allows you to view the next badge if multiple badges are being printed or to view the back layout of a two sided badge Previous Page push button Allows you to view the previous badge if multiple badges are being printed or to view the front layout of a two sided badge Help push button Displays online help for this topic Zoom spin buttons Enter a value to zoom in or z
278. isit s Time in gets updated to the current date and time Scheduled time out drop down list Select the date and time that the visit is expected to end Time out drop down list When a visit is signed out the visit s Time out gets updated to the current date and time Last changed display Indicates the date and time on which this visit record was last modified and saved This date and time are only updated when visit information is changed not when badge information is changed The last changed date is saved individually for each badge record as well 212 revision 105 Select Date s Window Alarm Monitoring User Guide This window is only displayed when the Visit form in the Visits folder is in Search mode In Search mode click the to the right of the first Scheduled time in Time in Scheduled time out or Time out field Select Date s xi Ce Today hi Ei e Dr S Start date Number of days Visit Form Select Date s Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Day radio button drop Used when searching for a scheduled time in time in scheduled time down listbox spin out or time out Selects visits that occurred today on a previous number buttons of days or on a specified number of days in the future Specific Date radio button drop Used when searching for the date portion of a scheduled time in time down listboxes in scheduled time out or time out Se
279. isplays a list of available reader groups which have been configured in listing window the system Mask radio button When configuring a mask unmask door held open for reader group action select this radio button if you want the door held open alarms to be masked When door held open alarms are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Unmask radio button When configuring a mask unmask door held open for reader group action select this radio button if you want the door held open alarms to be unmasked When door held open alarms are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties Window Procedures Add a Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Action 1 Display the Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties window 2 From the Reader Group listing window click on an entry to select it 3 Do one of the following e Select the Mask radio butto
280. ist are deselected Report All is displayed to the left of this button to indicate that data for all access panels will be included in the report Report All __ selected display Indicates Report All if no entries are selected in the Panel field Indicates __ selected if at least one entry is selected in the Panel field Panel listing window display Lists all panels in the system An icon that indicates the panel s type precedes each entry If your installation uses segmentation the segment assignment is listed for each entry Report All events push button If this button is pushed all entries in the Event list are deselected Report All is displayed to the left of this button to indicate that data for all events for the selected Event Type will be included in the report Report All __ selected display Indicates Report All if no entries are selected in the Event field Indicates __ selected if at least one entry is selected in the Event field Event Type drop down list Can be used to filter all events of a particular type For example if you select the All Events Over Time report and select an Event Type of Fire an All Fire Events Over Time report will effectively be created Event listing window display listing Lists currently defined events for the selected Event Type and each window event s type Clear p
281. it Properties Window c ceccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenaaees 393 Reset Use Limit Properties Window Procedures cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 394 Add a Reset Use Limit Action o cece ee eceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeaaeeeeeenaaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeseeaaeeeeneeaaaes 394 Sign Out Visitor Properties Wimdow cccescceesesseeeesesseeeeesseeeeeesseeeeees 395 Sign Out Visitor Properties Window Procedures ssseeeseesseeeeeeereeeeeeeeeen 396 Add a Sign Out Visitor ACtiON aiin iaia aae aai a aea aa a a aaa aaah 396 Appendix B Alarm Event Descriptions 0seseee 397 Appendix C Reports sssssssnnnnnnsnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 415 Jee 423 20 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction Alarm Monitoring Overview The Alarm Monitoring application displays information about individual alarms and events as they occur Operators can acknowledge alarms and manually change the status of devices as well as monitor video and launch Guard Tours With the correct permissions Operators can also perform a variety of administrative tasks such as adding modifying deleting and tracking cardholders visitors and assets as well as print badges Conventions Used in this Documentation e Where a term is defined the word is represented in italics e Field names menus and menu choices are shown in bold e Keyboard keys are represented in angle brackets For example
282. it s This will also deactivate any badges the visitors have will be displayed Click Yes to complete the sign out The Time out will be updated to the current date time If the visitor has an active badge the deactivate date will be updated and the badge status will be set to the status setup that was selected on the Cardholder Options form The signed out visit will appear in the Visits listing window revision 105 211 14 Visits Folder Visit Form Ea Yisits R Scheduled E Status search E Visit b Detais C3 E mail E Reports Host name Visitor name F ice Scott N MEE Jablonski Junek F Lake Lisa A ative Scheduled time in iy 2 18 2003 Iv 2718 2003 Search Add Modify Delete Print Sign In Leimu T Muliple Selection Scheduled time out 2 pai 1 25 14 PM 2 20000PM 5 Time out 52 m Lem H 2 18 2003 1 25 23 PM Visit Form Overview The Visit form is displayed by default when the Visits folder opens It is used to e Add or modify visits e Display visit records for a selected date range e Search for visit records based on the scheduled time in scheduled time out time in time out or date and time last changed Visit Form Field Table Form Element Type Comment Scheduled time in drop down listbox Select the date and time that the visit is expected to start Time in drop down listbox When a visit is signed in the v
283. itor Zones Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide If you are prompted that the monitoring station you are logging into is set up for event queuing a Select No if you want all the queued events deleted b Select Yes if you want all queued event for the monitor zone displayed Troubleshoot Logging In If you attempted to log in and were unable to do so make sure that the following conditions have been met You entered a correct user name password and specified the correct directory If your system is configured to display an authorization warning you accepted the terms A valid license is installed For more information refer to The License Administration Application appendix in the Installation amp Setup User Guide You have permission to use the application If you attempted to log into the server and the login failed make sure that a properly coded licensed dongle adapter is attached to your computer s parallel port Make sure that your dongle is securely attached If you attempted to log into a client and failed make sure the client has a valid software license Client computers do not need a hardware dongle attached to the computer s parallel port Instead the client must have a valid software license which is installed in the License Administration application If you are using single sign on ensure that the directory you are authenticating against is operational and properly config
284. itoring window double click an online camera to view live video e In an alarm window map or System Status window right click a device icon and select Launch Video to view live or recorded video e Inthe Device Group window right click a camera icon and select Launch Video to view live or recorded video e Inthe Video Monitoring window double click an online camera or right click a camera icon and select Launch Video e Drag and drop a camera into the Video Player Toolbar Shortcut e Ifthe Video Player is matrix view click the Single View toolbar button Click the Previous Camera or Next Camera toolbar buttons to view a specific camera e Inthe Video Player select Camera from the View menu A sub menu lists the currently displayed cameras Select the camera of your choice About Surveillance only Cameras Surveillance only cameras stand alone IP cameras support live video only they cannot record or playback video or support PTZ whereas IP cameras Internet Protocol cameras support all of these features IP cameras are directly connected to the network with their own IP address They do not need to be connected to a 90 revision 105 Toolbar Shortcut 1 Live Alarm Monitoring User Guide computer or a video capture card More advanced IP cameras may provide additional functionality such as a built in web server motion detection alarm inputs outputs and e mail and FTP support View the Video Tour The Video Tou
285. k Add In the Asset Class field enter the name of the class you are adding You can add as many classes as you want but you can only assign as many as 32 classes to a group To assign a class to a group select the name of a group in the Asset Groups listing window Click Modify Select the name of the class you want to add in the Asset Class listing window es Click the push button To remove the asset from the group select gt the class in the Asset Class listing window then click the push button Click OK revision 105 289 16 Assets Folder Assignments Form Assets olx el Assets i Asset Classes i Assignments 2 Reports Scan ID Name Type 123456 Computer z Subtype Laptop Laptop si ka 1 10 2002 12 13 27 PM No Last Access Assign To Lisa Lake Assets Folder Assignments Form Form Element Type Comment Scan ID numeric Displays the assets scan ID If you click Search you can enter the scan ID you want to search Name text Displays the name of the asset If you click Search you can enter the name of the asset you want to search Type drop down list Displays the type of asset If you click Search you can enter the type of asset you want to search Subtype drop down list Displays the subtype of the asset If you click Search you can enter the subtype of the asset you want to search Listing window display Displays a
286. ke a reader is selected the update hardware status is done for the controller associated with that device e View Map displays a map associated with the selected device if one exists If more than one map exists the user is prompted to select a map e Launch Video displays video for the selected device if a camera is associated with the device revision 105 105 9 Control Devices and Areas Monitor Zone Right click Options e Update All Hardware Status updates the display to show the currently status of all devices e Set All Controller Clocks sets all clocks to the current system time e Trace Monitor Zone traces a monitor zone Access Panel and Alarm Panel Right click Options e Properties available for access and intrusion panels e Open Door s opens the door s associated with the selected access panel If using Recognition Source readers this option will not be available because these specific readers are not in constant communication with the PIM devices e Set Controller Clock sets selected access panel controller clock to current time If a device other than an access panel controller is selected this option sets the clock on the access panel controller to which the device is attached e Reader Access Modes updates the reader mode of every reader associated with selected access panel controller or reader e Reader Verify Mode used to enable or disable verify mode for access control rea
287. l Reports form for filtering Anti Passback checkbox If this checkbox is selected Anti Passback reports will be included in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Anti Passback Reports form for filtering Asset checkbox If this checkbox is selected Asset reports will be included in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Asset Reports form for filtering Cardholder checkbox If this checkbox is selected Cardholder reports will be included in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Reports form of the Cardholder folder for filtering Date Time checkbox If this checkbox is selected Date Time reports will be included in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Date Time Report form for filtering 238 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Folder Report View Filter Window Continued Form Element Type Comment General checkbox If this checkbox is selected general reports will be included in the listing window Guest checkbox If this checkbox is selected guest reports will be included in the listing window Reader checkbox If this checkbox is selected Reader reports will be included in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Reader Reports form for filtering Reader Events checkbox If this checkbox is selected Reader Events reports will be included in the listing window
288. l be returned when searching for a cardholder and attempting to add a new visit When the Allow visitors checkbox is not selected no visits to the cardholder can be scheduled revision 105 177 12 Cardholders Folder Note Changing the Allow visitors checkbox setting for a cardholder will only change the cardholder s ability to have visitors after the setting has been changed any previously scheduled visits will be allowed to occur 7 Click OK 178 revision 105 Assets Form Alarm Monitoring User Guide E Cardholders First name Middle name lisa A Cardholder ID Badge type 123456789 Employee Asset group P L _Scan1D__ AssetName _ Asset Type Asset SubType Assigned Tue Marketing Department Laptop N A 10 17 2001 Son Lote No Last Access Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate Fn Fame EIS gt gt gt i J 1 of 1 Deactivate Search Assign Modify Unassign Print Encode Cardholders Folder Assets Form Form Element Type Comment Asset group drop down list Indicates the asset group to which the cardholder or visitor belongs Asset listing display Lists all assets that are currently assigned to the selected cardholder or window visitor Assign push button When selected assigns an asset to a cardholder Unassign push button When selected unassigns an asset Assets Form Procedures Assign an Asset to a Cardholder A AS
289. lay is on activated toggling deactivates it If the relay is off deactivated toggling activates it Note Only offboard relays on the Radionics 7412 and 9412 intrusion panels support the toggle option OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Device Output Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Device Output Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Device Output Properties Window Procedures Add a Device Output Action 1 Display the Device Output Properties window 2 Click on an entry in the Output listing window to select it 3 Do one of the following Select Activate from the drop down menu if you want this action to be that the device output will activate When a device output is activated that means it is in an on state Select Deactivate from the drop down menu if you want this action to be that the device output will deactivate When a device output is deactivated that means it is in an off state Select Pulse from the drop down menu if you want this action to be that the device output will pulse turn on and then turn off again Select Toggle from the drop down menu in you want this action to be that revision 105 351 A Actions 352 revision 105 the device output will toggle the state of the relay For ex
290. lder Modify push button Displayed in view mode on every form in the Cardholders folder Note This button will be displayed but will not be enabled on the Directory Accounts form and the Reports form because directory account and report records cannot be modified Delete push button Enabled in view mode on the Cardholder Visitor and Badge form and is used to delete a record Note This button is displayed but not enabled on the Segments form the Access Levels form the Precision Access form the Biometrics form the Guard Tours form and the Reports form because these records are not deleted in the Cardholders folder Print push button Displayed in view mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected displays the Badge Printing window from where you can print the active badge for the current record or the active badges for all records found in a search You can also log and print errors encountered during the print operation Note When you select this button on the Reports form the Print Report Options window is displayed For more information refer to Chapter 17 Print Report Options Window on page 297 Encode push button Note Displayed in view mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected displays the Encode Badge window from where you can encode the badge configurations selected for the cardholder onto a smart card For more information refer to the Card Formats Folder chapter in the System Administratio
291. lder click the Print active badges for all cardholders matching current search criteria radio button If you click Show badge type printer assignments the following information displays within the Badge Printing window Badge Type Primary Segment and Assigned Printer Notice the Badge Printing window changes when the Show badge type printer assignments button is selected e The Alternate printer section allows you to override badge type printer assignments and send all badges to an alternate printer This section is only active when an alternate printer is configured and the user has permission to choose an alternate printer e The Error Reporting section allows you to configure how printing errors are handled All badge printing is logged to the transaction log print previews are not logged Click the Report all errors immediately pause printing radio button if you want to be prompted to either abort printing or skip to the next badge or badge type when an error occurs Click the Log errors to error log only continue printing radio button if you want errors logged and badge printing to continue on to the next badge or if the error is associated with the badge type the printing will move onto the next badge type 4 It is recommended that you preview your badges first before printing them If there is no need to preview the badge s you may print at this time by revision 105 189 13 Badge Print Preview Window
292. lect Badge Info Click Search From the Person type drop down list located in the lower right portion of the screen select the type of record you want to search Choices are e All when selected your search will locate both Cardholder and Visitor records e Cardholders when selected your search will only locate cardholder records e Visitors when selected your search will only locate visitor records The Person type drop down list is subject to licensing restrictions If this field is not displayed move on to the next step Specify your search criteria by typing full or partial entries in the enabled fields Click OK B A S LS retrieves and displays the first matching record Use the EH w A H and Hl buttons to navigate through the database A dimmed button means that the associated operation is not possible e g moving to the next record while the last record is being displayed Retrieve the Most Recent Search Results Click Search Click Last Search The criteria you selected from the most recent search operation will be inserted into the appropriate fields If you want modify your search criteria Click OK B A S LS retrieves and displays the first matching record Use the EH w A H and Hl buttons to navigate through the database A dimmed button means that the associated operation is not possible e g moving to the next record while the last record is being displayed revision
293. lect a precision access group e The window contains all currently defined precision access groups You can expand an entry to display the list of readers if entries are Exclusion groups or readers and timezones if entries are Inclusion groups that make up the group e You can select only one group at a time e By selecting a precision access group you select all of the reader timezone combinations it contains These combinations are defined on the Precision Access form of the Access Levels folder 6 Click Assign The group s you selected will be listed in the Assigned Groups window 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each additional group you want to assign to the badge You can assign multiple Exclusion or Inclusion groups in addition to the 6 access levels that a cardholder can normally have 8 Click OK Remove Precision Access Groups From a Badge 1 Locate the record of the cardholder whose precision access assignment you want to remove 2 In the Assigned Groups window select the precision access group to be removed 3 Click Remove 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each precision access group you want to remove 5 Click OK 172 revision 105 Biometrics Form E Cardholders Cardholder ID 123456789 Employee Alarm Monitoring User Guide First name Middle name lisa A Badge type Fingerprint Bic ntric Image g f d Fingerprint Biocentric Template e ES No Last Access
294. lection Displays a window in which all available maps are listed This menu option is dimmed if no maps are available Scheduler Displays the Scheduler window which is used to add modify and delete scheduled actions within the BAS IS system An action is any task that can be performed by software as a result of an event of schedule for example download a database mask unmask alarm inputs pulse open a door and reset the use limit Note The Scheduler window is also available by selecting Administration gt Scheduler in System Administration For more information refer to the Scheduler Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Reports Displays the Reports folder window of data entry forms tabs Sort by Sorts alarms according to criteria chosen in the submenu Toolbar Displays the toolbar when selected checked Status Bar Displays the status bar when selected checked Trace menu Menu option Toolbar button Function Monitor Zone Monitors or traces alarms for the selected monitor zone 36 revision 105 Trace menu Continued Alarm Monitoring User Guide Menu option Toolbar button Function Controller Monitors or traces alarms for the selected access panel controller An access panel controller is a device that acts as the focal point for a group of card readers The Controller menu option or toolbar button
295. lects visits that occurred on a specified date Choices include on on or after after on or before or before a specified date Number of Days radio button drop Used when searching for the date portion of a scheduled time in time After a Date down listbox spin in scheduled time out or time out Selects visits between a specified buttons start date and a specified number of days after the start date Between Two Dates radio button drop down listboxes Used when searching for the date portion of a scheduled time in time in scheduled time out or time out Selects all visits that occurred between the specified Start date and the End date OK push button Enters the code for the selected search criteria in the respective field on the Visit form in the Visits folder Cancel push button Closes the Select Date s window without selecting a date search criteria revision 105 213 14 Visits Folder Select Time Range Window This window is only displayed when the Visit form in the Visits folder is in Search mode In Search mode click the to the right of the second Scheduled time in Time in Scheduled time out or Time out field Start time Onorat zl Tam End time On or before zl Tam Visit Form Select Time Range Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Start time drop down listbox Used when searching for the time portion of a scheduled time in t
296. led for the panel Denied Reader Denied Reader Access Generated when access was denied because Excluded Excluded Denied the reader exclusion list was violated This happens when using precision access exclusion and the cardholder has access to the reader via an access level but the precision access exclusion list has removed access revision 105 401 B Alarm Event Descriptions Alarm Event Event Type Description Denied Unauthorized Denied Unauthorized Access Generated when access was denied because Assets Assets Denied of unauthorized assets Denied Under Duress Access Denied Under Duress Generated when the cardholder was denied Duress access under duress Denied Unmask Active Denied Unmask Access Generated when the unmask command Zones in Group Active Zones in Group Denied failed because there are still active zones in the group Deny Count Exceeded Deny Count Exceeded Access Generated when a specified number of Denied invalid attempts are made in a row at a reader Deposit Amount Paid Deposit Amount Paid POS Event indicating that a deposit amount paid Pending Purchase Pending Purchase pending purchase has occurred Deposit Return Deposit Return POS Transaction for a deposit return Detector Test Detector Test Fire Generated when the fire detection test is initiated Detector Test Fail Detector Test Fail Fire Generated when the fire detectio
297. lement Type Comment Only the badge that triggered this action radio button Select if you want to deactivate only the badge that caused the visitor to sign out All the active badges radio button Select if you want all the badges belonging to the visitor to deactivate held by the visitor once the visitor is signed out OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Sign Out Visitor properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Sign Out Visitor properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Sign Out Visitor Properties Window Procedures Add a Sign Out Visitor Action 1 From the Access Control menu select Global I O 396 revision 105 2 Click Add on the Output Action sub tab of the Global Linkage form The Add Action Wizard window opens ONS es AS Click Sign Out Visitor on the Objects area Click Next The Sign Out Visitor Properties window appears Choose the options that suit your needs Click OK Appendix B Alarm Monitoring User Guide Alarm Event Descriptions Alarm Event Event Type Description Accepted Biometric Accepted Biometric Biometric This event returns the accepted biometric Score Score score The actual access granted event is sent separately This event is mainly used for diagnostic purposes
298. ler ER ER e f Sace a Device including alarm outputs reader aux inputs and reader aux outputs ei cl Trace a Badge revision 105 77 6 Trace Alarms and Events 78 revision 105 Note 10 11 If you are tracing a badge the Trace Badge window displays asking you to verify the Badge ID Click OK The Trace Configuration window displays To perform a historical trace select the Perform historical trace checkbox and select the Start and End dates a Optional You can also select the Apply start and end time to each day or the Use restored transactions To perform a live trace select the Perform live trace checkbox e Show Only Those Alarms Which Have Marked Video checkbox unchecked To view only alarms with video select the Show only those alarms which have marked video checkbox Click Alarm Filter to select the types of events that will be displayed for this trace In the Alarm Filter window select place a checkmark beside the alarm types you want displayed Click OK In the Trace Configuration dialog click OK B A S LS will open a new Trace Monitor window that looks identical to the Main Alarm Monitoring window but only displays alarms that are associated with the trace Chapter 7 Toolbar Shortcut Live Alarm Monitoring User Guide Video Monitoring The Video Monitoring window displays live video only To view recorded video you must use the Video Player The Video Moni
299. lete ancAlarM E 121 Delete All Alarms iit EES e 122 Display a Map WEE 122 Example Ola Map aicccta ae a a aceasta hinge aot 123 View Linked Maps suste ati toda aa acd die ae ie ee ee 123 Send an Cu EE 124 S nd aiPage Zuerich ea ee i e iN 126 Advanced Operator Procedures cceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 127 Chapter 12 Cardholders Folder ssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 Cardholders Folder Overview cs cccsecsceeeeessceesesseeeesenseeesesseneeeesseenenee 129 Cardholders Folder Procedures oiicucu iccciscnassiessnnctssncasvstaosesavedananuntaatiacanans 133 Cardholder Search Capabilities 2 0 c ceeccccecesceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaaeseenaeesseeeeneaeees 133 Search for a Cardholder Record AA 135 Retrieve the Most Recent Search Results eee eeeeeeeeceneeesne eee eee eneeseeeeeeeeneeeee 135 Change the Cardholders Folder View Options cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeteneeeees 136 Keyboard Wedge Settings Window ccceeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 137 GAG Barcodes eege eege gege a avehs haraadbedies 138 Scanning Barcodes with a Wedge Scanner ccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseneeseeeeeeeaaeees 138 Keyboard Wedge Settings Window cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 140 Keyboard Wedge Settings Window Procedures cccceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 143 Configure a Wedge Scanner sseesssssiresrsssrrrssrrstietstintstietsrn
300. lick an empty area of the toolbar Hide or display the toolbar From the View menu select Toolbar A checkmark appears next to the toolbar if it is not hidden Toggle the toolbar to display or hide Alarm Monitoring Status Bar The Alarm Monitoring status bar located in the lower portion of the screen provides different information depending on what window is displayed Main Alarm Monitoring Window Status Bar The Main Alarm Monitoring window displays the following information in the status bar Note 46 revision 105 Selected alarm the name of the selected alarm if any If multiple alarms are selected simultaneously the last one that was selected is indicated here Sort criteria the information by which the list of alarms is currently sorted Pending the number of alarms that are currently pending Pending alarms include all existing normal or initiating alarms marked as Active that are still displayed in the main alarm view and have not been acknowledged Total the total number of alarms currently in the window Verified mode enabled an access control reader that has an associated biometric reader is in verify mode For information about the status bar information provided in the System Status window refer to the table on page 62 System Administrator Procedures Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 3 System Administrator Procedures The Alarm Monitoring application is not only desig
301. lick the Output Action sub tab Click Add The Add Action Wizard window opens Select Deactivate Badge from the Objects listing window Click Next The Deactivate Badge Properties window appears Choose the type of badge you want to deactivate Click OK Click OK again oe ND WR WN revision 105 349 A Actions Device Output Properties Window To display do one of the following e Select the Action Types Device Output Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard e Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Device Output from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Device Output Properties xi Device Output A Auxiliary Output 1 Reader A Access Panel Rdr Aux Output A Auxiliary Output 1 Reader B Access Panel 7 Rdr Aux Output A Ausiliay Output 1 Reader D Access Panel Rdr Aus Output A Auxiliary Output 2 Reader D Access Panel 7 Rdr Aux Output 2 Alarm Output Intrusion Panel 5 Wis Programmable Output 1 ntrusion Panel 5 Wir Programmable Output 2 ntrusion Panel 5 Wh Keypad Beeper Resettable Warning ntrusion Panel 5 Wh Keypad Beeper Permanent Warning ntrusion Panel 5 Zone 2 ntrusion Panel 5 Zone 3asdasd ntrusion Panel 5 Zone 5 ntrusion Panel 5 Wh Onboard Relay A ntrusion Panel 7 Vir Onboard Relay
302. ll list both the active and inactive badge s assigned to the selected cardholder Click Modify Select the Show unassigned levels checkbox The Access levels display will list both access levels that have been and that can be assigned to the selected cardholder badge record Note 8 9 Alarm Monitoring User Guide To find out more about a particular access level either double click on an access level entry or right click on an access level entry and select Level Definition A popup window opens listing the reader time zone combinations that define the access level For example vel 4 3 1 Rdr 1 Master Hourly Employees Bb Blda 2 Efpua 23 1 Adr 1 Slave Salaried Employees G0 Bldg 23 2 Rdr 1 Master Hourly Employees GD Bldg 23 2 Rdr 1 Slave Salaried Employees Bldg 7 DL Rdr 1 All Floors Always Click on an access level in the Access levels display to select it Optional If you want to assign all the access levels that belong to an access group a Click Access Groups The Select Access Levels in a Group window opens Select the access group whose levels you wish to select or unselect then press the appropriate button BR Access Group 2 off Demo Case b The Select Access Levels in a Group window lists all currently defined access groups You can expand an entry to display the list of access levels that make up a group Select an access level or an access group If you select an acce
303. llowing conditions must be met e The user must have the Mobile Verify Workstation Options permission which is set on the MobileVerify sub tab of the System Permission Groups form in the Users folder e A recommendation label must have been added to the Cardholder form using FormsDesigner The recommendation label may be on a new separate tab or on the Cardholder form e The current workstation must have a gate configuration assigned to it This is done on the Gate Configuration sub tab of the Workstations form in the Workstations folder revision 105 43 2 Main Alarm Monitoring Window Cardholder menu Continued Menu option Function Keyboard Wedge When selected displays the Wedge Scanner Settings window where you can configure how Settings the B A S LS system interprets the information it receives from a wedge reader You must have administrative rights to the workstation when setting these options These settings are set per workstation View Options When selected displays the View Options window from where you can choose cardholder search attributes One Free Pass If selected allows the selected cardholder to violate anti passback rules one time APB Move Badge When selected displays the Area Move Badges window from where you can move a badge to a new area Display Global When selected displays the Cardholder Global Anti Pass Back APB Areas window This APB Areas window
304. m Mask Group Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Mask Group display Displays a list of available alarm mask groups which have been listing window configured in the system Mask radio button When configuring a mask unmask alarm mask group action select this radio button if you want the mask group to be masked When alarms are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Unmask radio button When configuring a mask unmask alarm mask group action select this radio button if you want the mask group to be unmasked When alarms are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties Window Procedures Add a Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Action 1 Display the Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties window 2 From the Mask Group listing window click on an entry to select it 3 Do one of the following e Select the Mask radio button if you want the mask group to be masked When alarms are
305. m the current live events transactions Restored events transactions are those restored using the Restore Archive button on the Restoring form of the Archives folder revision 105 237 15 Reports Folder Reports Folder Report Configuration Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Mode display In view mode indicates the number of reports selected in the listing window and the total number of reports contained in all selected categories For example 1 of 42 selected In modify mode indicates the current operation such as Modify Mode Close push button Closes the Reports folder Reports Folder Report View Filter Window Form Element Type Comment Access Granted checkbox If this checkbox is selected Access Granted and Access Denied reports Denied will be included in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Reader Reports form for filtering Alarm checkbox If this checkbox is selected Alarm Acknowledgment reports will be Acknowledgments included in the listing window Alarm Panel checkbox If this checkbox is selected Alarm Panel reports will be included in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Alarm Panel Reports form for filtering Alarm Panel checkbox If this checkbox is selected Alarm Panel Events reports will be Events included in the listing window Reports of this type appear on the Alarm Pane
306. mation refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Pulse Open Door Group Properties xi Pulse Open Door Group Reader Group 4Device Group 1 FAS Reader Group Cancel Help Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 381 A Actions Pulse Open Door Group Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Reader Group display Displays a list of available readers groups which have been configured listing window in the system OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Pulse Open Door Group Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Pulse Open Door Group Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Pulse Open Door Group Properties Window Procedures Add a Pulse Open Door Group Action 382 revision 105 1 Display the Pulse Open Door Group Properties window 2 From the Reader Group listing window click on an entry to select it 3 Click OK The pulse open door group action the doors open and then close is now configured for the selected reader Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reader Mode Properties Window To display do one of the followi
307. mber of times the active badge has been printed Activate display Displays the date when the badge becomes valid Deactivate display Displays the date when the badge becomes invalid Common form elements upper left section Last name text Indicates the cardholder s last name First name text Indicated the cardholder s first name Middle name text Indicates the cardholder s middle name Cardholder ID numeric Indicates the cardholder s ID number Note This field is not displayed on the Visitor form Badge type drop down list Indicates the cardholder s badge type Badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder For more information refer to the Badge Types Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Common form elements bottom section Search push button Displayed in view mode on every form in the Cardholders folder This button is used to search for existing cardholder records 130 revision 105 Cardholders Folder Continued Alarm Monitoring User Guide Form Element Type Comment Add push button Enabled in view mode on the Cardholder Visitor and Badge form and is used to add a record Note This button is displayed but not enabled on the Segments form the Access Levels form the Precision Access form the Biometrics form the Visits form the Guard Tours form and the Reports form because these records are not added in the Cardholders fo
308. ment organization ceeeeeseeceeeeseeeneeeeee 21 Double and single left click mode 109 Download databasens tiressi erriei 72 Drei Ee 72 E EGU ON seerne 34 E mail Tom 218 Add Recipient window field table 220 field table oe EEN 218 OVELVICW ege Ee 218 Enable strong password enforcement 23 Encode badge configuration eee 161 Error messages 23 Event descrtpttons sesiis 397 Event Reports Tomm 264 field Table e oe ceyecsseev ses sesssavecsveseecebsveesedvanes 265 OVELVICW eseesccsseeeiiesssscedeseetssceesteeenpltee eh stess 264 proced re Sinnen s a nite Een 268 Event settings seeseeesseeesesresrrrrrrerrsrerrerererrrsreesee 87 Events d grassprieten eonen eiei 316 Execute a command in single or double left click MOG iier A ER RENA E 111 Execute Function List Properties window 355 D ldctable seg s et sneep resigns 356 IO 356 Exit the application 00 0 eee eee cseeneeeeeennees 31 Export video to a file oe ee eeeeceeeeeeeeees 92 F Fast group acknowledge feature 0 ee 120 File men entgeet NEEN 34 Filter report View ce eeceeceeeeeeceeceeeeceseeesseceneens 241 Filter search results 98 Find a cardholder or visitor associated with a visit 203 Finished Visits siisi etier ien etsisi 201 First card unlock cccsccceeesesececeeeeeneee 384 387 Functions Alarm Acknowledgment window 117 G Global APB System Segment Reset Properties Alarm M
309. mporarily stopped when the play button is clicked Stop button Stops playing recorded video and resets the player to the beginning of the video Frame Advances video one frame at a time H Advance button Fast Forward Advances fast forwards video to the last frame End button i Search Video e Displays the Video Search window This option is only available when the button Video Player is playing recorded video For more information refer to Video Player on page 80 Digital Zoom fE Enlarges the view of a specific area in the Video Player and changes the focal In button point of the video to the location of the cursor Note To deselect this feature select Digital Zoom In from the Control menu Digital Zoom e Broadens the video view and changes the focal point of the video to the Out location of the cursor Note To deselect this feature select Digital Zoom Out from the Control menu Previous Displays the previous camera view This feature only applies when you have Camera opened multiple images and the Video Player is in single view mode Next Camera E E Displays the next camera view This feature only applies when you have opened the Video Player so that you can view multiple images and you are currently in single view revision 105 81 7 Video Monitoring Video Player Menu and Toolbar Buttons Continued Table Field Toolbar button Description Single View
310. mware download in progress Best readers and alarm panels Serial number out of range Device type mismatch revision 105 67 5 Monitor Devices Device Status Icon Readers Best and Apollo Online offline Door tamper Reader tamper Cabinet tamper Power Failure Forced open Held open J Door contact fault Reader mode Reader verify mode Cipher mode Best only First card unlock mode Extended held mode Masked SD Readers Best only REX fault Readers Aux Inputs Active Fault Masked Reader Aux Outputs Activated Alarm Inputs Active ti Fault e Masked ta Alarm Outputs Activated A Alarm Panels Offline online Cabinet tamper Power failure Intercom Stations Busy 68 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Device Status Icon Panel Controller Offline online ta Panel Memory Mismatch Panel Controller Best hardware only Panel Memory Low Panel database download in progress Cabinet tamper Power Failure Panel type Panel type mismatch Panel options mismatch Total memory memory free Max cardholders current cardholders Max assets current assets Max RSI templates Current RSI templates Last dialup time Online with a plain connection Online with encrypted connection Online but does not match the co
311. n A p rt 370 MENUS r arn ea e re ae EE ERE 33 AsSsetMENU sirere ies ser reter reris 45 cardholder menu bulk sub menu cceceesececeeeeeseeeeees 44 Cardholder menu ccccccsessscceceesssceeeeeees 43 configure menu eee eects ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeee 37 Control MENU eeeeseececcecesssceececeessaeeeeceenes 38 current device sub menu 0008 38 SCHEED a aeaaee ENEAN EEn eats 34 file ment EE 34 426 revision 105 le ME 43 OPtiONS menu 40 trace Re 36 VIEW MENU sesscsssesissessssassisesacsesversscoe st otessees 34 WIDOW ii seer ene e e 43 Modify access levels assignments eee 170 BIER eege SE tege 283 asset Classes assignment usses 288 sset STOUP EE 180 badge record nosece cosie eresi 159 badges for selected cardholder group 160 cardholder record 146 cardholder s permission to have visitors 177 cardholder s segment assignment 151 group of cardholder s segments 151 TEPO Eeer EE 240 scheduled action using the scheduler right click UE 329 VISIt TECOL EE 208 Visitor record 149 Monitor trace individual devices eee eee eee eseeeeeeeee 77 Monitor video in Matrix VIEW oo eee ee eee eee eseeceeceeeseeneeeaee 89 with multiple cameras successively 90 with one specific camera eee eee 90 Multiple hardware views display 59 0 Options ehr check 105 Options menue TEE 40 Overdue event 309 P Pan til
312. n User Guide Close push button Closes the Reports folder Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Procedures Run a Receiver Account Zone Report 278 revision 105 Note Select Reports from the View menu The Reports folder opens Select the Receiver Account Zone Reports tab In the listing window select the icon that corresponds to the report you wish to run Complete the Date Time Filter section to specify a date time interval for gathering data Only data gathered during the specified period will be included in the report To limit each date in the range to the specified time interval select the Apply start and end time to each day checkbox In the Account Zone Filter section select the icon s corresponding to the account zone s whose data you wish to include in the report If you don t select any account zones or if you click Report All data for all account zones will be reported Click either the Print or Preview button depending on which function you wish to perform For more information refer to Chapter 18 Report Print Preview Window on page 303 Only data that s currently in the database can be included in the report Events or other transactions deleted because of space limitations or elapsed time are no longer available Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 16 Assets Folder The Assets folder contains forms with which you can e Add change or remove asset records e Assign
313. n User Guide For cardholder records with guest badge types clicking this button will display the Increment Issue Code window The availability of this button is subject to licensing restrictions push button Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected moves to the first record that matches your search criteria revision 105 131 12 Cardholders Folder Cardholders Folder Continued Form Element Type Comment push button Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected by default moves 10 matching records back You can change the number of records moved back by modifying the value in the Number of records to scroll for fast forward and rewind field on the View Options window The View Options window is displayed by selecting View Options from the Cardholder menu 4 push button Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected moves to the previous record that matches your search criteria gt push button Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder gt When selected moves to the next record that matches your search criteria push button Displayed in search mode on every form in the Cardholders folder When selected by default moves 10 matching records forward You can change the number of records moved forward by modifying the value in the Number of records
314. n a visitor has been selected and a current visitor only cardholder is being searched for If selected only those cardholders who have previously been visited by the selected visitor will be displayed on the Select Visitor Select or Add form Last name text Indicates cardholder s last name First name text Indicates cardholder s first name Middle name text Indicates cardholder s middle name Cardholder ID numeric Indicates a cardholder s ID which is most commonly their Social Security Number The cardholder ID must be a numeric value 224 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Visits Folder Select Host Wizard Search Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Badge type drop down list Selects which of the cardholder s badges if he or she has more than one is to be the active one User defined fields All fields below the line on this form are user defined fields The default fields are pictured but your form may be different if the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your cardholder data Back push button This button is not used Next push button The wizard will proceed to the Select Host Wizard Select form Cancel push button Closes the window without locating a cardholder and returns you to the Visit form in the Visits folder Help push button Displays online help for this topic Import push button Displays the Select
315. n background updates are performed The choices are No Updates 10 15 20 30 and 60 minute intervals This is saved per user per station and only applies to Apollo hardware System Status Options Displays the System Status Options window which is used to specify how the System Status window displays information and what devices are included revision 105 37 2 Main Alarm Monitoring Window Control menu Menu option Toolbar button Function Update All Updates the status of all access panels in the monitoring zone Hardware Status Set All Controller Sets the clocks in all access panels according to the machine on which Clocks the driver is running Current Device This menu option is dynamic meaning the name of this menu option changes according to the device highlighted in the System Status window For example if a BAS 1300 HID reader is highlighted in the System Status window then BAS 1300 HID displays in the Control menu options Each Current Device menu option also has sub menu options A separate table exists for these sub menu options on page 38 Guard Tour Allows Operators to launch or view a guard tour Guard tour provides a guard a cardholder who has been specifically chosen to conduct a tour with a defined set of tasks that must be performed within a specified period of time Typical tasks include swiping a card at a checkpoint access reader or turning
316. n does the same thing as clicking the Sign Out button To use this feature you must first configure a badge status to use when doing an automatic sign out This is done on the General Cardholder Options form of the Cardholder Options folder For more information refer to Configure System wide Visit Options in the Cardholder Options Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide When selected the actual Time out for the visit is updated to the current date time If the visitor has an active badge the deactivate date is updated and the badge status is set to the status setup that was selected on the General Cardholder Options form Find Cardholder Opens the Cardholders folder and displays the cardholder record that is associated with the currently selected visit Find Visitor Opens the Cardholders folder and displays the visitor record that is associated with the currently selected visit Refresh Click this button to refresh the visits listed in the Visits listing window When someone else makes changes in the database you may need to click this button to see the changes Cardholder information is not automatically updated but visit information is revision 105 193 14 Visits Folder Visits Folder Field Table Visits Folder Form Element Type Comment Common form elements Visits listing display selection Displays the status host visitor scheduled time in sche
317. n door forced open alarms are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Unmask radio button When configuring a mask unmask door forced open action select this radio button if you want the door forced open alarm to be unmasked When door forced open alarms are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Properties Window Procedures Add a Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Action 1 Display the Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Properties window 2 From the Reader Controller listing window click on an entry to select it 3 Do one of the following e Select the Mask radio button if you want door forced open alarms for the selected reader to be masked When door forced open alarms are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting e Select the Unmask radio button if you want the door forced open alarms for the selected reader to be unmasked When door for
318. n entry in the tree to move to that section or record in the report When a section or record is selected via the report Alarm Monitoring User Guide navigation tree that section or record will appear in the preview window with a blue box border For example Format Type Magnetic Asset Format Facility Code 12345 Badge Offset Number Guest No Smart Card e On the right the preview window will show the first page of the report as it will look when it is printed Click a section or record in the preview window When a section or record is selected in the preview window that section or record will appear in the preview window with a red box border For example Access Control Fields on Track 2 e Click and drag the split bar to resize the report navigation tree and the preview window relative to each other e Click the I button to hide the report navigation tree and maximize the space used for the preview window 6 Use the i A D and gt t buttons to view other pages of the report 7 Select an option from the zoom drop down list to change the size of the display You can instead type a number directly into this field but you must then either press lt Tab gt or click outside of the field for the number to take effect 8 To save the report to a file on your computer or to send the report to someone using your company s electronic mail system select the El button The Export window is displayed e Select the f
319. n event has an interval without motion longer than the value entered it displays as multiple events Increasing the amount of time decreases the number of frames that meet or exceed the minimum motion level and therefore the number of red lines displayed in the histogram Only display events longer than Filters the event list This is useful in situations where there is extraneous noise For example when artificial lighting is unstable and flickers causing the video camera to capture the event Displaying events that are longer than one or two seconds is an effective way to remove such noise Generate thumbnail after the start of the event by a specific time Generates a thumbnail image after the specified amount of time Generate thumbnail from the highest motion level in the event Generates a thumbnail image from the highest motion level in the event Scale of displayed thumbnails Specifies the scale of thumbnails displayed in the Video Search window Options include a 1 1 ratio where the thumbnail is the same size as the image in the Video Search window down to a 1 8 ratio where thumbnail is 1 8th of its original size Preroll event prior to playback Specifies the preroll time when the user plays back events revision 105 87 7 Video Monitoring Field Description OK Applies the event settings and closes the Event Settings window Cancel Closes the Event Settings window witho
320. n if you want door held open alarms for the selected reader group to be masked When door held open alarms are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting e Select the Unmask radio button if you want the door held open alarms for the selected reader group to be unmasked When door held open alarms are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting 4 Click OK 378 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Pulse Open Door Properties Window To display do one of the following e Select the Action Types Pulse Open Door Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard e Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Pulse Open Door form the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Pulse Open Door Properties E Pulse Open Door A Bldg 27 Second Floor Reader Bldg 27 Access Panel BD Guard Quarters Reader Bldg 27 Access Panel EO Bldg 27 Stockroom Reader Bldg 27 Access Panel GIO Bldg 1 Executive Suite Reader Bldg 1 Access Panel Ai Bldg 1 South Exit Reader Bldg 1 Access Panel E Bldg 1 Main Door Reader Bldg 1 Front Entrance Panel E Elevator Enabled Reader Bldg 1 Front Entrance Panel Note If you have accessed this window v
321. n test fails Detector Test OK Detector Test OK Fire Generated when the fire detection test is successfully completed Device Type Mismatch Device Type Mismatch System Generated when the device is of a different type than what it has been configured for Dialup Last Connection Dialup Last Connection System Generated by the communication server for Time Expired Time Expired dialup panels that have exceeded the set number of hours since their last connection When this event is generated the communication server will attempt to connect to the panel If the dialup panel repeatedly receives this event the panel should be investigated to see why it is not calling back Dialup Stored Dialup Stored System Generated by the communication server for Command Limit Command Limit dialup panels that have exceeded their Exceeded Exceeded stored command limit When this event is generated the communication server will attempt to connect to the panel If the dialup panel repeatedly receives this event the panel should be investigated to see why it is not calling back Directional Motion Directional Motion Video Detected Detected Directional Motion Directional Motion Video Restored Restored Discount Entered as Discount Entered as POS Generated when a discount was entered as Absolute Amount Absolute Amount an absolute amount Discount Entered as Discount Entered as POS Generated when a discount was entered as a Percentage Percent
322. n the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 359 A Actions ISC Database Download Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Description text Displays a description of the access panel which is selected in the Access Panel listing window Note This field only displays a description when one and only one access panel is selected Max number of spin buttons When configuring a database download as an action select the panels to be maximum number of access panels that can be downloaded at a time downloaded at a time Controller listing display Displays a list of available controllers that have been configured in the window system OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the ISC Database Download Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the ISC Database Download Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window ISC Database Download Properties Window Procedures Add an ISC Database Download Action 1 Display the ISC Database Download Properties window 2 Select the Max number of panels to be downloaded at a time 3 From the Access Panel listing window click on an entry to select it Note You can select multiple entries 4 Click OK 360 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User G
323. n the listing window can be selected simultaneously The changes made on this form will apply to all selected visits This feature is primarily used for printing badges signing in visits and signing out visits revision 105 195 14 Visits Folder Sign In Visit s Window This window is displays when e A visit is added in the Visits folder and the Sign In Now checkbox is selected on the Visit form e A visit record is selected in the Visit listing window in the Visits folder and the Sign In button is clicked L Print disposable badge s of this type Sf Disposable Visitor ad general hpliS000 IT Send all badges to this printer overriding badge type printer assignment Printer I Assign this access control badge ID Visits Folder Sign In Visit s Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Print disposable checkbox display e For these fields to be enabled the Allow disposable badge badge s of this printing checkbox on the Visits form in the Cardholder type Options folder in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter must be selected e Displays a list of disposable badge types that can be selected for the visit e Only those badge types that are disposable are listed e Ifyou do not want to print a disposable badge for the visitor deselect this checkbox Send all badges to checkbox drop e Select this checkbox to select an alternate printer this printer down list
324. ncrease or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons Apply start and end time to each day checkbox If selected the specified time range will be applied to any date that falls within the specified date range For example if you specify a Date Time Filter starting January 1 1998 at 8 00 AM and ending March 31 1998 at 7 00 PM e H this box is checked the report will include only data collected during the hours of 8 00 AM through 7 00 PM on any and all days between January 1 and March 31 e H this box is not checked the report will include all data gathered from 8 00 AM on January straight through until March 31 at 7 00 PM Cardholder Filter section Includes the Last Name First Name and Badge ID fields These fields are available only for applicable report types These fields are not case sensitive and will match any names beginning with the characters you type much like the Cardholder form searches For example typing smith for Last Name will match Smith SMITHY smithereen etc Last Name text Enter the cardholder s last name First Name text Enter the cardholder s first name Badge ID numeric If you wish to report on the activity associated with a specific badge enter the Badge ID here This field is available only for applicable report types Report All push button If this bu
325. nd Sent the asset disable command was sent to disable the asset Asset Denied Invalid Asset Denied Invalid Asset Generated when the asset was denied Access Access because the cardholder had invalid access levels Asset Denied Invalid Asset Denied Invalid Asset Generated when the asset was denied Asset Asset because of an invalid asset the asset was not found in the controller Asset Denied Invalid Asset Denied Invalid Asset Generated when the asset was denied Cardholder Cardholder because of an invalid cardholder Asset Denied No Asset Denied No Asset Generated when the asset was denied Asset Privileges Asset Privileges because the cardholder had no asset privileges Asset Granted Asset Asset Granted Asset Asset Generated when the asset was granted Owner Owner because the cardholder was the asset owner Asset Granted Asset Asset Granted Asset Asset Generated when the asset was granted Privileges Only Privileges Only because the cardholder had asset privileges Audibles Silenced Audibles Silenced Fire Generated when all the alarm bells have been turned off on the controller Audibles Unsilenced Audibles Unsilenced Fire Generated when all the alarm bells have been turned back on for the controller Biometric Mismatch Biometric Mismatch Access Generated when the cardholder has a Denied biometric template and the alternate reader was utilized to capture a template to match but the captured template did not match
326. nd all badges to this printer overriding badge type printer assignment Printer _ ane IT Assign this access control badge ID e ca The Print disposable badge s of this type checkbox and listing window are enabled if the Allow disposable badge printing checkbox is selected on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder e Ifenabled you can print a disposable badge for the user by selecting the Print disposable badge s of this type checkbox then selecting a disposable badge type to be assigned and printed Disposable badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder in System Administration For a badge type to be used to print disposable badges it must have Visitor selected for the Class and the Disposable checkbox must be selected on the Badge Type sub tab If segmentation is enabled the correct segment must be selected on the Segment Membership sub tab e Ifthe checkbox is deselected the system will not print a disposable badge To override the badge type printer assignment select the Send all badges to this printer overriding badge type printer assignment checkbox and select the printer from the drop down list This checkbox and drop down list revision 105 207 14 Visits Folder 10 11 are enabled if the Print disposable badge s of this type checkbox is selected and the user has the correct permissions The Assign this access control badge ID checkbox and field are enabled if t
327. nd relays can also have the following right click option Execute Custom Function executes a custom function associated with the Radionics Intrusion Controller This menu option is only available with Radionics Intrusion Controllers Intercom Right click Options Note Place Call displays a dialog box where you enter the station number you are calling to Cancel Call cancels the intercom call Badge Information displays badge information associated with the intercom event who placed the call and or who received the call If an intercom event has two intercom stations associated with it the station that placed the call and the station that received the call a dialog displays allowing alarm monitoring operators to select the intercom station s they want to base the cardholder search on The Badge Information right click option is only available for intercom stations linked with the customized cardholder field Cell number For more information refer to the Cardholder Options folder Automatic Lookup form in System Administration Reader Right click Options It is not possible to download firmware to single reader interfaces In addition to several options listed in Access Panels and Alarm Panels right click options for readers also include Download Reader Firmware downloads firmware to the selected dual interface Rdr1 reader Displays the major and minor firmware revision number The minor firmware revision num
328. ndows in a horizontal non overlapping arrangement Tile Vertically Places all open windows in a vertical non overlapping arrangement Arrange Icons Places all minimized windows title icons in a row Close options There are several menu options to close different windows in the Alarm Monitoring application e g Close Badge Info Close Visits Numbered choices Lists all open windows The active topmost window is indicated by a checkmark Help menu Menu option Function Contents Displays online help for the currently displayed window Index Displays the online help table of contents About Alarm Displays version and copyright information Monitoring Cardholder menu Menu option Function Note This menu is only available after you select View gt Badge Info from the menu options Show Unassigned If selected both assets that currently are and assets that once were but have since been Assets unassigned assigned to the selected cardholder will be displayed in the listing window on the Assets form If not selected only assets that are currently assigned to the selected cardholder will be displayed MobileVerify When selected displays the MobileVerify Options window where the gate assigned to the current MobileVerify workstation can be changed or the system s Force Protection Setting can be overridden For this option to be available the fo
329. ned to monitor alarms and events but it can also be used for a variety of administrative tasks such as adding cardholders or visitors printing badges adding assets to the database and assigning assets to cardholders Depending on how the System Administrator sets the cardholder and system permissions users with access to Alarm Monitoring can add modify and delete cardholder badge and asset information as well as capture images and perform bulk operations This chapter assumes that an Alarm Monitoring Station has been physically set up and focuses on the procedures the System Administrator should complete to enable procedures to be performed by Alarm Monitoring Operators Refer to the B A S LS disks to determine the PC requirements for an Alarm Monitoring Station client or server and refer to the Installation and Set Up User Manual for physically setting up the hardware Note Additional System Administrator procedures may be included in the Advanced Operator Procedures section starting on page 127 Administrative Procedures Checklist The administrative procedures are completed via the Administration menu in the System Administration application Instructions can be found in the Administration section of the System Administrator User Guide e Create card formats card formats asset magnetic smart card etc are required to configure a reader e Create badge types employee visitor etc printing encoding badge options
330. ned will be listed If they exist also displays the access level s activation and deactivation dates Show unassigned checkbox Displayed in view and modify mode When selected the Access levels levels display lists both access levels that have been and that can be assigned to the selected cardholder badge record Number of levels display Displayed in view and modify mode Displays the number of access assigned levels that have been assigned to the selected cardholder badge record For example 6 levels assigned Activate Dates push button Displayed in modify mode When selected displays the Access Level Activation Dates form from where you can select the dates when the selected access level will become valid and invalid Access Groups push button Displayed in modify mode When selected displays the Select Access Levels in a Group form from where you can choose the access level group that you want to select access levels from Access Levels Form Procedures Assign Access Levels to a Badge 164 revision 105 Note ge OR E Select the Badge Info from the View menu The Cardholders folder opens Select the Access Levels tab Locate the cardholder record for which you want to assign access levels From the Show levels for badge ID issue code drop down list select the badge you want to assign access levels to If the Show inactive badges checkbox is selected the Show levels for badge ID issue code drop down list wi
331. nes monitoring station assignments e Set up guard tours checkpoint actions messages and checkpoint events monitoring stations link camera devices to the checkpoints special instructions e Set Monitoring Options associate a command with a device or area icon enables operators to execute a command with a single and double left click in the system status tree and map view Create Alarm Monitoring Maps Video Procedures Checklist 52 revision 105 All the video procedures are completed via the Video menu in the System Administration application Instructions can be found in the Video section of the System Administration User Guide chapters 40 and 41 e Configure video matrix switcher video devices recorders and cameras link hardware devices to a camera alarm video configurations add a video recorder to a monitoring zone e Configure video verification CCTV Controller associated with a workstation CCTV Command located on Access Control gt Readers gt Control tab Operator Procedures Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 4 Set Alarm Monitoring Display Options User defined Display Options Several windows in Alarm Monitoring can be configured to display according to user preference These views are recreated every time the user logs into the application The following is a list of user defined display options that are set from the Configure or Options menu e Select Event Types to Monitor e Select
332. nfigured connection Offline due to a standard connection problem Offline due to an encryption problem Dialup access controller is online with a plain connection Dialup access controller is online with an encrypted connection Dialup access controller but does not match the configured connection Dialup access controller is offline due to a standard connection problem Dialup access controller s offline due to an encryption problem E Ree SG SN a ad H Max Identix templates current Identix templates revision 105 69 5 Monitor Devices Device Status Icon Alarm Mask Group Best and Apollo only Mask count Anti Passback Area Best and Apollo only Closed Person count Procedures for Monitoring Devices Update the Hardware Status Note Hardware status information displays in several Alarm Monitoring windows When alarms and actions occur in the system B A S I S software updates the status information live for the affected hardware Operators can also choose to have the status updated on demand 1 Select Update All Hardware Status from the Control menu or by right click an alarm access panel alarm panel alarm input relay output or reader 2 The update all hardware status feature polls the currently selected access panel and updates the hardware status of the associated devices A message displays when the update is complete If you are
333. ng Note Select the Action Types Reader Mode Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Reader Mode from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Reader Mode Properties Eg Reader Mode fllReaderB Access Panel 2 PB Door 2 Intrusion Panel 7 Reader Mode Verify Mode Card and Pin z No Change z I First Card Unlock Cancel Hep If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 383 A Actions Reader Mode Form Properties Window Table Form Element Type Comment Reader Controller display Displays a list of available readers which have been configured in the listing window system and the controllers that are associated with each Reader Mode drop down list When configuring a reader mode action select a mode from this drop down list Choices include e Card Only e Facility Code Only e Locked e Card AND Pin e Pin OR Card e Unlocked Verify Mode drop down list When configuring a reader mode action for a reader on a Best controller that is a primary reader to an alternate biometric reader you can select a verify mode When verify mode is enable
334. ng function list values to false e Execute True sets the logic term to true e Execute False sets the logic term to false e Execute Pulse temporarily sets the logic term to true Action Group Right click Options In addition to the view map option action groups also include execute as a right click option Note Action groups will display if the logged in user has the segment access to the action group along with permissions to execute all of the actions in the action group Anti Passback Area Right click Options These right click options are unique to areas and area alarms There are other right click options available for areas and they are listed in General Options e Update Area Status updates the status of both safe and hazardous areas so that operators can have a current view of cardholder locations e Occupancy Report provides a current report of the cardholders currently in a Safe area e Move Badges enables an operator to manually move all the badges in one area to another e Mustering Report provides a current report of the cardholders currently in a hazardous area 108 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide e Start Muster Mode initiates Muster mode The Start Muster Mode window displays and provides an area to enter comments e Reset Muster Mode ends Muster mode The Reset Muster Mode window displays and provides an area to enter comments Guard Tour Right click Options These
335. ns Window 2 cats pencesucscecceectades otedcbieeetaieletamecgandeeeneeseenyhede 298 Printa PEDUT ieden a aE T titel en dcehaguehs abbeuniet EEES 299 revision 105 15 Table of Contents Chapter 18 Report Print Preview Window ssseeeeeree 303 Report Print Preview Window Aen 304 Report Print Preview Window Procedures eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeaeees 306 Preview and Print a Report cc eeeeceeeeeeenneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseenaeeeeenenaaees 306 Search a Report for Specific Information 308 Chapter 19 Guard Tout Age 309 Guard TOU Meter geht Gaceachiecusnescocadavedasoued Ceoinrasasdaunpmedseavsnedaunpeauaeacintes 309 Launch a Guard Tour NEEN ARENS iea ea eaaa 309 Schedule an Automatic Guard Tour ACtiOn 0 ccc ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeesnaeesneetias 313 Respond to an Automatic Guard Tour 0 eeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeesaeseaeesnaeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeee 314 View a Guard FOUR tive sists senesced eaa iaa t ak E A aa aai uaaa 315 Checkpoint Status and Events Diagram esesseeeseeeseesreesrrresrrrrnerrrrerrenneee 316 Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 317 Scheduler dun BEE 318 scheduler Form Procedures ssiccisisssseageecscicitaiscapasescesianinecreaviad wanieniadieeninats 319 Add and Schedule an Action ceeceeceesecesee cee eereeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeaeesaesnaeeseeseeeseneases 319 Display the Scheduler Right Click Menu EEN 326 A
336. ns menu of Alarm Monitoring While in this mode you can single left click an icon in the Alarm Monitoring system status and map view to execute the command configured for that device or area To activate double left click mode deselect there is no checkmark beside the Execute Command on Single Click of Icon in the Options menu of Alarm Monitoring Select a Device in Single or Double Left click Mode 110 revision 105 Single Left click Mode In single left click mode you can select a device by placing or hovering the cursor near the device without left clicking The system status list and tree view identifies a selected device by underlining and or highlighting the device fm BAS 1000 Firmware Revision 3 032 245 1100 Firmware Revision 1 Alarm Monitoring User Guide The map view identifies a selected device by displaying the tool tip BAS 1000 Firmwa 15 BAS 1000 Firmware Revision 3 032 Double Left click Mode To select a device in double click mode left click the device Execute a Command in Single or Double Left click Mode Single Left click Mode To execute a command in single left click mode left click the device Clicking the expand symbol in tree view does not execute the command Double Left click Mode To execute the command double left click the device Note If you are in double left click mode in the System Status view not only do you execute the command when you double left
337. nterval select the Apply start and end time to each day checkbox In the Access Panel Filter section select the icon s corresponding to the panel s whose data you wish to include in the report If you don t select any panels or click Report All data for all panels will be reported In the Event Filter section select an Event Type In the Event listing window select the icon s corresponding to the event s whose data you wish to include in the report e Ifyou select lt All gt in the Event Type field data for all events will be reported e Ifyou click Report All data for all events of the selected Event Type will be reported Click either the Print or Preview button depending on which function you wish to perform For more information refer to Chapter 18 Report Print Preview Window on page 303 Only data that s currently in the database can be included in the report Events or other transactions deleted because of space limitations or elapsed time are no longer available Alarm Monitoring User Guide Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form iReports Reader Reports Alarm Panel Reports Anti Passback Reports Date Time Reports Event Reports Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Receiver Acco 4 ll LU Type s r Filters A Alarm Acknowledgments Alarm Acknowledgements Date Report All Ei Alarm Acknowledgments by Operator Alarm Acknowledgements Date Filter by Panel E fm 1000 Access Panel fm 200
338. o be used together System and Manager Internal and Oracle Sys and Change_On_Install Disable Strong Password Enforcement Strong password enforcement is enabled disabled in System Administration or ID CredentialCenter When you install B A S I S by default strong password enforcement is enabled When you upgrade by default strong password enforcement is disabled To manually enable or disable strong password enforcement 1 Select System Options from the Administration menu 2 Select the General System Options tab 3 Click Modify 4 Select or deselect the Enforce strong passwords checkbox If you disable the option to enforce strong passwords you will continue to receive a message stating your password is weak every time you log into an application until you change your B A S LS password to meet the password standards essages Read weak password messages warnings carefully to avoid confusion about whether your user password or database password is weak If you have a weak database password you will receive a warning every time you log into any application until you change your database password Although it is not recommended you can acknowledge the warning and continue working in the application This table describes the password related error messages that may be generated and which password you need to correct e To correct the database password refer to the Installation amp Setup User Guide revision 105
339. odes except locked and unlocked on Apollo panels e Generated when any inputs that are used as checkpoints are activated Readers on Apollo panels in locked and unlocked modes will not report cardholder events Therefor although those readers may be included within a guard tour the status of those checkpoints will not be updated within the live tracing of the tour Furthermore since the status of a checkpoint reader in the locked or unlocked mode cannot be updated tours containing such checkpoints will generate a Completed With Errors with Errors event when finished Guard Tour Live Tracking Window Buttons Button Function The following table identifies the buttons available on the Guard Tour Live Tracking window Terminate Stops a tour before it is completed before all of the checkpoints have been reached When this button is selected a Guard Tour Terminated event is generated Force Complete Manually completes a tour For example the Force Complete button could be used to end a tour that otherwise could not be completed because of a card that could not be swiped at a reader a checkpoint that was in unlocked mode View Instructions Displays special instructions that were written for this tour when it was configured in the System Administration application Add Tour Note Adds a note to an event For example you can add a note explainin
340. older 330 revision 105 Appendices Appendix A Alarm Monitoring User Guide Actions Actions Procedures Use the Add Action Wizard Note 1 Click the Add button either e In the Checkpoint Actions section of the Tour Wizard in the Guard Tour folder For more information refer to the Guard Tour Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide e On the Scheduler form of the Scheduler folder For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 e On the Output Action sub tab of the Global Linkage form in the Global T O folder For more information refer to the Global I O Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide e On the Acknowledgment Actions form in the Alarm Configuration folder For more information refer to the Alarm Configuration Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide If you have access to view multiple segments you are prompted to select a segment The Add Action Wizard Opens Add Action Wizard Eg Category Objects Action Types Action Group Library off Action Group SA Archive Purge Database oft Automatic Guard Tour oft Device Output oft Device Output Group oft Execute Function List oft Global APB System Segment Reset oft ISC Database Download oft ISC Firmware Download oft Mask Unmask Alarm Input ot Mask Unmask Alarm Input for Group oft Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group ot Mask Unmask Door Forced Open ot Mask Unmask Do
341. olders Folder Notes All when selected your search will locate both Cardholder and Visitor records Cardholders when selected your search will only locate cardholder records Visitors when selected your search will only locate visitor records With the exception of the Allowed visitors checkbox and the Capture button in modify mode only on the Visits form visit records cannot be added modified or deleted from the Cardholders folder To add modify or delete visits you must purchase the Visitor Management module The availability of this form is subject to licensing restrictions Cardholders Folder Visitor Form Form Element Type Comment Visitor data text drop down Displayed in view mode When adding or modifying a visitor record lists numeric enter the visitor s information such as name address and organization into these fields Last changed numeric Displayed in view mode and indicates the date on which the selected visitor record was last modified and saved This date is updated only when visitor information is changed not when badge information is changed The last changed date is saved individually for each badge record as well Visitor Form Procedures Add a Visitor Record 1 Note 148 revision 105 Select the Badge Info from the View menu The Cardholders folder opens By default the Cardholder form is displayed Click Add From the Person type drop down lis
342. om the camera list into the Video Player for viewing Between Camera and Monitor Views This feature applies to Nice Vision recorders with configured monitors 1 Right click a camera or monitor 2 The popup menu appears To view monitors choose Switch To and select the monitor from the list that appears To view cameras choose Display and select the camera from the list that appears Pan Tilt and Zoom The screen below shows the addition of a Pan Tilt and Zoom PTZ control into the Video Player The Video Player can be used to control PTZ devices if the PTZ device is connected to a Digital Video Server and a Matrix Switcher revision 105 93 7 Video Monitoring Note Cameras are configured to be connected to a Matrix Switcher in the System Administration software application From the Video menu select Digital Video and then the Camera tab North exit door Jl IO Play Control Options View EM SERA Bis gt gt North exit door e Using the PTZ Toolbar The PTZ Toolbar contains a Pan and Tilt control that can be used to pan or tilt a camera Once PTZ is activated the buttons can be used to zoom in or out move and focus the camera The user can also press and hold any of the zoom focus or iris buttons to achieve the preferred view e Using the Mouse You can manipulate the Pan Tilt and Zoom controls by right or left clicking your mouse in the video window A left mouse button click causes the camera to mov
343. on Group gt lt Action Group gt Viewing all Active count 0 Offline count 49 Mask count 0 Nia Field Description Display window The information in the window is displayed in hierarchical fashion also called a tree or branching arrangement Each entry in the list contains the name of one device Access Panels have the leftmost entries For a specific Access Panel a device connected to it is listed below and indented to the right Each device connected to those devices is listed below them and further indented An icon to the left of each entry identifies the entry s type Hardware Status Bar Located on the lower right portion of the screen the status bar on the System Status window has four counters Viewing Shows the number of devices viewed Active count Shows the number of active points in the monitoring zone This is NOT the same as the number of active devices For example if a reader is in the Door Forced Open Door Held Open and Reader Tamper states the active count is increased by three The active device number is not increased Offline count Shows the number of offline devices in the Monitoring Zone Every device is counted including alarm inputs reader auxiliary inputs alarm outputs and reader auxiliary outputs Masked count Shows the number of masked points in the monitoring zone MUSTER MODE This portion of the status bar only displays when a Monitoring Zone is in Mus
344. on in the Video Player to search For more information please refer to Search Specific Portions of a Camera View on page 96 Note This button is only available for Windows XP systems Note When you search video using the Motion Detection Region toolbar buttons the yellow region the portion of the video that will be searched for motion detection Remove Motion Detection Region Unselects any region in the Video Player you highlighted using the Create Motion Detection Region toolbar button For more information please refer to Search Specific Portions of a Camera View on page 96 Note This button is only available for Windows XP systems Include Motion Detection Region Inverts the region you selected in the Video Player using the Create Motion Detection Region toolbar button Note This button is only available for Windows XP systems Note When you search video using the Motion Detection Region toolbar buttons the yellow region the portion of the video that will be searched for motion detection Start time End time The starting ending point for the video search This display only field is set in the Video Player under the Options menu Note If you change the start end time in the Video Player you must restart the video search for the new settings to apply Motion level The minimum motion level required to be included in the search results The motion level range is 0 to 100 where 0 represents no mo
345. on to view multiple zones This checkbox is only enabled if the user has proper permissions c Select the Save as user assignment checkbox if you if you wish to log into the same monitor zone EVERY time you log in This is a permanent assignment You will not be prompted to select a monitor zone during future log ins This is checkbox is only enabled if the user has permission d Click OK For more information please refer to the Monitor Zones Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide 6 If you are prompted that the monitoring station you are logging into is set up for event queuing a Select No if you want all the queued events deleted b Select Yes if you want all queued event for the monitor zone displayed Single Sign On Overview Note Single sign on simply means logging into B A S I S with the same user name and password that you use to log into Windows or logging into B A S LS using an LDAP user name and password for authentication LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a software protocol that enables you to locate businesses people files and devices without knowing the domain name network address Single sign on allows scripts using the OpenIT API to authenticate These scripts will be run under a Windows account The account that is making the call to the API can be obtained easily this way and the script can be restricted to those actions that the user is permitted to perform using
346. onfigured in the List Builder which is displayed by selecting the Administration menu then selecting List Builder For more information refer to the List Builder Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Purpose drop down listbox Type the reason why the visitor is visiting the cardholder revision 105 217 14 Visits Folder E mail Form gg Yisits Trotz status Host vistor T Scheduled Time In_ Scheduled Time Out__ Timein Lmeou l Jablonski JunekF Smith Mary J 2 19 2003 8 00 00 AM 2 19 2003 5 30 00 PM Lake Lisa Downes Lisa A 2 18 2003 1 30 00PM 2 18 2003 2 30 00 PM Merzer Kristen I Rice Scott N 2 18 2003 1 25 14PM 2 18 2003 2 00 00 PM_ 2 18 2003 1 25 23 PM Allen Leslie R Johnson PeterL 2 18 2003 1 16 41 PM 2 18 20035 00 00PM 2 18 2003 1 20 47 PM 2 18 2003 el gt Status search k visit amp S Details C3 E mail Reports Host name Status Merzer Kristen Active Visitor name ve Scott N Include does Additional Recipients M Default Recipients me mycompany com Remove E Cardholder for this visit FE Visitor for this visit Search Add Modify Delete Print Sian In Sign Out 8 Multiple Selection E mail Form Overview The E mail form is used to specify e mail addresses and pager numbers that are automatically notified of visits You can e Add a recipient e Remove a recipient e Specify whether to e mail the default recipients t
347. onfirm password m Change Network Video Password Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Description display Names the video device you are currently changing the password for Listing Window display Lists currently defined LNVR recorders and cameras associated with them Select the recorders and or cameras you want to modify Current User display The name of the user account This field automatically populates if a user name was initially populated on the Video Recorder Camera forms revision 105 345 A Actions Change Network Video Password Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Reset to this password text field Enter the password in the text box The following restrictions apply e Axis cameras all up to 10 character passwords using A through Z a through z 0 9 _ e Sony cameras allow up to 16 character passwords using A through Z a through z 0 9 e LNVR recorder password length is limited by the LNVR s computer password policy which is set by the system administrator Valid characters are Note In addition to these restrictions B A S I S includes strong password enforcement which checks the user s password against password standards Confirm password text field Enter the password a second time for verification OK push button Adds the action and exits out of the Change Network
348. onitoring User Guide Klee 357 field table nirien ei 358 proc dures ioe oneri sie ett 358 Grant Deny pop up window eee 103 field fablenn ieee ieee nek 104 PLOCOCUIES eer 104 Grant or deny access oe eee eeeeeeseeeeeereeeeeeeee 104 Guard Tour Latin chy TOUR deet e geed deeg 309 Tse sug treetegasEER NEESS 314 schedule automatic eee 313 Guard tour tOUr EVED S iscsi ecricuscoapeesens E area Eei 311 Guard Tour Live Tracking window 311 Guard Tours form oe eeeeeeseeseeeseeseeeees 183 Deld table snitter nnn 183 PLOCE GUIS 2 ccc cece decide even cies 184 H Hardware TEE VIEW UNENEE Eed 60 update status of 70 Hardware View Options ce eeeeseeeseeseeeeeeeees 60 Help Menteni re e E dE dgegede 43 How this document is organzed 21 I Icons Ed EE 113 hardware device icons sceseeceeeesseeeneeeeee 65 hardware status jong 67 IMA SES Capture ee dech cop dech settee este veces 92 ISC Database Download Properties window 358 field table niteen eE 360 Drocedhures e7edeEEEEEEEEEEAER REENEN 360 ISC Firmware Download Properties window 361 Tiel table spanien seeeteeeesteavesys 362 procedures eee cee ctecsseesecteceeeteeneees 362 K Keyboard Wedge Settings windouw 137 L Late w n 309 DAU CD es e ae o E E TAE 88 Guard Tour cen a R a 309 Launch video from camera s ss sseeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeee 88 Left click mode sed nnen rea 109 Link cardholder to a directory account
349. oom out on the badge in the preview window e Entering a number greater than 100 will cause the preview to zoom in on the badge displaying less area and more detail e Entering a number less than 100 will cause the preview to zoom out on the badge display more area and less detail revision 105 187 13 Badge Print Preview Window Badge Print Preview Window Continued Element Type Comment Badge information display Displays badge and cardholder information for the badge currently in the print preview window Printer information displays also Page number display Displays the number of the page or badge that is currently in the preview window Badge Print Preview Window Procedures Preview and Print a Badge 1 Select the badge s from within the Cardholders folder Cardholders Badge Access Levels Assets or Precision Access form e Before printing make sure that you are properly configured to print badges Configurations are done using the Badge Types and Card Formats folders in System Administration or ID Credential Center e Make sure the proper printer is chosen This is configured by selecting Badge Types from the Administration menu in System Administration or ID Credential Center and setting the printer assignments on the Printing Encoding folder 2 Do one of the following e Select Print from the Application menu e Click Print on any form within the Cardholders folder
350. or Forced Open for Reader Group z iii aenal Dann HtA On nan banat tthe l Cancel 2 Choose an action Category and then select an action Object revision 105 333 A Actions 334 revision 105 Note Depending on where the Add Action Wizard was launched from the objects available in the Objects listing window will vary Click Next Depending on which Category Object combination you chose in step 2 a corresponding action properties window will open Configure the action you selected in step 3 To do this you must refer to the action properties windows sections in this chapter for information on each action properties window Repeat steps 1 4 for each action you want to assign Alarm Monitoring User Guide Action Group Properties Window To display do one of the following e Select the Action Types Action Group Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard e Select the Action Group Library Category and any defined action group Object in the Add Action Wizard e Click the Add button on the Action Group Library form of the Action Group Library folder from System Administration Note The open door commands will not be available for those using Recognition Source readers because that particular reader is not in constant communication with the PIM device Note For more information refer to Action Groups Overview in the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the Syst
351. ords whose values begin with the characters that were entered For example when searching by last name a filter of L will find Lake Lewis etc A filter of Lake will find Lake Lakeland etc For all other field types such as drop down lists and numeric fields the default comparison is equal to For example searching on the Badge ID field with a value of 123 will find the cardholder whose badge ID is equal to 123 revision 105 133 12 Cardholders Folder In addition to the default comparison you can customize your search by prefixing the search text with a comparison operator The supported operators are Comparison Description operator Equal to can be used to force an equals comparison for text fields or lt gt Not equal to gt Greater than lt Less than gt Greater than or equal to lt Less than or equal to For drop down lists only the not equal to operator is supported in addition to the default equals comparison To perform a not equal to comparison for a drop down list first select the value from the list then type lt gt in front of the text Search Text Fields for Contains In addition to the default begins with searching for text fields you can do a search for contains by prefixing the text with a percent sign For example typing mit in the Last name fi
352. oring User Guide Refresh all Actions 1 Right click anywhere on the Scheduler form except on a scheduled action in the listing window The scheduler right click menu is displayed Select the Refresh All Actions menu option The listing window will be updated to display the most current information for all of the scheduled actions Delete a Scheduled Action using the Scheduler Right Click Menu Note 1 Right click on a scheduled action in the listing window The scheduler right click menu is displayed Select the Delete Action menu option A confirmation message is displayed Click Yes Selecting the Delete Action right click menu option does the same thing as selecting an action in the listing window and then clicking Delete on the Scheduler form Modify a Scheduled Action using the Scheduler Right Click Menu 1 Right click on a scheduled action in the listing window The scheduler right click menu is displayed 2 Select the Modify Action menu option Depending on which action you selected in the listing window a corresponding action properties window will open 3 Make the changes you want to the fields For more information refer to Appendix A Actions on page 333 4 Click OK Note Selecting the Modify Action right click menu option does the same thing as selecting an action in the listing window then clicking the Modify button on the Scheduler form revision 105 329 20 Scheduler F
353. ormat that you want to send the report in from the Format drop down list e In the Destination drop down list you can choose to export the report to an application a disk file an exchange folder a Lotus Notes database or your electronic mail system if you have one e Click OK and follow the instructions 9 To print the report from within the Report Print Preview window a Click the 8 button The Print window is displayed from where you can select which pages to print and the number of copies b Select one of the following e The All radio button to print the entire report without user intervention e The Pages radio button and enter a page range c A message box will be displayed to indicate the status of the print operation revision 105 307 18 Report Print Preview Window Search a Report for Specific Information 308 revision 105 Note To search through the report for specific information click the EI button The Search window is displayed In the Find what field type the word contiguous words or number you wish to locate in the report The search is not case sensitive Click Find Next One of two things will happen e Ifthe requested information was found the preview window display will move to the first occurrence of it e Ifthe information is not contained in the report a message box will be displayed If the requested information was found click Find Next to move through
354. orts a Select a value to filter in the Where field e Ifthe report you are running is a User Transactions report and you wish to apply a filter select Action Type Details or Object in the Where field e Ifthe report you are running is an Alarm Acknowledgment report and you wish to apply a filter select Alarm Acknowledgment in the Where field b In the next drop down list select whether the filter criteria Begins With Contains Ends With or Equals the value that you will enter in the next blank field c Inthe blank field type the value you wish to filter for 7 Click either the Print or Preview button depending on which function you wish to perform For more information refer to Chapter 18 Report Print Preview Window on page 303 Note Only data that s currently in the database can be included in the report Events or other transactions deleted because of space limitations or elapsed time are no longer available revision 105 263 15 Reports Folder Event Reports Form Access Denied Events by Reader Access Granted Events Access Granted Events by Reader Alarm Input Events Monday fn 1000 Access Panel Sei fi Access Granted Access Granted fi Access Granted Access Granted i Access Granted No Entry Made Access Granted i Access Granted on Facility Code Access Granted 3 Access Granted on Facility Code No Entry M Access Granted i Access Granted Reader Unlocked Access Granted
355. ory Guard Tour Event Purging Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window revision 105 337 A Actions Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Properties Window Procedures Add an Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Action 338 revision 105 l 2 From the Administration menu select Action Group Library Click Add on the Action Group Library form The Action Group Properties window opens Click Add on the Action Group Properties window Click Action History Guard Tour Event Purging A checkmark appears next to the name Click Next The Action History Guard Tour Event Purging Properties window appears Choose the type of records you want to delete and the set number of days you want them deleted after Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Archive Purge Database Properties Window To display do one of the following e Select the Action Types Archive Purge Database Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard e Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Archive Purge Database Group form the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Archive Purge Database Properties Eg lt This action will archive purge the database using current archive purge configuration
356. ory Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Automatic Guard Tour form the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Click the Add button on the Scheduler form in the Guard Tour folder Automatic Guard Tour Properties Eg Automatic Guard Tour rm Select tour or tour group r Monitoring stations to be notified Tour T our Group Dn Main Facility Tour M Third Floor Tour Monitoring Station E ENGEREE1 Single tour Remove Randomly select tour from group If you have accessed the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window via the Scheduler folder or the Scheduler form in the Guard Tour folder the window will contain both the Automatic Guard Tour form and the Scheduler form You must refer to the Scheduler folder chapter for detailed information on how to use the Automatic Guard Tour Properties window in conjunction with Scheduler For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Automatic Guard Tour Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Tour Tour Group listing window display Displays a list of the tours and tour groups which have been configured in the system Tours and tour groups are configured in the Guard Tour folder
357. ose N A from the Type and Subtype drop down lists Type in a Serial Number and then choose the Department of the asset from the drop down list Enter the date of the asset s Last Inspection and the date of the asset s Next Inspection Enter the date of when the asset was acquired in the Acquired field Enter the date of when the asset will be replaced in the Replace field In the Assessed Value field type the amount in dollars of the asset s value In the Replacement Value field type the amount in dollars it will cost to replace the asset Check the Asset Can Be Disabled checkbox if the asset can and you want it to be disabled when the asset generates an access denied alarm when a cardholder is not assigned to the asset The Can Disable Asset checkbox on the Settings form of the Readers folder in the System Administration 282 revision 105 12 13 Alarm Monitoring User Guide application must also be checked in order for the selected reader to disable the asset Click Capture to launch the Multimedia Capture module from where you can capture a photo of the asset to be displayed on the Assets form For more information refer to the Multimedia Capture Module appendix in the System Administration User Guide You can switch to the Asset Classes form if you want to configure groups and classes now For more information refer to Asset Classes Form Procedures on page 288 14 Click OK Modify an Asset N
358. ot an Area APB report Cardholder Guest Listing of each Reader and which cardholders have access to that reader Includes the Access to Readers associated Access Level and Timezone Cardholder Photo All cardholder photos sorted by name Gallery Cardholder Time and Pairs each in time with an out time for cardholders gaining entry to time and attendance Attendance readers Cardholders by All cardholders sorted by badge type no access levels shown Badge Type Note ONLY personnel with badges assigned will be included in this report Cardholders by Last All cardholders sorted by last name with badges but no access levels Name Note ONLY personnel with badges assigned will be included in this report Cardholders Located List of the cardholders located in each anti passback area sorted by area and date in Each APB Area by Date Cardholders Located in Each APB Area by Name List of the cardholders located in each anti passback area sorted by area and cardholder name Cardholders with Access by Badge Type List of any access and precision access levels the cardholders have sorted by badge type Note ONLY personnel with active badges AND access levels will be included in this report revision 105 417 C Reports Report name Description Cardholders with List of any access and precision access levels the cardholders have sorted by last name Access by Last ONLY
359. ote Fw H This procedure does not apply to view only workstations Locate the asset record that you want to change Click Modify Make the changes you want to the fields Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to revert to the previously saved values Delete an Asset Note This procedure does not apply to view edit only workstations Locate the asset record that you want to delete Click Delete Click OK revision 105 283 16 Assets Folder Assign a Cardholder to an Asset Note This procedure does not apply to view only workstations 1 Locate the asset record that you want to assign 2 If the Cardholders folder was already open and a cardholder record displayed proceed to 3 If not click Assign Asset to launch the Cardholders folder 3 In the Cardholders folder retrieve the record of the cardholder you want to assign to the asset On the Assets form of the Assets folder the name of the cardholder will appear in the Assign To push button 4 Click Assign To to assign the asset Search for an Asset Record 1 Select Asset Info from the View menu The Assets folder opens 2 Click Search 3 Specify your search criteria by typing full partial entries in the enabled fields 4 Click OK B A S LS retrieves and displays the first matching record Use the CH w A H and Hl buttons to navigate through the database A dimmed button means that the associated operation is no
360. otographic information such as a photo signature or biometric data for a visitor e Import visitor data from a business card scanner or other similar device Visits Folder Select Visitor Wizard Add Form Form Element Type Comment Last name text Indicates visitor s last name First name text Indicates visitor s first name Middle name text Indicates visitor s middle name Badge type drop down listbox Select the visitor s badge type Badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder For more information refer to the Badge Types Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide User defined fields All fields below the Name fields on this form are user defined fields The default fields are pictured but your form may be different if the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your visitor data Import button Displays the Select Import Source window which allows you to select a device to import visitor data from such as a business card scanner revision 105 231 14 Visits Folder Visits Folder Select Visitor Wizard Add Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Capture button Displays the Multimedia Capture Module where you can capture photographic information such as a photo signature or biometric data for a visitor Back push button Returns to the Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add form Finish push button Complet
361. ove access levels from a select group of cardholder records Modify Badges If selected displays the Bulk Modify Badges window from where you can choose to update one or more of the following fields in the Cardholders folder window Activate Date Deactivate Date Badge Status and Use Limit You can apply a filter as to which badges you want to update based on status and or type Note that when updating the Badge Status field you must select a badge status filter 44 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Cardholder menu Bulk sub menu Continued Menu option Function Change When selected the Bulk Segment Change window opens from where you can change a Cardholder selected group of cardholder record s segment assignment Segments Change When selected the Change Cardholder Replication window opens from where you can select Cardholder a new replication setting Replication Note This menu option applies only to Enterprise systems Delete Allows you to delete cardholders to a select group of records Cardholders in Search Destroy ALL Allows you to destroy all cardholder data Cardholder Data View Log Displays the Log Viewer window from where you can view a log of bulk events Asset menu Menu option Function Note This menu is only available after you select View gt Asset Info from the menu options First Record Displays the first matching asset record
362. pe Listing of each asset grouped by type Assigned Assets by Listing of each asset grouped by cardholder Cardholder Assigned Assets by Listing of each assigned asset grouped by Scan ID Scan ID Assigned Assets by Listing of each assigned asset grouped by type and Scan ID Type Scan ID 416 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Report name Description Audio Notifications and Instructions Lists all audio notifications and instructions in the database Badge Type Lists all badge types that have been configured in the system Configuration badges by Deactivate Listing of all badges by deactivate date Can be used to determine which badges are about to Date expire Badges Without Lists those badges that don t have access level assignments Access Levels Card Formats Definitions of all Magnetic and Wiegand card formats in the system This combined report replaces the Magnetic Card Formats and Wiegand Card Formats reports that were available with previous software releases Cardholder Access to Listing of each Reader and which cardholders have access to that reader Includes the Readers associated Access Level and Timezone Cardholder Exit Displays user defined Exit Entry on a per cardholder basis In order for this report to work Entry readers must be designated as a Time and Attendance Entrance or Exit reader on the Readers Controls page This report is n
363. played in the Active Badge display A cardholder is only allowed to have one active badge You must change the status of the current active badge to Lost or Returned in order to assign a new active badge Select Lost or Returned from the New Status drop down list Click OK The Access Level Assignment window opens Access Level Assignment Please select the method for assigning access levels to this new badge Copy from the currently selected badge Badge ID 13 Issue Code 0 C Use the new badge type s default access group Group 1 C No access levels for this badge Do one of the following e Ifyou want the new active badge to have the same access level assignment as the previous active badge select the Copy from the currently selected badge Badge ID n Issue Code n radio button e Ifyou want the new active badge s access assignment level to be the selected badge type s default access group select the Use the new badge type s default access group radio button If no access groups have been assigned to the selected badge type this option is not available e Access groups are assigned to badge types in the Badge Types folder For more information refer to the Badge Types Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide e Ifyou do not want to assign access levels to the new active badge at this time select the No access levels for this badge radio button Click OK Alarm Monitoring
364. plication or stored in the database for later event reporting e Select the Unmask radio button if you want the door held open alarms for the selected reader to be unmasked When door held open alarms are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting 4 Click OK 376 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties Window To display do one of the following Note Select the Action Types Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Properties xi Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Reader Group FS Device Group 1 i 4Reader Group Mask C Unmask Cancel Help If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 377 A Actions Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader Group Field Table Form Element Type Comment Reader Group display D
365. pter 14 Visits Folder ccccccecessssseeesseeeeseesensenenseeeeeees 191 Visits Folder Overview EE 191 Visit Right Click Men irsiyati ti ai i 192 Sign In Visit s WINDOW e dee ehre EE een 196 Print Badge s ie Lee 198 Visits ei e e 198 Visit Search Capabilities 2 2 cecccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseeaeeeeeaaeseceeeeseaaeeseeeeesesaeeeeenees 199 Search for All Visits to a Selected Cardholder 0 c ccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeneneees 199 Search for All Visits by a Selected Visitor cc cecccceceeeseeeesseeeeeeecsneeeeeeseeeeaeensesesaeeess 200 Search for Scheduled Active or Finished Visits cccccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeneneees 201 revision 105 11 Table of Contents Search for All Visits for a Specific Date or Time cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeeseeneeeseaeeeeeneees 202 Retrieve the Most Recent Visit Search Results 0 cccceeceeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenaeeneaes 203 Find a Cardholder or Visitor Associated with a Visit cecccceeseseeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 203 Add a Visit ROCI uee teint habia Sei ar ae ate ee 203 Modity a Visit ROCO usage ii na e A E EE A EE 208 Delate aVisibRecord orrainn dion nib aren aah ain iia ans 208 Prim a Badge Tora TEE 209 Sign in a Previously Scheduled Visit ccceceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeseaeeteeeees 209 Sign Q t a ViSit Hrs ie raa ara ett n a araa D se e ada aaea aSa aaan 211 ViSI
366. r When this occurs card data can be entered via the keypad Clerk Name or Number Clerk Name or Number POS A transaction that reports the clerk s name or number Command Set From Command Set From System Generated when the reader keypad Reader Reader command was executed Command Pin 10 Set Command Pin 10 Set System Indicates the reader command Pin 10 From Reader From Reader was executed Command Pin 20 Set Command Pin 20 Set System Indicates the reader command Pin 20 From Reader From Reader was executed Communication Communication System Generated when the Communication Server Initialization Failed Initialization Failed fails to initialize communications For example if you are using RS 232 and have hyperterminal running and using COM and then you start up the Communication Server and it needs to use COM1 to communicate to a panel it will fail to open up the serial port and this event will be logged Communications Lost Communications Lost System Generated when communications to the device have been lost Communications Lost Primary System Generated when the primary path lost Primary Path Communication Path communication with the host Lost Communications Lost Secondary System Generated when the secondary path loses Secondary Path Communication Path communication with the host Lost Communications Path Communications Path System Generated when the communication path Switched Pr
367. r minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons End section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the End date checkbox and choose a specific end date from the drop down calendar April 2003 Tue Wed Thu Fri 1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 15 16 17 18 2 23 24 25 29 30 1 2 7 8 9 F lt Today 3 6 2003 e Select the last month for which data is to be included in this report Use the mal and mi navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the last year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the Pe year and use the spin buttons 20035 244 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Readers Folder Reader Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment End section e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the last day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the End time checkbox and choosing a specific end time Jh 2 08 02 AM Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to i
368. r you type an displays This is intended to protect against unauthorized access in the event that someone else can see the screen while you type After logging in for the first time you are strongly encouraged to modify the password for the system account as soon as possible to discourage unauthorized use e In the Directory field select the directory that you wish to log into For user accounts not using single sign on the default is lt Internal gt Select the Remember user name and directory checkbox if you want the values you just entered in the User name and Directory fields to automatically be selected the next time that you log in Click OK 4 Your system may be configured to prompt you to confirm that you are authorized to use the application To accept the terms of the authorization warning click Yes 5 If you are prompted to select a monitor zone Select a monitor zone from the drop down list If segmentation is enabled only the monitor zones for the segment that you logged into are available Select the Save as monitoring station assignment checkbox if you wish to make the monitor zone selection the default assignment for the monitoring station This means when any operator logs into Alarm Monitoring at this workstation this zone will be monitored unless the operator has monitoring zones assigned to them as a user or the operator revision 105 25 1 Introduction Note has permissi
369. r 18 Report Print Preview Window on page 303 Only data that s currently in the database can be included in the report Events or other transactions deleted because of space limitations or elapsed time are no longer available revision 105 247 15 Reports Folder Alarm Panel Reports Form Alarm Panel Events Alarm Panel Alarm Panel Local Linkage Alarm Panel 1100 Alarm Panel 2000 Panel Alarm Panel Outputs Alarm Panel 1200 Alarm Panel 2000 Panel SI Alarm Panels Alarm Panel SI All Events Over Time Alarm Panel Events Cardholder Reader Events EI Device Status Events Alarm Panel Events Reader Events Date Time F SI Event Count By Panel Alarm Panel Events Reader Events Date Time f i Thursday TT Thursday Alarm Panel Reports Form Overview This form allows you to add filtering criteria to an alarm panel report so that you can narrow the results of your report Depending on the type of report you select you can optionally add a filter on alarm panel s start date time and end date time 248 revision 105 Alarm Panel Reports Form Field Table Reports Folder Alarm Panel Reports Form Alarm Monitoring User Guide Form Element Type Comment Listing window display Lists currently defined alarm panel reports and each report s type Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type Today push button Click this button to e Set the Start
370. r All to deselect all of the choices in the listing window Click OK The types of reports that correspond to the checkboxes that you selected will be displayed in the listing window on the Report Configuration form Preview and Print a Report For more information refer to Preview and Print a Report on page 306 revision 105 241 15 Reports Folder Reader Reports Form Reports s Denials and Grants by Reader Access Access Denials Grants and Other Badge Events Access Granted Denied Access Denied Events Access Granted Denied Access Denied Events by Reader Access Granted Denied 0 Dual Interface Reader 1000 Access Panel EI Access Granted Events Access Granted Denied E Dual Interface Reader2 1000 Access Panel E Access Granted Events by Reader Access Granted Denied si 501320 Reader 1000 Access Panel PR 50 2020W Gold 2000 BORSI Reader 2000 Monday August 25 2003 H Reader Reports Form Overview This form allows you to add filtering criteria to a reader report so that you can narrow the results of your report Depending on the type of report you select you can optionally add a filter on reader s start date time end date time badge ID and or cardholder name 242 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reader Reports Form Field Table Readers Folder Reader Reports Form Form Element Type Comment Listing window display Lists currently def
371. r is used to view a group of cameras successively These cameras are defined as a device group in the Groups folder of System Administration The Video Tour feature is only available for online cameras recorders Launch the Video Monitoring window by either selecting the Video Monitoring toolbar button or choosing Video Monitoring from the View menu Verify the cameras recorders are online If the device icon does not have a red X through it the device is online Right click a camera device group and select Configure Video The Video Tour window displays Video Tour EN View time secs E e Select the desired View time and click OK This is the amount of time each camera is displayed in the tour Right click the camera device group again and select Start Tour The right side of the window displays the camera views Set Start and End Dates The following procedure applies to recorded video 1 Follow the procedures to aLaunch Video Live Recorded From a Camera on on page 88 Verify recorded video is playing in the Video Player Select Set Start End Date from the Options menu The Date Time window appears Fill in the appropriate dates and times and click OK Start Date Start Time fer d Lasep aed End Date End Time 24 77 01 gt 1 54 55 PM m E revision 105 91 7 Video Monitoring Note Use your keyboard to quickly navigate between fields in the Date Time window The ri
372. rance settings Via the Reports folder you can run a Destination Assurance Exempt Cardholders report to see a list of which cardholders will be exempt from processing For more information refer to the Destination Assurance Folder Chapter in the System Administration User Guide Use extended strike held times checkbox Displayed in add or modify mode When this checkbox is selected extended held open and extended strike times will be used for the selected badge Note This option is supported by Best hardware only Embossed numeric Displayed in add or modify mode If applicable enter in this field any numbers or characters that are embossed on the card Typically this applies to Proximity cards which are embossed by the manufacturer prior to delivery Allow Access To drop down list Displayed only when a valid guest class badge type is selected Valid guest class badge types are those badge types which were configured during their creation to provide guest parameters For more information refer to the Badge Types Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Choices in the drop down list include readers locks that are associated with the selected badge type Select an option from the list if you want to assign the selected cardholder to a specific guest reader lock The Badge ID and Issue Code fields are automatically updated when a cardholder is assigned to a guest reader lock The values for thes
373. rd Delete push button This button is not used Print push button This button is not used Asset Classes Form Procedures Assign Classes to an Asset Note This procedure does not apply to view only workstations 1 Locate the record of the asset that you want to assign classes to ZC ate Click Modify Select an Asset Group from the drop down list In the Asset Classes listing window select the classes you want to assign You can select as many as 15 classes for each asset 5 Click OK Modify an Asset Classes Assignment 288 revision 105 Note This procedure does not apply to view only workstations 1 Locate the record of the asset that you want to change EA Click Modify Make the changes you want to the fields Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to revert to the previously saved values Alarm Monitoring User Guide Add Asset Groups and Classes ON ee E 10 11 12 Select Asset Info from the View menu The Assets folder opens Select Asset Groups and Classes from the Asset menu The Asset Groups and Classes Management window opens Asset Groups and Classes Management xi Asset Groups Asset Class Asset Groups 3 item s Asset Group Mar eting Asset Class 0 item s To add an asset group click Add In the Asset Group field enter the name of the group you are adding Click OK To add an asset class select the Asset Class tab then clic
374. rder into the Video Player This launches ALL of the video cameras in that particular group or recorder up to 32 cameras at once 2 To view live video select Live from the Play menu 3 To view recorded video select Recorded from the Play menu Alarm Monitoring User Guide Load and View a Video File 1 Display the Video Player For more information please refer to Video Player on page 80 Select Load File from the Options menu The Open window displays Select the correct info file and click Open The recorded video automatically plays To replay the video file click the Stop toolbar button and then click the Play toolbar button Monitor Video in Matrix View The Video Player in matrix view can be used to view live or recorded video from multiple cameras simultaneously 1 Note Note Follow the procedures to aLaunch Video Live Recorded From a Camera in the Video Player on on page 88 The Video Player displays From the View menu select As Matrix You can also select the Matrix View toolbar button Matrix view displays up to 32 cameras There may be more cameras available than what fits in the viewable area You may scroll or resize the window to view additional cameras To resize the window hover the pointer over the corner or edge of the window until a double headed arrow displays Then drag the window to its desired size The screen below displays Matrix view B Video iewer LI _ Op x
375. red toolbars can be changed to floating toolbars which allows the toolbar to be repositioned anywhere in the window For more information refer to How to Use the Toolbars on page 46 e Control if the toolbar is displayed By default the toolbar is displayed Operators can control if the toolbar is displayed by selecting or deselecting Toolbar from the View menu For more information refer to How to Use the Toolbars on page 46 revision 105 33 2 Main Alarm Monitoring Window File menu Menu option Toolbar button Function Print Prints information displayed in the active topmost window The print toolbar button does not display if the Main Alarm Monitoring window is minimized Log On Log Off Logs you into or out of the application Switch Log On Displays the login window allowing a different user to log in without the previous user manually exiting the application When the new user is successfully logged in the old user is simultaneously logged out Change Password Opens the Change Password dialog enabling you to change your password you must have the corresponding system level permission to do so Exit Ends the session of every person logged on Edit menu Menu option Toolbar button Function Note The following menu options are active when an alarm window is displayed Acknowledge Acknowledges the currently selected alarm Fast Group Allows a u
376. reeet seein ee aes 242 PROCECUIES eideler Eed 246 Rearrange alarms 000 0 cece eeeeceeeseeeeeseeeneeeee 115 Receiver Account Zone Reports form 274 field table oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 270 275 OVEIVIEW dE ges ege gester 269 274 Drocedureg msnen eee n ee 278 Refresh All ACTIONS cieni i 329 anO eet ES 328 Remove access levels from a selected group of cardholders eee eeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 170 COMMIS iho Fes SEANCE 58 precision access groups from a badge 172 TOADELS ese fps aoee an O EEEo Ee E EN RSEN 100 Report Configuration form sesseseeeseeeeseeeeeee 236 field table niesna 236 Drocedureg si p sn 240 Report Print Preview window cee 304 field table eege eek ase 305 DOERR fc crac hee Ae ee 306 Report Print Properties wimdouw eee 389 field ta bleise in Se edd dee e 390 Procedures ATTEN 390 Report View Filter window 0 0 236 UN GE 415 run a cardholder report 185 run a date time report 262 Alarm Monitoring User Guide TUN a reader report 246 run a receiver account zone report 278 run a visit report from the Visits folder 221 run an alarm panel report 252 run an anti passback report 257 run AN asset Tenor 295 run an event report 268 273 R ports for sea a Eege E 221 field table eege Ee 221 OVELVIEW ENEE ason oia ssi snn Seet 221 E EE 221 Reports form Assets Tolder 293 field tables foes cs epee hh secs See eeoke teh cadets 293 PLOCECUICS siniri verit
377. ria trace type and the total number of alarms listed Device Group Icons 64 revision 105 The table below identifies the different icon groups available Icon Description Cd Access Control System Alarm Monitoring User Guide Icon Description Alarm Mask Group als Reader Group te Alarm Input Group Ed Alarm Output Group Hardware Device Icons The table below identifies the different icon available To view a list of icons and icon groups available in your database as well as add or modify icons open MapDesigner and select Edit gt Icon Library Icon Description SN Access Panel Alarm Input Alarm Output Alarm Panel CCTV Camera The CCTV Camera icon flashes when there is motion detected with the associated camera The CCTV Camera icon turns green when there is sound with the associated camera Note CCTV Monitor CCTV Panel Fire Panel Function List Intercom Exchange Jia HCH Cg Intercom Station Intrusion Area revision 105 65 5 Monitor Devices 66 revision 105 Notes Icon Description fq Intrusion Door vin Intrusion Offboard Relays De Intrusion Onboard Relays ie Intrusion Panels Intrusion Zones Matrix Switcher H EN Offline Lock Panel PC Panel t Personal Safety Device Panel aA Reader Receiver
378. ric Input High Input High Generic Input High High Input High High Generic Input Low Input Low Generic Input Low Low Input Low Low Generic Input Normal Input Normal Generic Input Masked Input Masked System Generated when an input has become masked Input Unmasked Input Unmasked System Generated when an input has become unmasked revision 105 405 B Alarm Event Descriptions Alarm Event Event Type Description Intercom Function Intercom Function Intercom Generated when an intercom function has been executed Invalid Access Level Invalid Access Level Access Generated when access was denied because Denied of an invalid access level Invalid Badge Invalid Badge Access Generated when access was denied because Denied the badge ID was unknown to the controller Invalid Card Format Invalid Card Format Access Generated when the badge contained a card Denied format that was not recognized by the reader Invalid Device Serial Invalid Device Serial System Generated when the device does not have a Number Number valid serial number Invalid Facility Code Invalid Facility Code Access Generated when access was denied because Denied the badge had an invalid facility code Invalid Issue Code Invalid Issue Code Access Generated when access was denied because Denied the issue code read from the badge did not match the current issue code stored in the database for
379. ring pane on the schedule tab Click OK revision 105 313 19 Guard Tour Respond to an Automatic Guard Tour 1 When an automatic Guard Tour is started Alarm Monitoring displays a Scheduler Action Executed alarm and you prompts you to start the Guard Tour by displaying the following window Automatic Guard Tour Launch the scheduled automatic quard tour Evening Guard Tour 2 Click OK 3 The Start Guard Tour window displays with the guard tour name selected Select the guard person to complete the tour by either selecting the guard from the list provided or entering the guard s badge ID m Select tour Ze Select guard Main Facility Tour lake Lisaa 1 Show guards with proper security clearance level Show all guards C Enter badge ID manually Tour Instructions OK Cancel 4 Click OK 5 While the Guard Tour is active you can monitor the Guard Tour status by selecting Control gt Guard Tour gt View from the main menu 6 The Guard Tour Live Tracking window display information such as the badge ID of the person performing the Guard Tour the checkpoint statuses tour history as well as the ability to view instructions and video 314 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide View a Guard Tour 1 Start the Linkage Server by clicking the Start button then selecting Programs gt B A S LS ET gt Linkage Server 2 Open the
380. rm Last name text Indicates visitor s last name First name text Indicates visitor s first name Middle name text Indicates visitor s middle name Badge type drop down listbox Indicates the visitor s badge type Badge types are configured in the Badge Types folder For more information refer to the Badge Types Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide revision 105 227 14 Visits Folder Visits Folder Select Visitor Wizard Search Form Continued Form Element Type Comment User defined fields All fields below the horizontal line on this form are user defined fields The default fields are pictured but your form may be different if the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your visitor data Back push button This button is not used Next push button The wizard will proceed to the Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add form Cancel push button Closes the window without locating a visitor and returns you to the Visit form in the Visits folder Import push button Displays the Select Import Source window which allows you to select a device to import visitor data from such as a business card scanner Help push button Displays online help for this topic 228 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add Form This form is displayed when the Next button on the Select Visitor Wizard Search form is clicked
381. rm Continued Form Element Type Comment End section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the End date checkbox and choose a specific end date from the drop down calendar ES April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 20 21 2 3 lt lt 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 1 4 5 6 H 8 Today 3 6 2003 e Select the last month for which data is to be included in this report Use the Hl and pa navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the last year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the year to Lea access the spin buttons ES sl e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the last day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the End time checkbox and choosing a specific end time 08 ES M 208 02AM Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons 250 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Folder Alarm Panel Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Appl
382. rm in the Visits folder Help push button Displays online help for this topic 226 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Select Visitor Wizard Search Form Note If the FormsDesigner application has been used to customize your visitor data the elements on your Select Visitor Wizard Search form will be different The default fields are pictured below This form is displayed when the button to the right of the Visitor name drop down list on the Visit form is clicked Select Visitor Wizard Search E Enter search criteria below E Previous visitors for current host only DX Visitor e Segments BEI Badge lv Access Levels Precision Access Biometrics Last name First name Middle name Brown Lisa Badge type Organization Title Address Po City IT y y State Ir O Zip code OoOo O o i y Office phone OO Extension Last changed Select Visitor Wizard Search Form Overview This form is used to locate visitor records that match the specified search criteria Visits Folder Select Visitor Wizard Search Form Form Element Type Comment Previous visitors checkbox This checkbox is only enabled when a cardholder has been selected and for current host a visitor is being searched for If selected only those visitors who have only previously visited the selected cardholder will be displayed on the Select Visitor Select or Add fo
383. rom the search results are played using the Video Player The Video Search window performs the following functions e Analyzes recorded video for user defined motion detection levels and reports the results in thumbnail images or a detailed list e Searches recorded video for any event that meets user specified criteria e Enables recorded video that meets the search criteria to be played on the Video Player Note The video search feature is only available for LDVR recorders To display the Video search window please refer to Display the Video Search Window on on page 95 84 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide W video Search East exit door ll Search Options View Dal alale Motion level Start time 2 19 2003 8 00 00 4M End time 2 19 2003 8 59 59 AM Stat Time EndTime Duration Motion 2 19 2003 8 00 33 AM 2 19 2003 8 00 56 4M 23 ER 2 19 2003 8 06 23 AM 2 19 2003 8 06 25 AM 1 3g 2 19 2003 8 06 46 4M 2 19 2003 8 06 48 4M 2 ER 2 19 2003 8 13 11 AM 2 19 2003 8 13 13 AM 1 39 2 19 2003 8 14 24 AM 2 19 2003 8 14 42 AM 18 38 2 19 2003 8 15 14 AM 2 19 2003 8 15 16 AM 1 ER 2 19 2003 8 17 17 AM 2 19 2003 8 17 26 AM 8 ER 2 19 2003 8 19 19 AM 2 19 2003 8 19 51 AM 32 99 2 19 2003 8 20 40 AM 2 19 2003 8 20 50 4M 9 98 2 19 2003 8 25 10 AM 2 19 2003 8 25 33 AM 22 38 2 19 2003 8 26 27 AM 2 19 2003 8 26 40 4M 12 ER 2 19 2003 8 28 49 AM 2 19 2003 8 29 02 AM 13 ER 2 19 2003 8 32 15 AM 2 19 2003 8 32 17 AM 1 ER 2 19
384. rt by selecting the End time checkbox and choosing a specific end time bh 2 08 02 AM Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons revision 105 255 15 Reports Folder Reports Folder Anti Passback Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Apply start and end time to each day checkbox If selected the specified time range will be applied to any date that falls within the specified date range For example if you specify a Date Time Filter starting January 1 1998 at 8 00 AM and ending March 31 1998 at 7 00 PM e H this box is checked the report will include only data collected during the hours of 8 00 AM through 7 00 PM on any and all days between January 1 and March 31 e H this box is not checked the report will include all data gathered from 8 00 AM on January straight through until March 31 at 7 00 PM Cardholder Filter section Includes the Last Name First Name and Badge ID fields These fields are available only for applicable report types These fields are not case sensitive and will match any names beginning with the characters you type much like the Cardholder form searches For example typing smith for Last Name will match Smith SMITHY smithereen etc Last Name text
385. rties Window Procedures 366 18 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Add a Mask Unmask Alarm Input For Group Action cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenaeeeeeaees 366 Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties Window csceseeeees 367 Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Properties Window Procedures 368 Add a Mask Unmask Alarm Mask Group Action cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeseaeeneneees 368 Mask Unmask Door Properties Window ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 369 Mask Unmask Door Properties Window Procedures ao00000sssoooeeonnnnnenne 370 Add a Mask Unmask Door Action 370 Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Properties Window 371 Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Properties Window Procedures 372 Add a Mask Unmask Door Forced Open Action cceeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeesenaeeeeneees 372 Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties Window 373 Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Properties Window PROCCOU eet ee Bia he tence de el oh he eal 374 Add a Mask Unmask Door Forced Open for Reader Group Action 0 ccceeeeeeeees 374 Mask Unmask Door Held Open Properties Window ceeseeeeeeeee 375 Mask Unmask Door Held Open Properties Window Procedures 376 Add a Mask Unmask Door Held Open Action 0 cccccccescceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeseeeeeeeeneees 376 Mask Unmask Door Held Open for Reader
386. running Apollo hardware there is a Hardware Status Update Frequency window to set automatic updates You can set the frequency to No Updates 10 15 20 30 or 60 minutes by selecting Hardware Status Frequency from the Configure menu Perform a Device Test 70 revision 105 Operators can perform a test on various devices in the system A special test mode operation is available for Input Groups Reader Groups Door Forced and Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reader Groups Access Grants Performing this test allows you to see which devices generated alarms and which ones did not 1 Display the Device Groups window by selecting View gt Device Groups 2 Right click the device group and select the Test Inputs Test Door Forced or Test Access Grants If you select Test Access Grants skip to step 7 3 A dialog box appears Test Mode Options x C Show alarms in all windows on all monitoring stations Show alarms only in Test Mode windows Test duration minutes WW E Cancel 4 You have two choices Choose Show alarms only in Test Mode windows if you do not want the results to show up on any Monitoring Station Otherwise choose Show alarms in all windows on all Monitoring Stations 5 Type in the duration in minutes of the test This option is available only if you selected Show alarms only in Test mode windows 6 Click OK to initiate the test 7 A Test Mode window launches The top portion of the
387. rver by clicking the Start button then selecting Programs gt B A S LS ET gt Linkage Server 2 Open the Select Guard Tour window by completing one of the following e From the Control menu select Guard Tour gt Launch revision 105 309 19 Guard Tour Toolbar Shortcut e Click the down arrow on the Guard Tour toolbar button and select Launch Tour Ch e Right click a tour name in the system status tree and select Launch Tour r Select tour Select guard 7 Tour z E Lake Lisa 1 Dn Weekend AM Tour Dn Weekend PM Tour Show guards with proper security clearance level C Show all guards MC Enter badge ID manually Tour Instructions OK Cancel Help 3 Select a tour in the Tour listing window Note You can click Tour Instructions to see if any special instructions exist for this tour These instructions are written when the tour is configured in System Administration 4 If you know the badge ID of the tour guard select the Enter badge ID manually radio button and type in their ID Otherwise select the Select guard radio button and complete the following a Select the Show guards with proper security clearance level radio button to limit the number of tour guards to choose from or select the Show all guards radio button to list all tour guards regardless of their security clearance levels b Click a tour guard entry in the Name listing window to select i
388. s This documentation refers to cardholder data fields that are shipped as the default by Best If you have used the FormsDesigner application to revision 105 129 12 Cardholders Folder customize your cardholder data the elements on your cardholders folders forms will be different The Segments form is only available if segmentation is enabled on your system The availability of certain forms and fields in the Cardholders folder is subject to licensing restrictions Cardholders Folder Form Element Type Comment Common form elemenis right section Photo display display Displays the cardholder s photo as it appears on their badge Signature display display Displays the cardholder s signature as it appears on their badge Last access display If Show Last Granted Location is selected in the Cardholder menu displays information about the most recent valid access by this cardholder including the triggered event date time and reader name If Show Last Attempted Location is selected in the Cardholder menu displays information about the most recent access attempt whether access was granted or not by this cardholder including the triggered event date time and reader name Badge ID display Displays the numeric identifier assigned to the cardholder s active badge Issue code display Displays the issue code assigned to the cardholder s active badge Prints display Displays the nu
389. s All emergency events over time Enterprise Servers Listing of Enterprise servers defined on this system This report is valid only for systems that use the Enterprise Management feature Event Codes Event code templates and event code mapping configuration Event Count By Panel Listing of each event counts grouped by panel Fire Device Input Outputs Lists all fire input outputs grouped by panel and fire device Global APB MobileVerify Occupancy By Date Shows the last known area accessed by each cardholder sorted by date and time 418 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Report name Description Global APB Shows the last known area accessed by each cardholder sorted by name MobileVerify Occupancy By Name Global I O Linkages Lists all of the global I O linkages including the input events and output actions Guard Tour Lists all of the configured guard tours including checkpoints actions and messages Configuration Guard Tour History Lists all of the events associated with checkpoints that happened for each guard tour Hardware Panels Listing of all hardware panels Holidays List of all system holiday definitions Intercom Functions Listing of all intercom functions Intercom Stations Listing of all intercom stations Intrusion Detection Areas Lists all intrusion areas grouped by panel Intrusion Detection
390. s Magnetic Stripe Reader Form element Comment Panels readers window Lists all panels and readers in the system Selected readers Contains those readers from which the Video Verification window will receive information If this list is empty no alarms will display in the Video Verification window Live video Displays live video from a CCTV camera device at a specific location e Ifyou see a black box instead of live video it means that either there is no camera available or the camera isn t working properly e Ifyou see a Live video not available message it means that your System Administrator has made live video from that location unavailable to Alarm Monitoring stations Photograph Displays a specific cardholder record photo revision 105 99 8 Video Verification Form element Comment On new event display Includes the Photograph and Video checkbox fields Video If checked pan tilt and zoom CCTV commands are automatically enabled If unchecked pan tilt and zoom CCTV commands must be manually invoked Live video remains visible regardless of the state of this checkbox Photograph If checked as each new alarm arrives the corresponding cardholder photo displays Alarms window Lists alarms as they arrive Each row represents one alarm Click the following column headings to arrange alarms by that heading Alarm Description Name of the alarm Cardholder
391. s Form Overview This form allows you to add filtering criteria to a receiver account zone report so that you can narrow the results of your report 274 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Field Table Reports Folder Receiver Account Zone Reports Form Form Element Type Comment Listing window display Lists currently defined alarm acknowledgment reports and each report s type s Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type Today push button Click this button to e Set the Start time date to 12 00 00 AM on the current date e Set the End time date to 11 59 59 PM on the current date Start section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the Start date checkbox and choose a specific start date from the drop down calendar ES April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 20 21 2 3 4 mm 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 2 27 28 29 30 1 2 4 P 6 7 8 9 lt Today 3 6 2003 e Select the first month for which data is to be included in this report Use the a and navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the Led displayed year to access the spin buttons 2003 4 e Once you have selected a month and a ye
392. s folder is launched from where you can search for and select the cardholder you wish to assign to the selected asset revision 105 293 16 Assets Folder Assets Folder Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Search push button This button is not used Add push button This button is not used Modify push button This button is not used Delete push button This button is not used Print push button This button launches the Report Print Options window from where you can preview print or export a report push button Moves to the first matching record push button Moves 10 matching records back push button Moves to the previous matching record push button Moves to the next matching record EEE a2 RS push button Moves 10 matching records forward push button Moves to the last matching record Record count numeric Displayed in view mode and indicates the number of the record out of the total number of records found by the most recent search operation For example 6 of 10 You can type in a number and hit the lt Enter gt key to jump to that record number Close push button Closes the Assets folder 294 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Form Procedures Run an Asset Report Note This procedure does not apply to Alarm Monitoring 1 In the listing window select the type of report you want to run 2 Sel
393. s that you want the report to have Click OK revision 105 391 A Actions Request Print Action Flowchart B A S LS checks to see if the printer Is the If fails use default print checkbox selected in the Report Print Properties window No B A S 1 S sends print action request to Crystal Reports Crystal Reports attempts to access the printer Can Crystal Reports access the printer under the Linkage Server account Yes Crystal Reports accesses the printer This flowchart shows how a report may get printed from the default printer although the If fails use default printer checkbox is NOT selected in the Report Print Properties window 392 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reset Use Limit Properties Window Displayed by clicking Add on the Action Group Properties window and selecting Reset Use Limit from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide You can also select the Action Types ISC Database Download Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Reset Use Limit Properties E Reset Use Limit Description Peset Use Limit Factory Front Door Controller fm Front Door Bldg 1 fin Back Door Bldg 1 fm Front entrance fmm Back entrance fin 2nd floor supply closet fm Bldg 1 Front Entrance Panel fn Bldg 1 Back Entrance Panel
394. s window 348 field table esencan a 348 Brocedures innii ie 349 Delete access levels assignments s eeseeeeeeseeee 170 alarina ee i a o e a 121 alarm in Video Verification window 101 als al res e e ae eeraa a a E e ea 122 ASSCU ee 283 adg recofd insense 162 cardholder record 146 TOPOL EE 241 scheduled action using the scheduler right click E EE 329 selected group of cardholder records 146 VISIUTECOLC E 208 Visitor record 149 Deny or grant ACCOSS oes eee cee ceseeeeeeseeeeeees 104 Destroy all cardholder data 147 Details EE 217 Delt bleech ee ed 217 OVELVIGW Edi beier 217 Device group ICONS 000 eee ese cecseeeeecnseeeeeeeees 64 Device Groups Window 00 eee esse cseceeeeeees 62 DEVICE ICONS 20 65 Device Output Group Properties window 353 held table s i ca eed tia te ae ek 354 Procedures vies ced eie tidak gege 354 Device Output Properties window s sssseeees 350 Dell tablen 351 Drocedureg sosire eieiei ss 351 Dialup panels view last connection time 71 Directory Accounts form sseeeeseeereeeeseeeeee 181 field table euer EH 181 pLOCEAUTES ws eege ENEE 181 Disable strong password enforcement 23 Display cardholder photo and live video 101 monitoring map 122 multiple hardware views 59 scheduler right click menu ee 326 Display options for user 55 Display Video Search window cee 95 Docu
395. s window depend on what you select in the Filter by drop down list The report displays the alarm acknowledgments for only the devices you select Clear push button Clears all current filter criteria Print push button Displays the Print Report Options window Preview push button Displays the selected report with selected criteria in the Report Print Preview window Help push button Displays relevant on screen help for this form 272 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Reports Folder Alarm Acknowledgment Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Use restored records checkbox If this checkbox is selected data for an event or user transaction report is obtained from restored events transactions in the database rather than from the current live events transactions Restored events transactions are those restored using the Restore Archive button on the Restoring form of the Archives folder For more information refer to the Archives Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Close push button Closes the Reports folder Run an Alarm Acknowledgment Report 1 2 3 4 Note Select Reports from the View menu The Reports folder opens Select the Alarm Acknowledgment Reports tab In the listing window select the report you wish to run Complete the Date Time Filter section to specify a date time interval for gathering data Only data gath
396. scriber placed to an open subscriber Call to a private Call to a private Intercom Generated when a call has been placed to a subscriber subscriber private subscriber Capture Source Capture Source Video Mismatch Mismatch Camera Motion Camera Motion Video Detected Detected Camera Motion Camera Motion Video Detected Restored Detected Restored Camera Tamper Active Camera Tamper Active Video Camera Tamper Camera Tamper Video Restored Restored Cancel Entire Sale Cancel Entire Sale POS Generated when a transaction is used to indicate that an entire sale was cancelled Cash Amount Tendered Cash Amount Tendered POS Generated when an event is used to indicate that a cash amount has been tendered Cash or Safe Drop Cash or Safe Drop POS Generated when a transaction indicating a cash or safe drop has occurred Change Due Change Due POS Generated when a transaction indicating the change due has occurred revision 105 399 B Alarm Event Descriptions Alarm Event Event Type Description Charge Account Tender Charge Account Tender POS Generated when a charge account was used as tender Check Tender Check Tender POS Generated when a check was used as tender Cipher Mode Disabled Cipher Mode Disabled System Generated when cipher mode is disabled for a reader Cipher Mode Enabled Cipher Mode Enabled System Generated when cipher mode is enabled for a reade
397. search will find all visits that are currently signed in and have not been signed out yet Ending within checkbox spin Enabled for selection only when the Active checkbox is selected If buttons drop down list selected specify the number of hours days or minutes that the visit is scheduled to end in For example you can search for all visits that are scheduled to end within the next two days revision 105 215 14 Visits Folder Status Search Form Field Table Continued Form Element Type Comment Active overstayed checkbox If selected the search will find all visits that are currently signed in where the current date and time is after the scheduled time out For example a visitor that was supposed to leave at 3 p m but is still visiting at 5 p m Finished checkbox If selected the search will locate visits that occurred in the past Refresh rate in minutes numeric The refresh rate is how often the database is queried to see if it has changed The refresh rate is stored on a per user basis and only applies when searching based on a status i e the Scheduled future Scheduled late Active Active overstayed or Finished status on the Status search form in the Visits folder The default value is set in the Refresh rate in minutes field on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options form A custom refresh rate can be specified as long as the Use
398. ser Guide Alarm Acknowledgment Window Continued Form Element Comment Audio Plays audio instructions Print Prints the information from this window including alarm information and any notes entered Previous Displays information about the previous alarm in the Main Alarm Monitoring window Next Displays information about the next alarm in the Main Alarm Monitoring window Acknowledge Tells the B A S LS software to acknowledge the currently selected alarm Close Closes the Alarm Acknowledgment window Help Displays online assistance for using this window Alarm Acknowledgment Procedures An Action is any task When you acknowledge an alarm you provide a software response to it Your performed by software System Administrator can configure alarms so they have to or do not have to be as a result of an event or acknowledged before they are deleted from the Main Alarm Monitoring window schedule Furthermore your System Administrator can associate actions with an alarm so when the alarm is acknowledged an action or group of actions is automatically triggered revision 105 119 11 Acknowledge Alarms Acknowledge an Alarm An initiating alarm is an alarm that B A S LS automatically deletes when the corresponding canceling alarm occurs Display the Alarm Acknowledgment window by double clicking an alarm If the alarm has text instructions associated with it the information displays in
399. ser Guide Note If you right click anywhere on the Scheduler form when a scheduled action is not selected in the listing window the scheduler right click menu will look like this Add Action Start amp ction Stop Action View Action History View Gurrent Stetus Refresh All Actions Delete Action Modify 4ction Add and Schedule an Action Using the Scheduler Right Click Menu 1 Right click anywhere on the Scheduler form The scheduler right click menu is displayed 2 Select the Add Action menu option The Add Action Wizard opens 3 Proceed to step 3 of the Add and Schedule an Action procedure in this chapter Start an Action 1 Right click on a scheduled action in the listing window The scheduler right click menu is displayed 2 Select the Start Action menu option to start the selected action immediately Stop an Action 1 Right click on a scheduled action in the listing window The scheduler right click menu is displayed 2 Select the Stop Action menu option to stop the selected action immediately View Action History 1 Right click on a scheduled action in the listing window The scheduler right click menu is displayed 2 Select the View Action History menu option The Action History window opens and the name of the action when the action was run the result the revision 105 327 20 Scheduler Folder application and any errors or messages that re
400. ser to acknowledge a group of alarms simultaneously Acknowledge Ot Delete Removes the selected alarm from the window Delete All Removes all alarms from the window Select All Selects all alarms in the window View menu Menu option Toolbar button Function Badge Info Displays the cardholder folder window which contains nine forms tabs Cardholder Badge Access Level Biometrics Visits Assets Directory Accounts Guard Tours and Reports Note When the cardholder folder window displays an additional menu option Cardholder displays For more information refer to Cardholder menu on page 43 34 revision 105 View menu Continued Alarm Monitoring User Guide Menu option Toolbar button Function Visits Displays the Visits folder window which contains the Status search Visit Details Email and Reports forms tabs From the Visits folder window you can e search visit records based on scheduled time in or out and date and time the record was last changed e display visit records for a selected date range e add modify or delete visits e print disposable badges e sign in or out a visit e send e mail notifications e generate reports Asset Info Displays the Asset folder window which contains the Assets Assets Classes and Assignments forms tabs System Status Displays the System Status window which lists all access control devices defined in System Administration Device
401. sestcedsdeeesenslesesae acd ctestel edeendsecaledesbiee 88 Video Monitoring tee 88 aLaunch Video Live Recorded From a Camera ccceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeetees 88 Load and View ai Video File fsceces fa casteccdiascessanecefateratacectvtbssscasbartsvdecchsdbneddseasisaadeeceavbes 89 revision 105 5 Table of Contents Monitor Video in Matrix View cccccesscccecereesecceeeeeseeceeeeeneeeaeeeenseeeeeeenseeeeeeesneeaaeeseneneaes 89 Monitor Video of Multiple Cameras Successively cceeccceeeteeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeaees 90 Monitor Video of a Specific Camera cccccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeesenaeeesaes 90 View the Video TOUP es idee ae te ee ed hs hes ae 91 Elte Ne HR 91 Export Video TOA EE Auen ee ea i a ae ei 92 Gaptuire an Image E 92 Create a Videos Event ii aie ithe bn neben a ae 93 Switch Camera Views Displayed in Video Player ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 93 Switch Between Camera and Monitor Views cccccecesceeceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeteaeeeeaas 93 Pan CTT ZOOM EE 93 Display the Video Search Window 95 Search VideO EE 95 Search Specific Portions of a Camera View ecceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeaeeeeed 96 View e 98 Filter Search Resu Sa n a e ea e a e aa aa till teria Ae 98 Chapter 8 Video Verification eeEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEER KEEN 99 Video Verification WiNdOW
402. sets folder Reports form via the Print Report Options window Print a report save it to a file or send it over electronic mail Search for any textual information in the report This window is displayed by Clicking on the Print Preview button on any form in the Reports folder Clicking on the Print Preview toolbar button when a report is selected on a form in the Reports folder Clicking Print on the form selecting the Print to a Preview Window radio button on the Print Report Options window then clicking the OK button This is how the Report Print Preview form can be viewed from the Reports form in the Cardholders folder the Visits folder or the Assets folder revision 105 303 18 Report Print Preview Window Report Print Preview Window amp amp po A a4 2 of2 crystal e CBORD ISO CBORD Mac Magnetic Fe Report Date 2 14 2003 11 53 27AM 1 Wiegand Fo Magnetic Format Format Type Magnetic Asset Format Facility Code 12345 Badge Offset Number Guest No Smart Card Access Control Fields on Track 2 Field Order Maximum Number of Digits Facility Code 1 5 Card Number 2 6 Issue Code 3 1 Total Digits 12 Has Custom Encoding No Use Custom Encoding Only No Segments Format ID Primary lt All Segments 1 Wiegand Format 304 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Report Print Preview Window Field Table Report Print Previ
403. shold Reached Video Event Threshold Reached Video Generated when the user defined event threshold has been reached The percent of disk space used by video events has been reached typically signaling the archive server to start archiving or purging Video Server Disk Full Video Server Disk Full Video Generated when the user defined event threshold has been exceeded by 5 or more The percent of disk space used by video events has been exceeded by at least 5 typically signaling the archive server to start archiving or purging If a user defined event threshold has not been defined this alarm event will be generated when the video server disk space is 95 full of video events Video Server is Not Recording Video Server is Not Recording Video Generated when it has been detected that the video recorder is no longer recording A check is done periodically default is every 10 minutes to check to make sure that video is still being recorded This event is generated when the check fails Void or Error Correction Void or Error Correction POS Transaction that indicates a void or error correction Walk Test Walk Test Fire Generated when walk test is initiated A walk test is used to test devices in the system and report devices addressed incorrectly The device and the first zone programmed for this device are reported with each message Walk Test Uninstall Walk
404. sign to the asset On the Assignments form of the Assets folder the name of the cardholder will appear in the Assign To push button Click Assign To to assign the selected asset to the selected cardholder The name of the cardholder will appear in the listing window Unassign an Asset Note This procedure does not apply to view only workstations Locate the record of the asset that you want to unassign In the listing window select the name of the cardholder who is currently assigned to the asset The entry of the cardholder who is assigned will not list an Unassigned Date Right click on the cardholder entry you selected and choose Unassign Asset from the menu The Unassigned field will be updated to the current date Search for a Cardholder Assigned to an Asset 292 revision 105 Locate the asset record that you want to look up a cardholder for In the listing window select the name of the cardholder you want to look up Right click on the cardholder entry you selected and choose Find Cardholder from the menu The Cardholders folder will display the record of the cardholder you selected Reports Form Note Alarm Monitoring User Guide The Reports form is not available in view edit only workstations or in the Alarm Monitoring application Assets olx e Assets i Asset Classes el Assignments Reports Scan ID 123456 Computer e Name Laptop Laptop 7 Type H Limit report to curr
405. sion 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 17 Print Report Options Window Toolbar Shortcut a Print From the Print Report Options window you can e Choose a destination for the report Choices include Preview Window the default Direct Export to a File Directly to a Printer e Update the subtitle used for the report This window is displayed by clicking the Print button on the Reports form or the Print toolbar button while a report is displayed revision 105 297 17 Print Report Options Window Print Report Options Window Print Report Options v Hompttor humbe of Pages 298 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Print Report Options Window Field Table Print Report Options Window Form Element Type Comment Print Destination section Includes the Print to a Preview Window Export Directly to a File and Print Directly to a Printer radio buttons Also includes the Printer drop down list and the Prompt for Number of Pages checkbox Print to a Preview Window radio button If selected the Report Print Preview window will be displayed when the OK button is clicked In the Report Print Preview window you can view the selected report on the screen For more information refer to Chapter 18 Report Print Preview Window on page 303 Export Directly to a File radio button If selected the Export window will be displayed when the OK button
406. sit s start time is on or after the specified time after the specified time or has no specified time You can change the time by clicking in the field and typing new Alarm Monitoring User Guide values or by using the spin buttons The hour minute and time of day are all adjusted individually c Inthe End time drop down list select whether the visit s end time is on or after the specified time after the specified time or has no specified time You can change the time by clicking in the field and typing new values or by using the spin buttons The hour minute and time of day are all adjusted individually d Click OK 6 Click OK The visit records that meet the search criteria will be displayed in the Visits listing window 7 To search for a scheduled time out time in or time out repeat the same process described in steps 4 6 except use the buttons to the left of whichever time you are searching for Retrieve the Most Recent Visit Search Results 1 Click Search 2 Click Last Search The criteria you selected from the most recent search operation will be inserted into the appropriate fields 3 Ifyou want modify your search criteria 4 Click OK 5 B A S I S retrieves and displays the matching record s in the Visits listing window Find a Cardholder or Visitor Associated with a Visit 1 Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens 2 Locate the visit record that you wish to f
407. sitor already has an active access control badge from manual assignment or another visit this field will automatically be filled in with that ID e H the checkbox is deselected the system will not attempt to assign an access control badge ID 7 Click the Sign In The visit will be added the Time In field will be updated to the current date and time and any access control badge assigned will become active Sign Out a Visit Note This procedure does not apply to view only workstations Each visit has a time that it is scheduled to end When the visitor leaves and the visit actually ends the visit should be signed out When a visit is signed out the actual Time Out of the visitor is updated to the current date and time and any access control badge that the visitor is issued is deactivated To use the Sign Out feature you must first configure a badge status to use when doing an automatic sign out This is done on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder For more information refer to Configure System wide Visit Options in the Cardholder Options Folder in the System Administration User Guide 1 Select Visits from the View menu The Visits folder opens 2 Locate the active visit record that needs to be signed out 3 In the Visits listing window select the active visit that you want to sign out by clicking on it 4 Click the Sign Out 5 The message Are you sure you wish to sign out the selected vis
408. ss group you select all of the access levels it contains c Click Select d Click Yes Repeat step 7 for each access level you want to assign Click OK revision 105 165 12 Cardholders Folder Assign Activation and Deactivation Dates to Access Levels 1 On the Access Levels form click Modify 2 The access levels listing window displays all access levels that are currently configured for use with the selected cardholder s badge type From the listing window select one or more access levels 3 Click Activate Dates The Access Level Activation Dates window opens The selected access levels that have been assigned to the selected cardholder badge record will be listed in the Assigned Access Levels listing window Assigned Access Levels East Coast Third Shift BD West Coast Third Shift zli man H Activation Dates iF Date 4 Click on an access level entry to select it 5 Inthe Activation Date section a Type a numeric date into the field or select a date from the drop down calendar April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 331 1 2 3 ap 7 8 9 10 14 15 16 17 2 22 23 24 2 29 30 1 2 4 5 6 8 e To select a month click on the and Ej navigation buttons e You can also select a month by clicking on the displayed month to access a drop down list of months Highlight the month you want to select it e Navigate to a year by clicking on the displayed year to access the
409. sssitnstnsstnnnttnntnnnnnnnennnnt 143 Cardholder FO EE 144 8 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Cardholder Form Overview TE 144 Cardholder Form Procedures stees EE eeben 145 Add a Cardholder Record A 145 Modify a Cardholder Record cccsceeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeaaeeceeeeeecaaeeeceeeeesaeeeseaeeesnaeeeseeeeees 146 Delete a Cardholder Record AAA 146 Delete a Selected Group of Cardholder RecordS ssssssssssesssressressesssiessrnssrrnesrresens 146 Destroy all Cardholder Data cccecceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaaeeseeesesiaaeteaes 147 Visitor OM EE 147 Visitor Form Overview o eccccccccceceeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeaaeseeeeeecaaeeseeaeeeseaaeseseeeeeseaeeseeeeeessaeseennees 147 Visitor Form Procedures EE 148 ee RR Eelere EE 148 Modify a Visitor RECOI cccceseccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeessaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaseaaaeeesnseaaeeeeeneeaaeeneneees 149 Delete a Visitor RECO EE 149 Segments EE 150 Segments Form OVErview ccccccccescceceeeeeeeeeeececeeeecaaeeceeeeeseaaeeseceeessaaeeseeneeessaeenseneees 150 Segments Form Procedures ees 151 Modify a Cardholder s Segment Assignment sssssseessseesseessiessisssirssrrnssrnnsrnssennsen nent 151 Modify a Group of Cardholder s Segments ccccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeesnaeeeeaas 151 Badge Form View Model 153 Badge Form Modify Mode eetdt ee SEENEN 153 Badge Form Procedures AEN 157 Add a Badge Record EE 157 Modify a
410. st Select this radio button and choose a printer from the drop down list if you want the scheduled report to print to a printer other than the workstation s default printer Note The choices in the drop down list are printers that are available for the workstation running the linkage server and not for the workstation that the action is being configured on If fails use default printer checkbox If you selected the Select printer below radio button select this checkbox if you want to print from the default printer if the selected printer does not exist Note Due to a limitation of Crystal Reports this setting is not enforced if the printer exists but is not accessible under the linkage server account When this occurs the report will automatically be printed from the default printer regardless of this setting Number of pages numeric When configuring a report print action you can enter the number of pages that you want the report to have OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Report Print Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Report Print Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Report Print Properties Window Procedures Add a Report Print Action 390 revision 105 1 Display the Report Print Properties window 2 From the
411. st Access Badge ID Issue code Prints rans rans Person type Eardholder z Cardholders Folder Badge Form Form Element Type Comment Badge listing display Displayed in view mode Lists all badges for the selected cardholder window Badge ID numeric In add and modify mode displays the numeric identifier that is assigned to this badge revision 105 153 12 Cardholders Folder Cardholders Folder Badge Form Continued down calendar Form Element Type Comment Issue code numeric Displayed in add or modify mode Indicates the selected badge s issue code if your installation uses issue codes on its badges Note Issue codes are required for guest badges Activate numeric drop Displayed in add or modify mode Indicates the date when the selected badge becomes valid The current date at the time the badge record is created is entered by default but you can change this value by typing a numeric date into the field or by selecting a date from the drop down calendar April 2003 D Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 3 31 1 2 3 m7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 e To select a month click on the Ei and w navigation buttons e You can also select a month by clicking on the displayed month to access a drop down list of months Highlight the month you want to select it e Navigate to a year by clicking on the displayed year to ES access the ye
412. st proceed to exit readers option is enabled Untyped Abort Untyped Abort Trouble Generated when an alarm for a device of an unknown type has been aborted canceled Untyped Alarm Untyped Alarm Trouble Generated when an alarm for a device of unknown type occurs Untyped Alarm Restore Untyped Alarm Restore Trouble Generated when the device of an unknown type is restored Untyped Bypass Untyped Bypass Trouble Generated when a device of an unknown type has been bypassed Use Limit Exceeded Use Limit Exceeded Access Access was denied because the use limit for Denied the badge has been exceeded User Failed to Reach User Failed to Reach System Generated when a user fails to exit at a Destination Destination specific exit reader after gaining access to a specific entry reader before the timeout value expires User Generated Video User Generated Video Video A user generated event can be created from Event Event any camera with any user defined time limit from within the video player window in the Alarm Monitoring application Video events are typically created automatically by the system based on an event from an external device A user generated event allows users to generate an event that is not tied to any device revision 105 413 B Alarm Event Descriptions Alarm Event Event Type Description Value Added Value Added POS Event that indicates value added Video Event Thre
413. stem OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the ISC Firmware Download Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the ISC Firmware Download Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window ISC Firmware Download Properties Window Procedures Add an ISC Firmware Download Action 1 Display the ISC Firmware Download Properties window 2 Select the Max number of panels to be downloaded at a time 3 From the Access Panel listing window click on an entry to select it Note You can select multiple entries 4 Click OK 362 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Mask Unmask Alarm Input Properties Window To display do one of the following Note Select the Action Types Mask Unmask Alarm Input Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Click the Add button on the Action Group Properties window and then select Mask Unmask Alarm Input from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Mask Unmask Alarm Input Properties xi Mask Unmask Alarm Input Alarm Input___ Parent Device Controler InputType_____ K Zou Reader 2 Panel Rdr Aux Input Mask C Unmask Cancel Help If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder
414. sulted from the action are all displayed Action Upload Cardholder Asset Hardware Records ua Recut pplication Dec 21 2001 09 06AM GM T 05 00 Failed Scheduler Dec 21 2001 09 064M GMT 05 00 Started Scheduler Dec 21 2001 09 03AM GMT 05 00 Failed Scheduler Dec 21 2001 09 03AM GMT 05 00 Started Scheduler Dec 21 2001 09 00AM GMT 05 00 Failed Scheduler Dec 21 2001 09 00AM GMT 05 00 Started Scheduler Dec 21 2001 08 57AM GMT 05 00 Failed Scheduler Dec 21 2001 08 57AM GMT 05 00 Started Scheduler Dec 21 2001 08 54AM GMT 05 00 Failed Scheduler Dec 21 2001 08 544M GMT 05 00 Started Scheduler Dec 21 2001 08 514M GMT 05 00 Failed Scheduler Te 21 2001 D PIAM MI II Started Scheduler of Errors and or messages from the action Replicator action is not currently running oe View the Current Status of an Action 1 Right click on a scheduled action in the listing window The scheduler right click menu is displayed 2 Select the View Current Status menu option A message similar to the following will be displayed D 1 Status Not running Description The action is not currently running Cancel Refresh an Action 1 Right click on a scheduled action in the listing window The scheduler right click menu is displayed 2 Select the Refresh Action menu option The listing window will be updated to display the most current information for the selected action 328 revision 105 Alarm Monit
415. system default rate checkbox is not selected Use system default rate checkbox If selected the system default rate will be used when refreshing The system default rate is set in the Refresh rate in minutes field on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder If not selected a custom refresh rate can be specified in the Refresh rate in minutes field 216 revision 105 Details Form Ea Yisits Late B Scheduled Jablonski JunekF Smith Mary J Lake Lisa A Downes Lisa A Merzer Kristen I cott Allen Leslie R Johnson Peter L E Status search F vist E Details C3 E mail E Reports Host name Status Merzer Kristen ative Visitor name Rice Scott N Alarm Monitoring User Guide MEE vistor Scheduled Time In Scheduled Time Out TimeIn mmeo al 2 19 2003 8 00 00 AM 2 19 2003 5 30 00 PM m M 2 18 2003 1 30 01 w E Rice Scott N Type Purpose Search Add Modify Delete Print Sign In Sign Qut I Multiple Selection J z Details Form Overview The Details form is a user defined form that has been created for you This form can be modified or even deleted using FormsDesigner By default the form contains the type and purpose of the visit Details Form Field Table Form Element Type Comment Type drop down listbox Select the type of visit Note Types of visits must first be c
416. t 5 Click OK The Guard Tour Live Tracking window opens 6 At this time the tour guard can begin the tour As the tour progresses the status of checkpoints and generated events display in the Guard Tour Live Tracking window For more information refer to Guard Tour Events Table on page 311 Note Checkpoints can be predecessors or successors A predecessor checkpoint is any checkpoint occurring before other checkpoints on a tour For example a tour has three stops Checkpoints one and two are the predecessors to checkpoint three A successor checkpoint is any checkpoint occurring after 310 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide other checkpoints on a tour For example a tour has three stops Checkpoints two and three are successors to checkpoint one 7 When a tour is completed the Guard Tour Live Tracking window displays the status of the tour and the events that were generated Guard Tour Live Tracking Main Facility Tour LL Ol x D Device 0 Checkpoint Status Min Time Max Time Actual Time Controler Q x2 Checkpoint reached late Om Is Om 2s 3m 445 Panell 2 Single Reader Checkpoint reached late Om 2s Om 5s Om 195 Panell 3 Dual Reader Checkpoint reached early Im Os 2m Os Om 11s Panell 4 Dual Reader2 Checkpoint reached late Om 1s Om 105 lin 4s Panell 5 Dual Reader 1 Auxiliary Input 1 Checkpoint reached late Om 1s Om 2s Im 13s Panell D Deris Tour vent Like Monitoring
417. t and ZOOM ccc ce ceeesssecececessteceeeeeseneees 93 Password enable disable strong password enforcement 23 OVELVIEW ee dE Eeer 22 St ndapde inniinn re 22 weak database warning eseeeeeeeeeneeeees 24 Pending alams ae ai 114 Perform a device test 70 Performance requirements video search 88 Precision Access form Cardholders folder 171 fi ld EE 171 D IERE eebe 172 Precision access mode eee eseesecesecseeeeeeeeee 50 Pre configured acknowledgment notes using 120 Preview a badge s s csscssscesceessvtessceecosteseceecse 188 Preview and print a report 241 Print badge eege ien See EE 188 badge for a visitor eee cece cteeteeeeeee 209 TOPOL EE 241 299 Print Badge s Window escceseecereeesteeeneee 198 field table sieniin eniron s 198 Print Report Options window eee 298 field table 0100 EES ed 299 PU KE 93 Pulse Open Door Group Properties window 381 field table sisirain 382 Il 382 Pulse Open Door Properties window 379 field table estate Ee Eesen ds 380 PLOCECUIES esses cesicvascsecosstbans psssseesrastesastecien 380 R Reader Mode Group Properties window 386 eld ta blenio oneni eese 387 Drocedureg ipren ereen 387 Reader Mode Properties window 005 383 field tables eege 384 DROE ihe ene 384 Reader Reports form 242 field TAB ese docehecsensvecsten dG Mock er S e edd Sege 243 OVELVIEW oo
418. t select Visitors Enter the visitor s name and any additional information in the visitor data fields You can switch to other tabs and modify the other forms at this time If you want to add a photograph or signature to the visitor record click Capture The Multimedia Capture module opens For more information 6 Alarm Monitoring User Guide refer to the Multimedia Capture Module appendix in the System Administration User Guide Click OK to save the record Modify a Visitor Record 1 2 3 4 Locate the visitor record you want to change Click Modify Make the changes you want to the record Click OK button to save the changes or the Cancel button to revert to the previously saved values Delete a Visitor Record Note Locate the visitor record you want to delete Click Delete Click OK If you delete the visitor record all associated records Badge Access Levels Precision Access Biometrics Assets Directory Accounts Guard Tours and Visits for the visitor are also removed from the database revision 105 149 12 Cardholders Folder Segments Form Note The Segments tab is only displayed if segmentation is enabled on your system Cardholders BEE ER Cardholder GB Segments Je Badge Bo Access Levels Precision Access Biometrics E Visits sl Assets Directory A 4 gt Last name First name Middle name Lake lisa kb Cardholder ID Badge type
419. t Get EE 212 VISIE FOFMAOVEIVIOW EE 212 Select Date s WINGOW 2 0 0 2 AEN 213 Select Time Range Window een 214 Status Search FOrm EE 215 Status Search Form Overview cccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeesaaaesseneeeessaeeeseneees 215 Ri ME EE 217 Details Form Overview 0 ccccceeccceceeneeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeecaaeeseneeecaaeeseeneeesaaeseeaaeesneeeseaeeesaes 217 E mail ROM ssc tetera ay nee ee hts at A a at tt 218 E mail Form Nee vsti ENEE tial aa in bhai EE ER aide 218 Add Re ipient lee 220 Fetter attic else eteeEete 221 Reports Form Overview cccccecceceeeeeenceeceeeeeeaaeeceeaeeeeaaeeeneeeeeseaaeeeeeeessaaeeeseneessnaeessnes 221 Reports Form Procedures AAA 221 Run a Visit Report from the Visits Folder A 221 Select Host Wizard Search Form EE 224 12 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Select Host Wizard Search Form Overview 00 00 ecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeessaeesneeeneeseeeees 224 Select Host Wizard Select Form ccceecceeessseesesseeeeeesseeseeseeeeensseenenes 226 Select Host Wizard Select Form Overview ec ceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneessaeesneesseeeneeeeas 226 Select Visitor Wizard Search FOr ceeccceessceeseeseeeesensceesenseneeeeseeeeeess 227 Select Visitor Wizard Search Form OVervieW 0 0 eeeeseeseeceneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeesseeenaes 227 Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add Fom 0 0 eeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeenaeeees 229 Select Visitor Wizard Select or Add
420. t eai a ana a aaaeeeaa 108 Anti Passback Area Right click Options ccceeccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeseeeeeeseaeeseneees 108 Guard Tour Right click Options ccccccceeseeeceeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeseceeesseaeeseneeeeseaaeeseneees 109 Cisco Hardware Right click Options cccsceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeneeeessaeeeeeneees 109 Single and Double Left click Mode ce cceceessseeseeseeesenseeeteeseeeeeeseeeeeeee 109 Activate Single or Double Left click Mode ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeseaeeneneees 110 Select a Device in Single or Double Left click Mode cccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneees 110 Execute a Command in Single or Double Left click Mode ccccssseeeeesesteeeeeeeeneaes 111 Chapter 10 Monitor Alarms sssssssunnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 113 Alarni ICONS Ee aiaa Reh aa aa a 113 Pending Alarms line 114 Procedure for Monitoring Alarms e EE Ee 115 Sort Alarm EE 115 Chapter 11 Acknowledge Alarms eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 117 Alarm Acknowledgment Window cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaaees 117 Alarm Acknowledgment Procedures 119 revision 105 7 Table of Contents Acknowledge an Alarm swictiiviclectticeebelecks r ie eE Klee gege geg TREE lge deeg n 2c 120 Fast Group Acknowledge Alarms cccccceeeeeeceeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeesaaaeseceeeseaeeneneeessuaeeesenes 120 De
421. t possible e g moving to the next record while the last record is being displayed Retrieve the Most Recent Search Results 1 Click Search 2 Click Last Search The criteria you selected from the most recent search operation will be inserted into the appropriate fields 3 If you want modify your search criteria 4 Click OK B A S LS retrieves and displays the first matching record Use the EH E H and Hl buttons to navigate through the database A dimmed button means that the associated operation is not possible e g moving to the next record while the last record is being displayed 284 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Add an Asset Type Subtype Note This procedure does not apply to view only workstations Select Asset Info from the View menu The Assets folder opens Select Asset Types and Subtypes from the Asset menu The Asset Types and Subtypes Management window opens Asset Types Subtypes Asset Types 2 item s N A Click Add Enter the name of the asset type Do one of the following e If you don t want to add subtypes to this asset type click OK e Ifyou want to add a subtype select the Subtype tab then click Add Enter the name of the subtype then click OK Click Close to return to the Assets form revision 105 285 16 Assets Folder Asset Classes Form View Mode Jalal a gt b gt Lor feed Cities Audio
422. ta The folder contains eight forms the Report Configuration form the Reader Reports form the Alarm Panel Reports form the Anti Passback Reports form the Date Time Reports form the Event Reports form the Receiver Account Zone Reports form and the Alarm Acknowledgment Reports form This folder is displayed by selecting Reports from the View menu or by selecting the Reports toolbar button Reports are installed when Database Setup is run All reports are installed on the database server under the ReportTemplates subdirectory in the B A S LS installation path By default this location is C Program Files B A S LS ReportTemplates For more information refer to The Database Setup Program appendix in the Installation amp Setup User Guide Refer to the release notes for the versions of Seagate Crystal Reports that are supported The release notes are located on the root of the B A S LS CD ina file named B A S LS ET release notes rtf For more information refer to Appendix C Reports on page 415 revision 105 235 15 Reports Folder Report Configuration Form Denials and Grants by Reader ccess Denials Grants and Other Badge Events Access Denied Events Access Denied Events by Reader E Access Granted Events EI Access Granted Events by Reader cess Groups s Granted Denied Cardholder Access Granted Denied Cardholder Receiver Events Access Granted Denied Cardholder Receiver Events Access Granted Denied Cardhold
423. tart and 3 as the End B A S I S would search on 456789 revision 105 141 12 Cardholders Folder Keyboard Wedge Settings Window Continued Form Element Type Comment End numeric spin buttons The End field works in combination with the Start field As long as the ID is not a CAC that string of numbers typically contains the actual badge ID or social security number For a CAC that string of numbers doesn t contain the actual social security number but B A S I S does decrypt the social security number from the string The Start position is important because the string of numbers may contain other numbers in addition to what is being searched for it is the first position in the string of numbers that contains a digit of what is being searched for The End position is the last digit of what is being searched for The End position must be greater than or equal to the Start position Take for example the string 123456789 If 4 is the Start position and 7 is the End position then the BAS IS system will search on 4567 If you specify an End position that is less than the Start position B A S LS assumes the end is 255 Therefore for the string 123456789 with 4 as the Start and 3 as the End B A S I S would search on 456789 OK push button Applies the selected wedge scanner settings and closes the Keyboard Wedge Settings window Cancel push button Closes the
424. teS snien isea 257 Archive Purge Database Properties window 339 Held table ninr nsise 340 PLOCECUICS sisis isie simien eeri 340 Arrange Columns 58 Asset Classes form field fable ouer Ree eissis 287 modify mode 286 procedures re ore eri eaaet 288 VIEW E 286 E EE 45 Assets form Assets Tolder 280 fi ld tables ue see Ee teste sees 280 PLOCECUICS si sccsecessesedscsnysedcessesess dE Ee 282 Assets form Cardholders folder 000000000000 179 field table oss sebise veseshisces eerste dese ES 179 procedures eee eect e reeeo 179 Assign access levels to a badge 00 eee eeeeeeeee 164 access levels to cardholder group 168 revision 105 423 Index activation deactivation dates to access levels 166 asset to a cardholder eee ceeeeeeseeeseeeeee 179 cardholder to an aset 292 classes to AN aeset ee eeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeneeeneee 288 guard tour security clearance levels to a cardholder cic ennenen 184 precision access groups to a badge 172 Assignments form s ssseseseseeseerereseerrsrseererseeees 290 field table isisisi nesir 290 IC i esri 292 Automatic Guard Tour r spond topen raean s 314 SO UE 313 Automatic Guard Tour Properties window 342 field table iiien eset shssteessdissee eens 343 IO 343 B Badge form field table oo eee ana 153 modify mode 153 PLOCedUIeS ENEE ee ee eens 157 VIEW E 153 Badge Print Preview window field E 187 Drocedureg 20 cece cee ei eii ee
425. ted to log off click Yes a Alarm Monitoring e Single click the icon located in the upper left corner of the title bar and select Close When prompted to log off click Yes e Click the close button in the window s upper right corner When prompted to log off click Yes revision 105 31 1 Introduction 32 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 2 Main Alarm Monitoring Window The Main Alarm Monitoring window displays automatically when you log into the application You can open and close additional windows but the Main Alarm Monitoring window remains open until you log out of the entire application eh Alarm Monitoring System Account Main Alarm Monitor A File Edit View Trace Configure Control Options Window Help Selected alarm Sort criteria Alarm Description Pending 0 Total 0 Main Alarm Monitor BREAKTHROUGH DISABLED Zi Menus and Toolbars The menu bar is a horizontal list of options that appears at the top of the main window Scroll over each option to view a drop down menu A toolbar is a strip of buttons positioned by default just below the menu bar If you place your cursor over a toolbar button a tool tip identifies the name of the toolbar button Operators can customize how the toolbar displays they can e Change the toolbar from anchored to floating Toolbars are anchored by default and are displayed in horizontal rows below the menu bar Ancho
426. ter mode Device Groups Window 62 revision 105 The Device Groups window displays the currently configured device groups within a monitoring zone and is expandable in the tree view The Device Groups window allows operators to view test and change the status of devices readers inputs and outputs Alarm Monitoring User Guide Toolbar Shortcut To display the Device Groups Window click the View Device Groups toolbar button or select Device Groups from the View menu D Device Groups Bisi x ontrol System B Allinputs E AdriMagKey Aux In2 Ce MagKeyAusint KR Ridr2Prox Aux In2 activated G Adr2Prox Aux Int activated A MagKeyAuxOut2 A MaoKeyAuxOutl B Rdr2Pros Aux Du A Rdr2Prox Aux Out A SingleMagNoKey Aux Dutt A Gun i A Du revision 105 63 5 Monitor Devices Device Group Test Mode Window Similar windows display for the test access grants test forced open and test inputs for device groups The example below is a Test access grants for Reader Device Group window est access grants for Reader Device Group 10l E Total devices 3 Devices passed 2 Devices failed 1 Test started 12 04 PM Test In Progress Z Test Status Current Device Status Granted Access 1 access mode card only Granted Access 2 access mode pin or card OLNL 1320 2005 OLNL 1320 2020 Alarm Description Time Date Controller Device Card OGranted No Entry 12 06 16 PM 2
427. ter section select the icon s corresponding to the alarm panel s whose data you wish to include in the report If you don t select any alarm panels or click Report All data for all alarm panels will be reported 6 Click either the Print or Preview button depending on which function you wish to perform For more information refer to Chapter 18 Report Print Preview Window on page 303 Note Only data that s currently in the database can be included in the report Events or other transactions deleted because of space limitations or elapsed time are no longer available 252 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Anti Passback Reports Form SI Area Anti Passback Configuration Anti Passback Area Entrance History Anti Passback Cardhol Cardholders Located in Each APB Area by Date Anti Passback Cardhol Normal area Default Segment SI Cardholders Located in Each APB Area by Name Anti Passback Cardhol oy Area 2 muster zone Muster zone Default Segment i LAI ha sass ce nona Area 3 safe location Safe location Default Segment Area 4 normalarea Normalarea Default Segment Area 5 muster zone Muster zone Default Segment Midwest Segment Monday August 25 2003 Te Monday August 25 2003 E Anti Passback Reports Form Overview This form allows you to add filtering criteria to an anti passback report so that you can narrow the results of your report Depending on the type of report yo
428. that the device outputs in the group will deactivate When device outputs are deactivated that means they are in an off state e Select the Pulse radio button if you want this action to be that the device outputs in the group will pulse they will turn on and then turn off again 4 Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Execute Function List Properties Window To display do one of the following Note Selecting the Action Types Execute Function List Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard Clicking Add on the Action Group Properties window and selecting Execute Function List from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Execute Function List Properties xi Execute Function List Function List Name Controller Function List 1 Panel 1 Execute True Execute False Execute Pulse Cancel Help If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 355 A Actions Execute Function List Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Function List listing window display Displays a list of available function lists which have been configured in the system Execute True radio button W
429. the stored template Biometric Verify Mode Biometric Verify Mode System Generated when biometric verify mode is Disabled Disabled disabled 398 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Alarm Event Event Type Description Biometric Verify Mode Biometric Verify Mode System Generated when biometric verify mode is Enabled Enabled enabled When biometric verify mode is enabled the primary reader requires biometric verification from the alternate biometric reader Blind Camera Blind Camera Video Blind Camera Restored Blind Camera Restored Video Block Acknowledge Block Acknowledge Fire Generated when a block acknowledge command is sent This command acknowledges any existing unacknowledged alarms in the system all at once Cabinet Tamper Active Cabinet Tamper System Generated when a cabinet tamper condition has been detected Cabinet Tamper Cancelled Cabinet System Generated when a cabinet tamper condition Restored Tamper has been restored Call disconnected Call disconnected Intercom Generated when an intercom call has been disconnected Call Failed Call Failed Intercom Generated when a phone call fails Call to a busy Call to a busy Intercom Generated when an intercom call has been subscriber subscriber placed to a busy subscriber Call to an open Call to an open Intercom Generated when an intercom call has been subscriber sub
430. the Instructions sub window Click Print to print the instructions If the alarm has voice instructions click Audio To select pre configured acknowledgment note s click Select The Select Acknowledgment Notes dialog appears Select the name of the pre configured note and click OK To add notes to the alarm type your comments click in the Notes sub window If this is a canceling alarm any notes carried forward from the associated initiating alarm display in the Original Notes field Click Acknowledge to acknowledge the alarm e If your System Administrator has configured this alarm type for Require Login On Ack you must first log in before this alarm can be acknowledged e H this is an initiating alarm the corresponding canceling alarm may not be displayed until you acknowledge this alarm Whether this happens depends upon how your system is set up e Your System Administrator may have set up some types of alarms to be automatically deleted from the Main Alarm Monitoring window after you acknowledge them If this is not the case delete the alarm manually For more information refer to Delete an Alarm on page 121 You can acknowledge multiple alarms without closing the Alarm Acknowledgment window Repeat step 2 through 6 for each alarm you display in the Alarm Acknowledgment window Use the navigation buttons to move through the list of alarms To close the Alarm Acknowledgment window click Close Fast Gro
431. the badge Invalid PIN Invalid PIN Number Access Generated when access was denied because Denied an invalid PIN was entered Item Correct of Item Correct of POS Generated to indicate that an item was Previously entered Item Previously entered Item corrected Item Sold Item Sold POS Indicates an item was sold Key Override Key Override System Generated when the key override is used in a Mortise lockset Not supported in Cylindrical lockset Lamp Test Activated Lamp Test Activated Fire Generated when the lamp test is activated When a lamp test is activated the AM 2020 will send out a command sequence to display a set of solid blocks on the hardware s LCD Lamp Test Complete Lamp Test Complete Fire Generated when the lamp test successfully completes Motion Detected Motion Detected Video Motion Detected Motion Detected Video Restored Restored Line Error Active Line Error Active System Generated when a line error fault condition has been detected Line Error Restored Cancelled Line Error System Generated when the line error fault condition was restored Local I O Executed Local I O Executed System Generated when a local I O function list has Function List Function List been activated Lottery Pay Out Lottery Pay Out POS Generated when a lottery pay out has occurred 406 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Alarm Event Event Type Description Lottery Sale Lottery Sale POS Gen
432. the group of cardholders that you want to assign access levels 2 Select Bulk gt Assign Access Levels from the Cardholder menu The Bulk Access Levels Selections window opens Select the access level s below for the bulk assign operation Activate Dates Access Groups 1 selected I Overwrite activate date settings for existing assignments I Delete existing access level assignments 3 Click on the access level you want to assign to select it You can select multiple entries Optional If you want to assign all the access levels that belong to an access group a Click Access Groups The Select Access Levels in a Group window opens The Select Access Levels in a Group window lists all currently defined access groups You can expand an entry to display the list of access Note Alarm Monitoring User Guide levels that make up a group Select an access level or an access group If you select an access group you select all of the access levels it contains Select Access Levels in a Group xi Select the access group whose levels you wish to select or unselect then press the appropriate button Unselect Bi Access Group 2 Cancel off Demo Case b Click Select c Click Yes If you want to define the activation and deactivation dates click Activate Dates For more information refer to Assign Activation and Deactivation Dates to Access Levels on page 166 Select the Overwrite activate date settings for exist
433. the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 363 A Actions Mask Unmask Alarm Input Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Alarm Input listing display Displays a list of available alarm inputs which have been configured window in the system Mask radio button When configuring a mask unmask alarm input action select this radio button if you want the alarm input to be masked When alarm inputs are masked they are not reported to the Alarm Monitoring application or stored in the database for later event reporting Unmask radio button When configuring a mask unmask alarm input action select this radio button if you want the alarm input to be unmasked When alarm inputs are unmasked they are reported to the Alarm Monitoring application and are stored in the database for later event reporting OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Mask Unmask Alarm Input Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Mask Unmask Alarm Input Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Mask Unmask Alarm Input Properties Window Procedures Add a Mask Unmask Alarm Input Action 364 revision 105 1 Display the Mask Unmask Alarm Input Properties window 2 From the Alarm Input
434. time date to 12 00 00 AM on the current date e Set the End time date to 11 59 59 PM on the current date Start section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the Start date checkbox and choose a specific start date from the drop down calendar ER April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 20 21 2 3 ae 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 20 21 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 1 4 5 6 E 8 lt Today 3 6 2003 e Select the first month for which data is to be included in this report Use the and navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the displayed year and use the spin buttons 2003 gt gt e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the first day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date e Select the time for which data is to be included in this report by selecting the Start time checkbox and choosing a specific start time 08 ES M 208 024M Highlight the hour minutes or seconds by clicking on them Use the spin buttons to increase or decrease their value To change from AM to PM highlight AM by clicking on it and use the spin buttons revision 105 249 15 Reports Folder Reports Folder Alarm Panel Reports Fo
435. ting window is clicked Cardholder Visitor C Directory account SMTP address M E mail Form Add Recipient Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Cardholder radio button The Select Host Wizard Search form is displayed which allows you to add a cardholder as an e mail recipient For more information refer to Select Host Wizard Search Form on page 224 Visitor radio button The Select Visitor Wizard Search form is displayed which allows you to add a visitor as an e mail recipient Directory account radio button The Select Account window is displayed which allows you to add a directory account as an e mail recipient SMTP address radio button Type the SMTP address then click OK An example of an SMTP address is joesmith company com OK push button e Ifyou selected the Cardholder radio button the Select Host Wizard Search form is displayed For more information refer to Select Host Wizard Search Form on page 224 e Ifyou selected the Visitor radio button the Select Visitor Wizard Search form is displayed For more information refer to Select Visitor Wizard Search Form on page 227 e Ifyou selected the Directory account radio button the Select Account window is displayed e Ifyou selected the SMTP address radio button and typed an SMTP address the address will be added to the Additional Recipients listing window Cancel push button Closes the Add rec
436. tion The first and last frames of an event must have a motion level equal to or greater than the motion level value to be included in the search results Histogram A color coded graphical representation of motion levels Red indicates a frame meets or exceeds the minimum motion level Green indicates a frame is less than the threshold value You can click any part of the histogram to view the corresponding recorded video You do not need to wait for the search to complete to do so View area The main part of the Video Search window that displays thumbnails or detailed information about search results In this screen shot the view area displays detailed information Start Time End Time Duration and Motion level You can double click a thumbnail or an event in the view area to view the recorded video for that event in the Video Player You do not need to wait for the search to be complete to do so 86 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Event Settings Window When searching for events it is possible that an event occurs through out several frames Therefore the user can make adjustments to the event settings to obtain the best results The Event Settings window is displayed by selecting Event Settings from the Options menu in the Video Search window Event Settings Display new event if there has not been motion for the specified amount of time Enter a time limit in seconds If a
437. tion radio button in step 8 and a problem was found the Bulk Segment Validation Results window opens Click View Badges An explanation of the problem is displayed b Click OK c Click Continue The Bulk Action Results window opens and displays a summary of your modifications d Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Badge Form View Mode E Cardholders LS Cardholder de Segments wes Last name First name Lake Lisa Cardholder ID Badge type 123456789 Employee E Middle name Badge ID Badge Al 0 Employee 7 8 1996 7 8 2006 Search Add Modify Delete Print Encode Badge Form Modify Mode E Cardholders Modifying Badge MEE BB Access Levels Precision Access Biometrics R Visits sal Assets E Directoy A 4 gt No Last Access Badge ID Issue code Prints Activate Fan Fame Iaa gt y gt gt i 4 of 12 Deactivate MEE ES Cardholder d Segments GE Badge E Access Levels 8 Precision Access Biometrics B visits ell Assets E Directory A 4 gt Last name Lake Cardholder ID 123456789 Badge ID Activate Status Deactivate active D e 7 8 2005 e Embossed PIN Use limit IT Use extended strike held times J APB exempt Last changed IT Passage mode Last printed T Deadbolt override OK Cancel Clear Clear All Capture I Destination exempt Allow access to Lia dodu No La
438. to each day checkbox is checked then the trace will include only those events that occurred during the hours of 9 00 a m through 5 00 p m on the days December 1 through December gth 1999 e Ifthe Apply start and end time to each day checkbox is not checked then the 1st trace will include all events that occurred from 9 00 a m on December 1 until 5 00 p m on December gth Use restored transactions This option is applicable only when a historical trace is performed e Ifthe checkbox is selected restored transactions will be included in the historical trace e Ifthe checkbox is not selected normal transactions from the EVENTS table will be used for the historical trace Perform live trace Controls whether new events are displayed or not e Ifthe checkbox is selected the trace displays new events e Ifthe checkbox is not selected live tracing is disabled and new events are excluded from the trace Show only those alarms which have marked video Controls whether alarms events that have marked video are displayed or not e If the checkbox is selected live tracing shows events that are new AND are configured in the System Administration application to have video marked for them The marking is not instant so the trace may not show the icon in front of the event right away e When the Show Only Those Alarms Which Have Marked Video checkbox is checked and the Perform Historical Trace checkbox
439. tor s name will be displayed in the Visitor name field Cancel push button Closes the window without selecting a visitor and returns you to the Visit form in the Visits folder Help push button Displays online help for this topic revision 105 233 14 Visits Folder Select Import Source Window This window is displayed by clicking the Import button on any window in the Select Host Wizard or Select Visitor Wizard Select Import Source xi SA Corex CardScan scanner Not available Select Import Source Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Source listing display Displays a list of available sources such as a business card scanner to window import cardholder or visitor data from OK push button If a valid source is selected you will be able to import cardholder or visitor data using it Cancel push button Closes the Select Import Source window without selecting a source to import cardholder or visitor data from 234 revision 105 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Chapter 15 Reports Folder Toolbar Shortcut Reports Note The Reports folder contains forms with which you can e View on the screen reports created using report layout templates in the database and current data e Report on data that meets specified criteria such as dates times readers alarm panels cardholders and badge IDs e Printa report save it to a file or export the da
440. toring 1 Verify the Global Output Server is running by clicking Start and selecting Programs gt B A S I S ET gt Global Output Server 2 Right click an alarm and select Send Email The Send Email window opens 3 Click To and select place a checkmark beside the desired e mail addresses Use the lt Ctrl gt or the lt Shift gt key to select multiple addresses 4 The subject and body of the message are automatically populated with information that describes the alarm Click in either field to make any changes 5 Click OK Send Email xi Subject Alarm has occurred Cabinet T amper Restored Message The following alarm has occurred Alarm Description Cabinet Tamper Restored Time Date 5 55 12 PM 6 18 2002 192 characters Gk Cancel Field button Description To Allows you to select an e mail address that is already in the database Subject Displays the subject of the message By default the description of the alarm that has occurred is displayed To change it type over the text Message Displays the body of the message being sent By default information pertaining to the alarm is displayed To change it type over the text OK Once you are done click the OK button to send the message and exit the window Cancel To exit the window without sending an e mail message click the Cancel button revision 105 125 11 Acknowledge Alarms Send a Page Using B A
441. toring window performs the following function e Displays live video from one camera at any given time The Video Monitoring window is displayed by e Selecting the Video Monitoring toolbar button e Selecting View gt Video Monitoring from the menu Video Monitoring Window a File Edit View Trace Configure Control Options Window Help l x SI GC BR Device Groups E F Camera Device Group SEN Camera 01 En Camera 02 En Camera 03 En Camera 04 En Camera 05 SEN Camera 06 4 H A Main Alarm Monitor SI Camera 01 Ready BREAKTHROUGH DISABLED Con 7 Field Description Device Groups Lists the available video device groups A device group can contain devices from more than listing one access panel Device groups can also be segmented and belong either to one segment or all segments If a device group belongs to only one segment the group will contain only devices associated with the access panel defined for that segment Display area Displays a specific camera view live revision 105 79 7 Video Monitoring Video Player The Video Player performs the following functions e Displays live or recorded video from one camera e Displays live or recorded video from a group of cameras successively e Displays video from a group of cameras or a recorder simultaneously e Displays recorded video associated with a video search e Enables you to pan tilt and zoom
442. tton is pushed all entries in the Reader list are deselected Report All is displayed to the left of this button to indicate that data for all readers will be included in the report Report All __ selected display Indicates Report All if no devices are selected in the Reader field Indicates __ selected if one or more devices are selected in the Reader field revision 105 245 15 Reports Folder Readers Folder Reader Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Reader listing display Lists all readers on the system and the access panel to which each window is attached To select deselect a reader click on the icon beside it A 4 on an icon indicates that the reader is selected Only data from selected readers will be included in the report However if no devices are selected data for all readers will be reported Clear push button Clears all current filter criteria Print push button Displays the Print Report Options window Preview push button Displays the selected report with selected criteria in the Report Print Preview window Help push button Displays relevant on screen help for this form Use restored records checkbox If this checkbox is selected data for an event or user transaction report is obtained from restored events transactions in the database rather than from the current live events transactions Restored events transa
443. ty Up Asset Scan ID Asset Name x Down Intercom Station Called Controller Time Transmitter Transmitter Input Biometric Score 3 In the Select columns display field click highlight the name of a column then click gt gt The column name appears in the Columns to view display field 4 Arrange the column names in the order you want them to appear e Click highlight a column name in the Columns to view display box Then use the Up and Down buttons to change the column s relative position Note The order the column names appear in the Columns to view display field is the same order the columns will display in the window which you are configuring the columns for 5 Click OK and the window displays the new column configuration Set Automatic Display Options Several display options are available from the Options menu To activate an option select it place a checkmark beside it To deactivate an option select it again to remove the checkmark For information on the options available from the Options menu revision 105 59 4 Set Alarm Monitoring Display Options Display Multiple Windows 1 Open the desired windows using the toolbar buttons or menu options 2 From the Window menu select one of the following e Cascade e Tile Horizontally e Tile Vertically 3 Using the mouse click and drag each window to resize and relocate it Select Hardware View Options 60 revision 105 Hardware
444. u select you can optionally add a filter on area s start date time end date time badge ID and or cardholder name revision 105 253 15 Reports Folder Anti Passback Reports Form Field Table Reports Folder Anti Passback Reports Form Form Element Type Comment Listing window display Lists currently defined anti passback reports and each report s type Note that some reports are categorized under more than one type Today push button Click this button to e Set the Start time date to 12 00 00 AM on the current date e Set the End time date to 11 59 59 PM on the current date Start section If you want to filter a report by a specific date select the Start date checkbox and choose a specific start date from the drop down calendar April 2003 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 30 31 1 2 3 8 9 10 15 16 17 22 23 24 29 30 1 lt Today 37672003 e Select the first month for which data is to be included in this report Use the DW and _ navigation buttons to view different months You can also click on the name of the month to access a drop down list of every month e Select the first year for which data is to be included in this report To change the year click on the name of the year and use the spin buttons 20035 e Once you have selected a month and a year click on the first day for which data is to be included in this report Note that the day circled in red indicates the current date
445. u may wish to send e mail notifications to all parties that require information about a scheduled visit For a detailed description of the E mail form refer to E mail Form on page 218 To set up e mail notifications click the E mail tab On the E mail form For an e mail to be sent the Allow e mail notification checkbox on the Visits form in the Cardholder Options folder must be selected a In the Include section verify the Default Recipients checkbox is selected as long as you wish to send e mail messages to the default revision 105 205 14 Visits Folder 206 revision 105 recipients The default recipients are configured in the following locations e On segmented systems select Administration gt Segments click the Segments tab then click the Visits sub tab On the Visits sub tab you can view or modify the default recipients e On nonsegmented systems select Administration gt System Options then click the Visits tab On the Visits tab you can view or modify the default recipients b Select the Cardholder for this visit checkbox if you wish to have an e mail sent to the cardholder for this visit c Select the Visitor for this visit checkbox if you wish to have an e mail sent to the visitor for this visit d Click Add if you wish to add another recipient The Add recipient window displays You may add a cardholder visitor directory account or SMTP address Cardholder Visitor C Directory a
446. u want the selected cardholder to be assigned to If you want to assign additional segments if any exist click on an entry in the Additional Segments listing window to select it You can select multiple entries Click OK Modify a Group of Cardholder s Segments 3 Locate the group of cardholder records you want to change Select Bulk gt Change Cardholder Segments from the Cardholder menu The Bulk Segment Change window opens Bulk Segment Change Choose Operation xi WARNING This operation will affect all people in your current search results and cannot be undone once the processing begins Please be certain that you have properly narrowed your search results and exercise appropriate Select the operation to perfom on the current search results C Set the exact assignments This will remove all existing assignments and set them to those that you select Back Cancel Help Select the Make changes to segment assignments radio button or select the Set the exact assignments radio button if you want all assignments that revision 105 151 12 Cardholders Folder 152 revision 105 9 exist for the cardholders in your group to be replaced with the new assignments you select Click Next Select which primary segment you want the selected groups of cardholders to be assigned to If you selected the Set the exact assignments radio button in step 3 and if you want to assign additional segm
447. ue not gray From the Options menu select Capture Image The Multimedia Capture window displays Click Export The Save As window displays Enter a file name and click Save If the photo is bitmapped and the crop window is used the portion of the image within the cropped area is saved Otherwise the whole photo is saved Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Create a Video Event Video events are automatically created in Alarm Monitoring if a camera is correctly added to a video recorder hardware is linked to the camera and an alarm video configuration is established You can also manually create a video event to lock mark video at the exact start and stop times you desired For example if the B A S I S system automatically creates an event for a door forced open but you want the event to include 5 seconds after the event occurred you can review the video and manually create an event at the desired times 1 Follow the procedures to aLaunch Video Live Recorded From a Camera on on page 88 Verify the recorded video is playing in the Video Player 2 If necessary use the toolbar settings and the start and stop time fields to identify the portion of video to be marked as an event 3 From the Options menu select Create Video Event The Alarm Monitoring window displays a User Generated Video Event alarm Switch Camera Views Displayed in Video Player Switch Cameras and device groups can be dragged and dropped fr
448. ugh the Configure gt Alarm Filter menu option That is because the Pending Alarms window is intended to summarize ALL pending alarms To display the window select the Pending Alarms option from the View menu or click the View Pending Alarms toolbar button ei Alarm Monitoring System Account Pending Alarms Die Edit View Trace Configure Control Options Window Help 6 Se leer Controller Device e Door Forced Open BAS 1000 BAS 1320 2020 del iolxi EA Te Selected alarm Man Alarm Monitor Ready BREAKTHROUGH DISABLED Connection errors 1 Offine controllers 10 Offine To view tables of the menu items and toolbar options refer to Menus and Toolbars on page 33 Alarm Monitoring User Guide Procedure for Monitoring Alarms Sort Alarms Alarms are listed in the order indicated by the sort criterion To determine the current sort criterion locate Sort criteria in the status bar lower right side of the screen You can rearrange the order of existing and new alarms using either of these two methods e Clicking a column heading e Selecting View gt Sort by from the Main Alarm Monitoring menu The choices available in the Sort by submenu are Column name Description Alarm Description Lists alarms alphabetically by alarm description Account Group Lists alarms in order of receiver account group panels Receiver accounts are used to repres
449. uide ISC Firmware Download Properties Window Displayed by clicking Add on the Action Group Properties window and selecting ISC Firmware Download from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide You can also select the Action Types ISC Firmware Download Category Object combination in the Add Action Wizard ISC Firmware Download Properties xi ISC Firmware Download Description Download Firmware Panel 1 Max number of panels to be downloaded at a time E a Controller 7 Panel 1 Cancel Help Note If you have accessed this window via the Scheduler folder the window will also contain the Schedule tab For more information refer to Chapter 20 Scheduler Folder on page 317 revision 105 361 A Actions ISC Firmware Download Properties Window Field Table Form Element Type Comment Description text Displays a description of the access panel which is selected in the Access Panel listing window Note This field only displays a description when one and only one access panel is selected Max number of spin buttons When configuring a firmware download as an action select the panels to be maximum number of access panels that can be downloaded at a time downloaded at a time Controller listing display Displays a list of available controllers that have been configured in the window sy
450. uler E xi Scheduler Service status Not unning Host name Current time in GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada sl Nov O7 2001 04 18PM Status Archive Purge Database At 12 OAM on 11 7 2001 GMT 05 00 Eastern Never c Guard Tour Oc 11 day s at 12 00 GMT m Nov 0 Print Report Access Denial At 12 00 00 AM on 11 7 2001 GMT 05 00 Eastern Never 4 Modify Delete Help 318 revision 105 Scheduler Form Field Table Alarm Monitoring User Guide Scheduler Folder Scheduler Form Form Element Type Comment Current time in drop down list When scheduling an action select which time zone you want the action to be scheduled in The selections in the drop down list are listed sequentially and each includes e The world time zones clock time relative to Greenwich Mean Time For example GMT 05 00 indicates that the clock time in the selected world time zone is 5 hours ahead of the clock time in Greenwich England e The name of one or more countries or cities that are located in that world time zone Listing window display Displays a list of all scheduled actions Add push button Click this button to open the Add Action Wizard Modify push button Click this button to modify the selected scheduled action Delete push button Click this button to delete the selected scheduled action Help push button Click this button to display online assistance for this form
451. up Acknowledge Alarms 120 revision 105 The Fast Group Acknowledge feature allows you to acknowledge a group of alarms simultaneously This feature can be used without bringing up the acknowledgment dialog box Select the alarm s that you wish to acknowledge e To choose two or more alarms hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while selecting additional alarms e To select all the alarms press lt Ctrl gt lt F11 gt Toolbar Shortcut a Notes Alarm Monitoring User Guide Acknowledge the group of alarms by completing one of the following e Choose Fast Group Acknowledge from the Edit menu e Right click the selected group of alarms and choose Fast Group Acknowledge e Click the Fast Group Acknowledge toolbar button e Press lt Ctrl gt lt F12 gt A message displays Monitoring Station S Acknowledge selected alarm s Click Yes to confirm the acknowledgment of the alarms If any of the chosen alarms require notes upon acknowledgment you will be prompted to enter notes If any one of the alarms has already been acknowledged it cannot be re acknowledged A message displays to inform you of how many alarms have been acknowledged Click OK and delete the alarm s The configuration for any given alarm may require that the operator log in upon acknowledging the alarm If this is the case the user will be prompted to log in The configuration for an alarm may also require an acknowledgment passwor
452. ured When a directory is properly configured the accounts are listed on the Select Account form when linking a user account to a directory If you are using single sign on ensure that the directory account is properly linked to the user account Switch Log On Switch Log On is often used when multiple operators use the same Alarm Monitoring station Instead of logging out of the application operators can use the 30 revision 105 Notes Alarm Monitoring User Guide switch log on feature This simultaneously logs out the previous operator and logs in the new operator 1 Select Switch Log On from the File menu 2 The Log On to Alarm Monitoring window displays 3 Enter the user name and password 4 Select the desired directory 5 Click OK When using switch log on the person who s logged into Windows can be a different person than the one logged into Alarm Monitoring Switch log on cannot be used if the new user has a monitor zone user assignment different from the current user Log Out of the Application When you log out of the application the entire application closes 1 Select Log Off from the File menu 2 The current user is logged off but the application remains open Exit the Application Close button x You can close and exit the application using the following methods e Select Exit from the File menu e Double click the icon located in the upper left corner of the title bar When promp
453. useful for days like snow days when employees can t make it to work on time OK push button Click this button to add the action and exit out of the Reader Mode Group Properties window Cancel push button Click this button to exit the Reader Mode Group Properties window without adding the action Help push button Click this button to display online help for this window Reader Mode Group Properties Window Procedures Add a Reader Mode Group Action revision 105 387 A Actions 388 revision 105 Display the Reader Mode Group Properties window From the Reader Device Group listing window click on an entry to select it From the Reader Mode drop down list select a reader mode for the selected reader group When configuring a reader mode group action for readers on a Best controller that are primary readers to alternate biometric readers you can select a Verify Mode When verify mode is enabled for alternate reader support the primary reader will ask for verification from the alternate reader Select the First Card Unlock checkbox if you want this reader mode group action to enable first card unlock Click OK Alarm Monitoring User Guide Report Print Properties Window Displayed by clicking Add on the Action Group Properties window and selecting Report Print from the Select Action Type window For more information refer to the Action Group Library Folder chapt
454. ush button Clears all current filter criteria Print push button Displays the Print Report Options window Preview push button Displays the selected report with selected criteria in the Report Print Preview window Help push button Displays relevant on screen help for this form revision 105 267 15 Reports Folder Reports Folder Event Reports Form Continued Form Element Type Comment Use restored records checkbox If this checkbox is selected data for an event or user transaction report is obtained from restored events transactions in the database rather than from the current live events transactions Restored events transactions are those restored using the Restore Archive button on the Restoring form of the Archives folder For more information refer to the Archives Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Close push button Closes the Reports folder Event Reports Form Procedures Run an Event Report 268 revision 105 Note 1 2 3 Select Reports from the View menu The Reports folder opens Select the Event Reports tab In the reports listing window select the icon that corresponds to the report you wish to run Complete the Date Time Filter section to specify a date time interval for gathering data Only data gathered during the specified period will be included in the report To limit each date in the range to the specified time i
455. ut applying any changes Video Search Performance Requirements A fast network 100 Mbps or greater is recommended between the site where video is located and the site where the computer running the Video Player is located A fast network is recommended because all video is analyzed on the client side therefore the faster video can be transmitted from the server side the faster the search will be The hard drive speed on the server side must be able to support the number of clients using the server Clients include Video Players and archive servers A fast CPU on the client computer is also recommended This is primarily due to the motion detection feature In some cases when the network and server side hard drive are fast enough the CPU on the client side can be the bottleneck A Pentium III based computer is required although a Pentium IN computer is recommended Video Monitoring Procedures aLaunch Video Live Recorded From a Camera 88 revision 105 1 To launch video in Alarm Monitoring complete one of the following e In an alarm window right click an alarm and select Launch Video e Ina map or System Status window right click a device icon and select Launch Video e In the Device Group window right click a camera icon and select Launch Video e Inthe Video Monitoring window double click an online camera or right click a camera icon and select Launch Video e Drag and drop a camera camera device group or reco
456. want the action to occur on a daily basis If you want the action to occur every day in the Daily section type the number in the Every___day s field If you want the action to occur every other day type the number 2 and so on Select the Weekly radio button in the Occurs section if you want the action to occur on a weekly basis If you want the action to occur every week in the Weekly section type the number 1 in the Every___ week s on field If you want the action to occur every other week type the number 2 and so on You must also select the checkbox that corresponds with the day of the week that you want the action to occur For example if you want the action to occur every other Monday type the number 2 in the Every___ week s on field and select the Mon checkbox Select the Monthly radio button in the Occurs section if you want the action to occur on a monthly basis Then do one of the following Select the Day___of every___ month s radio button and type in which day of how many months you want the action to occur The following example shows an action being scheduled to occur on the 4th day of every 6th month Ge Dau D E of every P H month s Select the The of ever month s radio button and enter which day of how many months you want the action to occur revision 105 323 20 Scheduler Folder The following example shows an action being scheduled to occur of the 2nd Tuesday of every 3rd month
457. when negative tax is used Negative Total Negative Total POS Generated when there is a negative total No Biometric Template No Biometric Template Biometric Generated when no biometric template data Data Data was available from the biometric reader at the end of a verification sequence Not Configured Not Configured System Generated when a device has not been configured or defined by the host No Sale No Sale POS Transaction generated for a no sale Open Line Active Open Line Active System Generated when an open line fault condition has been detected Open Line Restored Cancelled Open Line System Generated when the open line fault condition was restored Override Override POS Generated when the preprogrammed price is Preprogrammed Price Preprogrammed Price overridden Panel Download Full Panel Download System Generated when a database download to the Completed Completed controller has completed Panel Download Full Panel Download System Generated when a database download to the Started Started controller has started Panel Free Memory Panel Free Memory System Generated when the free memory in the Low Low panel controller is below what is determined to be a safe value Panel ID Mismatch Panel ID Mismatch System Generated when the panel controller has a different ID than what is in the database This can happen if a new panel or replacement panel is placed out in the field A download to the panel should correct the problem P
458. window lists all the devices being tested and their current status whether the test was successful unsuccessful Devices that failed the test flash in red The bottom portion of the window displays a trace of the related alarms 8 When the test is finished all the windows and monitoring stations resume their normal display of alarms Note Device status is not available for Matrix Switchers or Account Panels Locate or Search for a Device Operators can locate or search for a device in any window in Alarm Monitoring 1 Display any Alarm Monitoring window 2 Verify your cursor is in the window 3 Begin typing the name of the device The system automatically scrolls to the first occurrence of those letters in column one View the Last Connection Time for Dialup Panels The Last connect time status is displays in parenthesis after each dialup panel It reflects the time of the panel s last Communications Restored event and is updated every time you disconnect from the panel revision 105 71 5 Monitor Devices To view a dialup panel s Last connect time within Alarm Monitoring e Locate the dialup panel in the System Status window In parenthesis after the name of the dialup panel the Last connect time is listed Last Connection Time Guidelines The following are guidelines for the Last connect time status e If adialup panel has never connected the Last connect time for it is Never e Ifa dialup panel
459. y Folder chapter in the System Administration User Guide Click on an entry in the Objects listing window to select it Click Next Depending on which Category Object combination you chose in steps 3 and 4 a corresponding action properties window will open For example if you selected Action Types in the Category listing window and Archive Purge Database in the Objects listing window then the Archive Purge Database Properties window would open Click the Schedule tab The Schedule form is displayed The Schedule form is the same in every action properties window that is accessed via the Scheduler folder World time zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada E m Schedule Type Dne time On date In 8 2001 x At time 1200 AM Recurring Change Cancel Help From the World time zone drop down list select which time zone you want the action to be scheduled in The selections in the drop down list are listed sequentially and each includes es The world time zone s clock time relative to Greenwich Mean Time For example GMT 05 00 indicates that the clock time in the selected revision 105 321 20 Scheduler Folder world time zone is 5 hours ahead of the clock time in Greenwich England e The name of one or more countries or cities that are located in that world time zone 8 If you want to schedule the action to occur more than once skip this step and proce
460. y start and end time to each day checkbox If selected the specified time range will be applied to any date that falls within the specified date range For example if you specify a Date Time Filter starting January 1 1998 at 8 00 AM and ending March 31 1998 at 7 00 PM e H this box is checked the report will include only data collected during the hours of 8 00 AM through 7 00 PM on any and all days between January 1 and March 31 e H this box is not checked the report will include all data gathered from 8 00 AM on January straight through until March 31 at 7 00 PM Report All push button If this button is pushed all entries in the Alarm Panel list are deselected Report All is displayed to the left of this button to indicate that data for all readers will be included in the report Report All __ selected display Indicates Report All if no devices are selected in the Alarm Panel field Indicates __ selected if one or more devices are selected in the Alarm Panel field Alarm Panel listing window display Lists all alarm panels on the system and the access panel to which each is attached To select deselect an alarm panel click on the icon beside it A x on an icon indicates that the alarm panel is selected Only data from selected alarm panels will be included in the report However if no devices are selected data for all alarm panels will be reported Clear push
461. yboard on a mobile computer is awkward The wedge scanner provides a quick way to search for a cardholder and instantly grant or deny access based on the system s recommendation e Enterprise installations Some Enterprise installations may choose to use a wedge scanner as a way of preventing duplicate badges Since the card is swiped instead of typing a number in the possibility of entering a wrong badge ID is eliminated The settings on the Keyboard Wedge Settings window determine the format of the data that is sent between a wedge scanner and the B A S LS system and are specified on a per workstation basis Administrative rights to the workstation are required to change these settings because any changes must be written to the ACS INI file revision 105 137 12 Cardholders Folder Displaying the Keyboard Wedge Settings Window The Keyboard Wedge Settings window is displayed by selecting Keyboard Wedge Settings from the Cardholder menu In System Administration ID CredentialCenter Visitor Management and View Edit Only the Cardholder menu is only displayed after selecting Cardholders from the Administration menu In Alarm Monitoring and Digital Video the Cardholder menu is displayed after clicking the toolbar button CAC Barcodes A common access card CAC is a military issued ID card that is issued to active duty personnel selected reservists Department of Defense civilian employees eligible contractors and some for

Reports Form Procedures

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents